Loewe Individual TV User guide

Individual
TV
35318022
Individual 55
Individual 46
Individual 40
User guide
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Imprint
Imprint
Loewe Technologies GmbH
Industriestraße 11
D-96317 Kronach
www.loewe.de
Printed in Germany
Editorial date 05/14-3.0b TB
© Loewe Technologies GmbH, Kronach
ID: 2.3.24
All rights including translation, technical modifications and errors
reserved.
2
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Table of contents
Imprint...........................................................................................2
Welcome ........................................................................................5
Scope of delivery .......................................................................................... 5
About this user guide ................................................................................... 5
Media+ .........................................................................................55
General information on media reproduction ..........................................55
Accessing your media................................................................................55
Video ........................................................................................... 56
Video playback............................................................................................ 57
For your safety..............................................................................6
Basic Functions ............................................................................8
Remote control .............................................................................9
Operating controls on the TV set ............................................. 10
Connections rear side of the device .........................................11
Individual 40 / Individual 46....................................................................... 11
Individual 55 .................................................................................................12
Preparing the TV set .................................................................. 13
Installing the TV set .....................................................................................13
Set covers .....................................................................................................13
Connecting the TV set ................................................................................13
Bundling the cables .....................................................................................15
Preparing the remote control unit .............................................................15
Switching the TV set ON/OFF ...................................................................16
Technical information .................................................................................16
General information on menu operation ..................................17
Info display...................................................................................................20
Operation without remote control............................................................20
Initial installation ....................................................................... 21
Initial installation wizard ..............................................................................21
TV set as a monitor ....................................................................................32
Home view...................................................................................33
Home - Favourites ......................................................................................34
TV .................................................................................................35
Setting the volume .....................................................................................35
Select station ..............................................................................................35
Status display.............................................................................................. 37
Function list .................................................................................................38
AV list ............................................................................................................38
Electronic Programme Guide – EPG........................................................39
Teletext .........................................................................................................42
Rotate TV .....................................................................................................43
HbbTV / MediaText....................................................................................44
Picture in Picture (PIP) ...............................................................................45
Digital Recorder ..........................................................................................46
Digital-Recorder – Overview of functions ............................................46
TV viewing with time shift ....................................................................... 47
Archive recording.....................................................................................48
DR+ archive ..............................................................................................50
DR+ Streaming ........................................................................................54
Follow me function ..................................................................................54
Audio/Radio .............................................................................. 64
Audio playback ...........................................................................................65
Radio mode (DVB radio) ...........................................................................68
Radio mode (Internet radio) .....................................................................69
Photo ...........................................................................................70
Photo display................................................................................................71
Web ..............................................................................................72
MediaNet ..................................................................................................... 72
Browser........................................................................................................ 74
Extras........................................................................................... 75
Timer ............................................................................................................ 75
Conditional Access module (CA module)...............................................80
DVB Common Interface Standard (CI) ....................................................81
DR+ Streaming ............................................................................................81
Special functions ........................................................................................82
Integrated features .....................................................................................82
Picture ..........................................................................................................84
Sound ...........................................................................................................88
Stations ........................................................................................................89
Automatic scan TV+Radio .....................................................................90
Manual Scan TV / Radio..........................................................................91
Station lists TV / Radio ...........................................................................93
Compose / edit Personal list..................................................................94
Update station list automatically ...........................................................95
Control .........................................................................................................96
Language .................................................................................................. 97
EPG ............................................................................................................ 97
Parental lock .............................................................................................98
Energy efficiency......................................................................................99
Quick start mode .....................................................................................99
Software update.....................................................................................100
On-screen displays ................................................................................105
Time and date ........................................................................................105
DVB settings ...........................................................................................106
PIP ............................................................................................................106
DR+ ......................................................................................................... 107
Standard Teletext...................................................................................108
HbbTV .....................................................................................................109
CA module(s) ..........................................................................................110
Rotate TV ..................................................................................................111
Record ......................................................................................................112
WEB key function....................................................................................112
Hard disks ................................................................................................113
Network settings.....................................................................................114
Multimedia settings ................................................................................ 117
Renderer .................................................................................................. 117
3
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Table of contents
System settings (continued) .................................................. 118
Connections ...............................................................................................118
Sound components ...............................................................................119
Antenna DVB .......................................................................................... 123
AV connection settings ......................................................................... 123
Digital Link............................................................................................... 124
Gaming mode ........................................................................................ 124
Assign digital audio input ...................................................................... 125
External devices .......................................................................126
Devices to the HDMI connections.......................................................... 126
Digital Link HD ........................................................................................... 127
Devices on AV............................................................................................ 128
Devices on AVS ......................................................................................... 129
Connecting the Loewe speaker system.................................................131
Connecting active loudspeakers............................................................ 132
Connecting the HiFi/AV amplifier........................................................... 132
Audio playback from external devices................................................... 133
Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12)............................................................. 133
Operating Loewe units ............................................................................. 134
Teaching the remote control .................................................. 135
Loewe Apps ............................................................................................... 136
Loewe Apps ............................................................................... 137
Troubleshooting .......................................................................139
Technical Data .......................................................................... 141
Technical data .......................................................................... 141
Function of the connections ................................................................... 142
Media.......................................................................................................... 143
Signals via AVS (PC IN) / HDMI.............................................................. 144
Signal input groups .................................................................................. 144
Accessories ...............................................................................145
Upgrade kits / conversion kits / cables ................................................ 145
Equipment variants .................................................................................. 146
Mounting options ......................................................................................147
Environment .............................................................................148
Glossary ....................................................................................149
EC Declaration of Conformity................................................. 153
Index .......................................................................................... 155
Service....................................................................................... 158
Code page ................................................................................. 159
Notes ......................................................................................... 161
4
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Welcome
Thank you,
for choosing a Loewe TV set!
At Loewe we combine the highest requirements regarding technology, design and ease of use. This applies equally for TV, video and
accessories.
In addition to sleek design and a varied combination of colour and
mounting choices, your Loewe TV set offers a host of technological
options.
Loewe Image+
Image+ and state-of-the-art full HD LCD displays with LED backlit TV
technology guarantee the best image quality and high contrast values
and all this at lowest possible energy consumption.
Scope of delivery
• LCD TV set
• Mains cable
• Antenna cable
• 3 Velcro cable ties (only for Individual 55)
• Remote control Assist with two batteries
• Quick guide
The TV set is delivered ex-factory without speakers. You can configure
your own individual speaker system for your TV set to suit your needs.
Ask your dealer.
Loewe Digital+
The integrated triple tuner for DVB-T/C/S enables the reception of
standard as well as high-definition contents and thanks to the CI Plus
interface even from Pay TV.
Loewe Sound+
About this user guide
For best results regarding safety and the longevity of the set, we
recommend you read the chapter For your safety before switching
it on for the first time.
Audio competence on the highest level - this is for what Loewe is unique:
an integrated multichannel decoder provides 5.1 Home Entertainment
of outstanding quality without any external devices.
The glossary gives explanations of certain terms used in the TV set
and the user guide.
Loewe DR+
Paragraphs which begin with the symbol indicate important instructions, tips or conditions for the following settings.
Due to Loewe DR+, recording of TV transmissions on the integrated
hard disk by simply pressing a key or halting the current transmission
are no problem. Additionally, DR+ Streaming enables the retrieval of
films on further Loewe devices.
Loewe Assist+
The intuitive Loewe user interface Assist Media offers a simple access
to all device functions; by means of the HOME key on the remote control you can access all your favourite content as well as all multimedia
functions of your TV set.
Loewe Media+
The Loewe Miltimedia functions offer you a multitude of options; you
have access to your photos, videos and music in your home network
or on the USB stick.
Loewe MediaNet and MediaText help you to access numerous worldwide web-applications and contents from HbbTV services.
Loewe Connectivity+
Network your TV set by means of numerous interconnection options.
Be it HDMI, USB, CI Plus or LAN/WLAN, discover the world of the
Loewe networking possibilities.
Terms which you will find in the menus or printed on the remote control
or TV set are written in bold type.
The necessary control elements are shown in the descriptions to the
left of the text containing the instructions for action.
In addition to the remote control, a PC keyboard can be connected to
one of the USB ports on your TV and then used to control your TV set.
In the user guide, this symbol indicates places in which
the use of a keyboard is particularly advantageous.
Depending on the connected accessory equipment the menus in the
TV set can differ from those described here.
The TV sets are illustrated without speakers in most figures.
All the station names, programme contents, the illustrated photos,
titles, albums and album covers in this user guide are examples.
The user guide instructions for your TV set is updated at irregular
intervals. We recommend checking now and then, especially after a
software update.
General information on menu operation of
the TV set
For further information on the user interface and the general operation
of your TV set see chapter General information on menu operation.
Interactive data services
In some countries the stations also broadcast interactive data services
with their programmes, leading to the functions of individual buttons
not being available or only so to a limited extent. You can find out more
about this in chapter TV, section HbbTV / MediaText.
5
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
For your safety
For your safety, and to avoid unnecessary damage to your unit,
please read and follow the safety advice below:
Use for the intended purpose and ambient conditions
This TV set is intended exclusively for receiving and playing visual and
audio signals. It must not be used in rooms with a high level of humidity (e.g. bathroom, sauna) or a high dust concentration (e.g. workshops). The manufacturer‘s warranty is only valid for use in the
specified permissible environment.
If the unit is used outdoors, make sure that it is protected from moisture
(rain, dripping water and splashing water or dew). High humidity and
dust concentrations lead to leakage currents in the device. This can
result in a shock hazard by touching it or even fire.
If you have moved the unit out of
the cold into a warm environment,
leave it switched off for about an
hour to avoid the formation of
condensation.
Do not place objects containing
liquids on top of the unit. Protect
the appliance against dripping and
splashing water.
Candles or naked flames must be
kept away from the TV set at all
times to prevent it from catching
fire.
Never place the TV set in a location where it is exposed to vibrations.
This may lead to damage.
Transporting
Move the device in vertical position only. Grasp the device on the
upper and lower edges of the housing.
The set is delivered ex factory without a mounting option. Do not stand
it up on the bottom edge, so as to reduce the risk of damage and soiling. If the set has to be put down during packing/unpacking, place the
TV set with its entire front surface lying flat on soft material such as a
blanket or the fleece from the packing material. Use a blanket or the
fleece from the packing material as an underlay.
The LCD screen is made of glass or plastic and can break if not handled
properly.
Always wear rubber gloves to carry the TV set if the LCD screen is
damaged and liquid crystal might be leaking out. In the case of skin
contact immediately rinse thoroughly with water.
Power supply
Incorrect voltages can damage the unit. This device may only be connected to a power supply with the voltage and frequency indicated on the
type plate using the supplied mains cable. The mains plug of the TV set
must be easily accessible so that the device can be disconnected from
the mains at any time. When unplugging the unit from the mains, pull at
the connector body and not at the cable. The cables in the mains plug
could otherwise be damaged and could cause a short-circuit when
plugged in again.
Lay the mains cable so that it cannot be damaged. Do not step on
the mains cable. The mains cable may not be kinked or laid over sharp
edges nor be exposed to chemicals; the latter also applies to the unit
as a whole. A mains cable with damaged insulation can cause electric
shocks and poses a fire risk.
Air circulation and high temperatures
The vent slots on the rear panel of the set must always be kept unobstructed. Please do not place newspapers or cloths on/over the TV
set.
Ensure that there is at least
10 cm free space on the
sides and above the set for
air circulation, if the set is
placed in a cabinet or on a
shelf.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Like any electronic device,
your TV set requires air for
cooling. Obstruction of the
air circulation can cause fires.
Prevent metal items, needles, paper clips, liquids,
wax, or similar items, from getting into the interior of the device through
the vent slots in the rear panel. Such objects can cause short circuits
in the set, which could possibly cause a fire.
If something should get into the interior of the set then immediately unplug the mains plug of the device and contact the field service
for more information.
Note on the LCD screen
The TV set with LCD screen you have purchased satisfies the most
rigorous quality requirements and has been inspected with respect
to pixel errors. Despite of thorough care when manufacturing the
display, it cannot be 100% guaranteed that no subpixel defects will
occur due to technical reasons. Please understand that these types
of effects, as long as they are within the standard of specified limits,
cannot be considered as a device defect in terms of the guarantee.
Avoid displaying still images for long periods of time. It is possible that
a copy of the image may remain.
TV sets with 3D function
Read the following safety instructions before using the 3D function
of your TV set.
Please use the Loewe 3D TV sets only with the Loewe 3D glasses
which can be purchased as an accessory from your Loewe dealer
(see chapter Accessories).
People that have a visual disorder may not be able to perceive 3D effects or may only be able to perceive them to a limited extent. People
who are sensitive to flickering images (e.g. those with epilepsy) should
only use the 3D function after having consulted their doctor.
It might take some time for you to get used to the 3D glasses and
before you can perceive the 3D effects properly.
Stop using the 3D function immediately if you experience any feelings
of nausea, dizziness or malaise when viewing 3D content.
Supervise children whilst they are viewing 3D content, as they can be
particularly sensitive to it.
Allow more time for a break when viewing 3D films, so that you are
able to relax. Failure to do this could result in headaches, fatigue, dizziness or malaise.
Position yourself comfortably in front of the 3D TV set and ensure that
you are seated firmly. By doing this, you will avoid any injuries that may
arise due to reacting to extreme 3D content.
Switch off any artificial light sources (e.g. energy saving lamp) between
the 3D TV set and the 3D glasses. These could impair the infrared
reception or the TV picture may flicker as a result.
6
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
For your safety
Set-up
Thunder storms
Loewe Flat TV sets are specified for Loewe accessories. The TV set is
suitable for different mounting options. Note the assembly instructions
regarding the different possible mounting options.
Pull out the mains plug and all connected antenna cables from the
TV set in a thunderstorm. Overvoltage caused by lightning strokes
can damage the set via the antenna system, as well as via the mains.
The mains plug and all connected antenna cables should also be pulled
out during long periods of absence.
When using accessories from other manufacturers take care that the
TV set can be easily inclined or rotated on the respective mounting
option.
For mounting options from other manufacturers with motor drive,
make sure that the TV set cannot be rotated manually. The use of
mounting options from other manufacturers with locks in certain
positions is generally discouraged.
During the adjustment of the TV set it is essential to ensure that the pressure exerted on
the device frame is not too large. Especially in
case of large-format displays there is a risk to
damage the screen.
Before setting up the device, please check that the final location is
suitable to bear the load of the device in terms of surface (sensitivity
to pressure) and stability (statics).
This is particularly the case for the high-gloss painted surfaces and
surfaces that are made from real wood / real wood veneer or plastic
surfaces.
Place the TV set with the table or floor stand only on a level, sturdy,
horizontal base. Particularly ensure that the set does not protrude
to the front when placed in or on pieces of furniture.
Place the TV set in a normal position for use. TV set may only be used
in an upright horizontal position. It may not be tilted by more than 10
degrees. The TV set must never be operated in portrait position, lying
flat or hanging overhead from the ceiling.
D
±10°
Automatic shutdown
If the TV is not operated for 4 hours (adjustment of volume, programme change, etc.) the TV will automatically switch to stand-by
mode to save energy. A prompt to terminate this shutdown process
appears one minute before expiry of the 4 hours.
The automatic shutdown is generally active for the TV mode as soon as
the energy efficiency mode Home Mode is enabled for at least one of
the six signal input groups (see chapter Technical Data, section Signal
input groups). This also applies if another energy efficiency mode is
selected during initial installation, but one of the signal input groups is
subsequently set to Home Mode.
Automatic shutdown does not occur when using the radio without
screen display (screen off).
Cleaning and care
Switch off the TV set with the main switch prior to cleaning.
Clean the TV set, the screen, and the remote control unit with a soft,
moist, clean and colour-neutral cloth only, without any aggressive
or scouring cleaning agents.
Repairs and accessories
Never remove the back of the TV set yourself. Have your TV set repaired or serviced by authorised television technicians only.
Only use original accessories such as Loewe stands, if possible (see
chapter Accessories).
Set up the device where it is not exposed to direct sunlight and where
it is not exposed to additional warming through heating elements.
Mounting a Loewe flatscreen TV set to a holder according to the VESA
standard necessarily requires the use of Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts
to prevent damage to the TV set.
D
When mounting the TV set, always check that
all four Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts are used.
The Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts are used to
ensure stability and the necessary distance
between rear wall of the TV set and Vesa-Holder
(at least 5mm).
The Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts are fastened with
a torque of about 4 Nm on the TV set. If you use
a Vesa mounting options from other manufacturers, you can order
the Vesa adapter bolts M8x20 (No. 90460.994) at your authorized
dealer of Loewe.
Supervision
Do not let children loiter and play unsupervised close to the device.
The set could tip over, be pushed off or pulled down from the stand
surface and injure someone.
Do not allow the switched-on TV set to run unattended.
Volume
Loud music can lead to ear damage. Avoid extreme volume especially over long periods and when using headphones.
7
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Basic Functions
On/Off of the television set
Switching the TV set ON / switching it OFF in Standby
mode (Mains switch must be switched ON)
When TV set is switched on:
Press key long: Switch TV set and all CEC-capable
devices connected to the HDMI interfaces OFF to
Standby mode (System Standby).
General navigation
Navigation on the user interface, select
objects
Select station
OK short: Call station list. Or:
OK long: Call expanded station list.
Key functions
TV operation
Call radio mode (standard assignment) (1
Call Home view,
Select the operating mode or the function
Pressing briefly, during screen fade-in function: Info
display,
info text appropriate to the content that can assist you
further, should you have any questions about your TV
device;
Pressing briefly without on-screen display: access
status display.
With status display open and repeatedly pressing the
key call / close the detailed information on the broadcast
Mark station,
OK switch over to station.
Pressing long: show key explanation
Or:
Pressing briefly: Open the DR+ archive
Pressing long: Call up the timer list
P+/P– Next/previous channel
Add current object to Home favourites
Or:
Call MediaNet (standard assignment) (2
Select station with numerical keys
On/Off EPG (Electronic Programme Guide)
Sound
On/Off PIP (picture in picture)
V+/V– Increase/reduce volume
Turn Teletext/MediaText on/off
Sound on/off
Pressing briefly: Call function list for the active
operating mode
Pressing long: call System settings
Colour key function during TV operation
Red key:
Start HbbTV or value-added network
service
Yellow key:
Last selected station
Blue key:
Call function list
(selection of language/sound,
subtitles or channel/video track)
Pressing briefly: step / level back
Pressing long: close all displays
Function of the coloured keys in audio mode
(1
(2
8
Green key:
Switch screen ON/OFF
Yellow key:
Last selected station in DVB radio mode
The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter External devices, section Operating Loewe units).
The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter System settings, section Control – Web key function).
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Remote control
1 Sound mute/on
1
2
3
4
5
6
2 LED display for currently operated device
33
32
31
30
3 Switch to TV mode
4 Reassign remote control to SetTop-Box (PACE DS440N) (1
5 DR+ archive on/off
6 Define active object as favourite
7 Electronic Programme Guide on/off
8 Teletext/MediaText (3 on/off
9 Call function list
29
10 V+/V- Increase/reduce volume
11 Call station list / expanded station list
In the menu: confirm/call up
12 Green coloured key: screen on/off
8
9
28
27
26
25
24
10
23
7
13 Red coloured key: call preferred value-added network service (3
14 Jump / wind
15 Direct recording (One Touch Recording)
16 Start / interrupt timeshift television
17 Finish timeshift
18 Jump / wind
19 Start / continue timeshift television
11
22
20 Blue coloured key: call station function list with subfunctions
21 Yellow coloured key: switching to previously received station
22 In menu / in lists: selecting/setting
12
13
14
15
16
21
20
19
18
17
with Motor Unit connected: Rotate TV set
23 P+/P– Select stations up/down
24 Press briefly: back to previous window (step back)
Press long: close all displays
25 Status display on/off
In menu: context-relevant Info on/ off
26 PIP (picture in picture) on/off
27 Open/close Home view
28 AV list
29 Select station directly
In the menu: Enter numbers or letters
30 Call MediaNet (2
31 Reassign remote control to BluTech Vision 3D (1
32 Switch to radio mode (1
33 Switch ON/OFF to standby mode
System standby
The key assignment displayed here is valid for the main level of the TV set. The key assignment may vary in certain operating modes (see the corresponding chapter in this user guide).
(1
The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter External devices, section Operating Loewe units).
The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter System settings, section Control – Web key function).
(3
Depending on the corresponding settings.
(2
9
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Operating controls on the TV set
Functions of the operating elements
1 Mains switch (1:
The mains switch is located on the bottom of the set.
Always return the TV set to Standby mode before switching it off
with the main switch.
The TV set will be completely separated from mains only when
you unplug the mains cable.
2 On/Off key:
Switching on in standby mode
Switching off to the standby mode
3 IR receiver:
Infrared receiver for receiving the remote control commands.
6
4 Display:
1
M
5
4
9
-
green:
TV set switched on
red:
timer recording active
blue:
TV set in standby and background operation active (EPG data updating, software
update or DR+ streaming server function)
2
3
R
7
TV set in standby
white, intermittent: TV set starts
8
+
white:
5 Infrared transmitter:
When showing 3D content, the 3D glasses Loewe Active
Glasses 3D are controlled via the infrared sensor.
6 Key M:
TV set in standby mode: switch TV set on in TV mode
TV set switched on: call direct control on TV set
in direct control on TV set: up 7 Key R:
TV set in standby mode: switch TV set on in radio mode
TV set switched on: toggle TV mode and radio mode
Direct control on TV set: down 8 Key +:
increase volume
Direct control on TV set: to the right 9 Key – :
reduce volume
Direct control on TV set: to the left (1
In the TV sets with mounted stereo speaker, the power switch can no longer be reached from the front of the set.
10
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Connections rear side of the device
Individual 40 / Individual 46
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
1
2
3
4
5
6 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16 17 18
1
AC IN - Mains connection
15 DIGITAL AUDIO LINK - Surround audio outputs (digital)
2
RS-232C - Serial interface
16 HDMI 1 - HDMI input 1 (with HDMI ARC support)
3
CONTROL - Rotating stand control
17 HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2
4
AUDIO OUT R - Speaker connection on the right (+/–)
18 LAN - Network connection
5
AUDIO OUT L - Speaker connection on the left (–/+)
19 USB - USB connection
6
IR LINK - Infrared transmitter connection
20 HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3
7 AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue)
21 HDMI 4 - HDMI input 4
8
CENTER IN - Centre audio input (analogue)
22 CI COMMON INTERFACE - Common interface 1 (CI slot 1)
9
SYSTEM SPEAKER - Loewe system speaker connection
23 CI COMMON INTERFACE - Common interface 2 (CI slot 2)
10 AV - Mini AV socket
(1
24
- Headphone connection
11 ANT-TV - Antenna/cable analogue/digital
25 AVS - Mini AV socket (1
12 ANT SAT - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1)
26 SPDIF IN - Digital sound input
13 ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2)
27 USB - USB connection
14 SPDIF OUT - Digital audio output
28 USB - USB connection
(1
19
Adaptor set is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
11
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Connections rear side of the device
Individual 55
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
18
10
19
11
12
13 14 15
1
AC IN - Mains connection
15 LAN - Network connection
2
RS-232C - Serial interface
16 USB - USB connection
3
CONTROL - Rotating stand control
17 AUDIO OUT R - Speaker connection on the right (+/–)
4
AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue)
18 AUDIO OUT L - Speaker connection on the left (–/+)
5
CENTER IN - Centre audio input (analogue)
19 IR LINK - Infrared transmitter connection
6
SYSTEM SPEAKER - Loewe system speaker connection
20 HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3
7 AV - Mini AV socket (1
21 HDMI 4 - HDMI input 4
8
ANT-TV - Antenna/cable analogue/digital
22 CI COMMON INTERFACE - Common interface 1 (CI slot 1)
9
ANT SAT - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1)
23 CI COMMON INTERFACE - Common interface 2 (CI slot 2)
10 ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2)
24
11 SPDIF OUT - Digital audio output
25 AVS - Mini AV socket (1
12 DIGITAL AUDIO LINK - Surround audio outputs (digital)
26 SPDIF IN - Digital sound input
13 HDMI 1 - HDMI input 1 (with HDMI ARC support)
27 USB - USB connection
14 HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2
28 USB - USB connection
(1
Adaptor set is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
12
- Headphone connection
16
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Preparing the TV set
Installing the TV set
Connecting the TV set
Mounting options
Connecting to the mains supply
Your Loewe specialist dealer can assist you in finding other mounting
options that correspond to your needs. Use exclusively Loewe mounting options (e.g., wall bracket, floor stand), which you will find in the
chapter Accessories, section Mounting options.
Remove the cover for the connections.
Connect the TV set to a 220-240V mains socket:
First plug the small plug of the power cable into the mains connection
on the back of the TV and then the large mains plug into a mains socket.
After you have decided on a mounting option, follow the directions
found in the corresponding assembly instructions.
Installation notes
Choose a place for installing your TV set where no bright light or
sunlight shines directly onto the screen. This could cause reflections
which impair the picture.
3 times the screen diagonal can be taken as a guide value for the viewing distance (e.g., for a 46-inch set approx. 3.5 m for SD signal). The
viewing distance can be reduced with an HD signal.
Set covers
Covers for rear and side connections
In order to remove the rear side cable covers pull them simply from
the device.
To fit the cover, insert the lugs at the top edge of the cover into the
corresponding cut-outs in the rear panel and push up the cover until
it snaps in.
The side cover of the TV set can also be completely removed. For this,
open it as far as it will go and gently pull on the open cover.
The cover detaches from the holder and gives free access to the
connection area. To replace the cover, simply push it until it latches
back into place.
Connecting antennas
Cable (analogue) / DVB-C / DVB-T antenna:
Plug the cable of antenna, cable TV system or room antenna into the
ANT TV socket.
If you want to use analogue cables / DVB-C connection and a DVB-T
antenna together, use an external antenna switch (available from
your dealer).
Satellite antenna DVB-S:
Depending on the used satellite system, connect a connecting cable
from the multi-switch or directly from the LNC to the ANT-SAT and
ANT-SAT2 sockets of the TV set respectively.
When connecting the TV set to a single cable community antenna,
connect the ANT-SAT and ANT-SAT2 sockets directly to the appropriate SAT antenna socket.
When connecting the TV set to a DiSEqC single cable community
antenna (in accordance with EN 50494), connect the ANT-SAT
socket directly to the appropriate SAT antenna socket.
In case of a DiSEqC one cable communal system you require only
one antenna cable. Further distribution of the signal to the two
reception routes is accomplished by the TV set's satellite tuner.
Ask your dealer in this regard.
Cable
analogue /
DVB-C
R
DVB-T
DVB-S
TV
13
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Preparing the TV set
Connecting speakers
Connecting the TV set to the Home network
The TV set is delivered ex-factory without speakers. Various options
are available for connecting speakers to your set.
You may link your TV set to the home network by a wired connection
(Ethernet, Powerline) or by a wireless radio connection (WLAN).
Please contact your specialist dealer for more information on Powerline.
From the accessories set the Loewe system speaker Stereospeaker I
40/46/55 should be used that will have to be mounted below the TV
set and connected to the SYSTEM SPEAKER socket. See the assembly instructions for the Loewe system speaker for further information.
For the network adaptor configuration, see chapter System settings,
section Multimedia / Network – Network settings.
Under no circumstances may the TV set be wired and at the
same time connected by a wireless connection to the same
network, e.g. router. This may cause severe operational faults!
If you want to use other speakers, two speakers can be connected
to the speaker connections (screw terminals) of the TV set (min. 4
Ohms / min. 20 W sinus).
Speaker systems or active speakers can be connected to the DIGITAL
AUDIO LINK connection.
Für Anschluss und Konfiguration von Lautsprechersystemen oder
Aktivboxen see chapter System settings, section Connections –
Sound components.
Example for a wired connection
Connect the LAN socket of your TV set to the LAN switch/router of
your home network with a network cable (available from your dealer).
TV set
LAN switch/router
PC
Connecting external speakers to the speaker terminals
To connect the speakers, switch the TV set off with the mains switch
and pull out the mains plug.
The jumper plug on the system speaker connection must be plugged
or remain plugged.
You have connected and laid the connecting cables at the speakers.
Press on the locking mechanism of the spring clamp speaker terminal,
in order to open the clamp.
Push the deisolated connecting cables (max. 1.5 mm2) of the speakers
in the terminal of the same colour (red to red, black to black). Also
take notice of the connection labels of the speakers Right (R) and Left
(L) and the symbols “+” equals red and “–” equals black (see figure).
Make sure that the sheaths of the connecting cables are not accidentally pinched.
When releasing the locking mechanism of the speaker terminal the
connecting cable will be clamped tight.
Front
right
Individual 40 / 46
Front
left
DSL
Example for a wireless connection
You can connect the TV set to your home network by a wireless radio
connection via the WLAN antenna inside the set.
Shadow effects of various materials, such as reinforced concrete,
metal surfaces, etc., attenuate the WIFI signal sometimes significantly or completely.
.
TV set
Front
right
Individual 55
WLAN router
PC
Front
left
DSL
Rear views of the devices
14
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Preparing the TV set
Bundling the cables
Preparing the remote control unit
The cables connected to the TV set can be bundled and fixed to the
back of the housing using the cable supports (Individual 40/46) as
well as Velcro cable ties (Individual 55) provided.
Inserting or replacing batteries
Individual 40/46
Unlatch the two cable supports (A) at the rear panel of the TV set,
bundle the cables and click the cable support into the rear panel again.
Press on the embossed arrow whilst pushing the battery cover down.
Only use leak-proof micro-cells of the LR 03 (AAA) Alkali-Manganese
type. Do not use different types of batteries and old and new batteries together.
The batteries used must not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunlight, fire or similar!
Pay attention to the correct polarity of + and – when inserting the
batteries.
If the batteries are too weak after longer use, the TV set prompts you
to change the batteries.
Dispose of used batteries in an environmentally friendly way (see
chapter Environment / Legal information).
Push the cover back on from below after having inserted the batteries.
A
A
Individual 55
A
LR
A
AA
03
LR
AA
Bundle the cables and the thread the accompanying 3 Velcro cable
ties (B) through the holders and pull them tight.
03
Adjusting the remote control for operating the TV set
Press the TV key.
B
B
B
See in chapter External devices,section Operating
Loewe units how to operate other Loewe appliances
and how to re-programme the remote control keys.
Then fit the cover for the connections (see chapter Preparing the TV
set, section Set covers).
15
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Switching the TV set ON/OFF
Switching the TV set on by means of the remote control
Switching the TV set ON/OFF
Press the on/off key.
Switching TV set to the standby mode
(1
Press the mains switch at the bottom of the set.
The indicator in the control panel on the front side lights up white. The
set is now in standby mode.
Or:
Press the TV key.
The previously watched station will be called.
Or:
Press numerical keys 1-9.
The corresponding station will be called.
After switching on the TV set, it takes a few seconds for further
operating commands to be processed (Exception: Quick start
mode, see chapter System settings, section Control – Quick
start mode). Your TV set is ready to operate as soon as the status
indicator in the control panel lights up in green.
M
-
+
Switching the set off with the remote control (Standby)
R
Mains switch
Control unit
Press the on/off key.
Before switching off the set with the mains switch,
we recommend you to switch it to standby mode.
Switching the TV on/off on the control unit
To switch the TV set into Operating mode or switch it off to Standby
mode, press the middle of the On/Off button for about 2 seconds.
Display
Switching off the TV set and connected additional devices
(System standby)
Press on/off key long:
Switch TV set and all CEC-capable devices connected
to the HDMI interfaces OFF to Standby mode (System
Standby).
Meaning of the colour of the LEDs in the On/Off button:
white:
TV set in standby
white, intermittent: TV set starts
green:
TV set switched on
red:
Timer recording active
blue:
TV set in standby and background operation active (EPG data updating, software
update, DR+ streaming server function)
After switching on the TV set, it takes a few seconds for further
operating commands to be processed (Exception: Quick start
mode, see chapter System settings, section Control – Quick
start mode). Your TV set is ready to operate as soon as the status
indicator in the control panel lights up in green.
Technical information
Switching off the TV set with the mains switch during operation or an
inadvertent disruption to the power supply (e.g. power failure) can
cause damage to the hard disk file system and hence loss of the recorded broadcasts. Always return the TV set to Standby mode before
switching it off with the main switch. Never ever disconnect the USB
storage device from the TV set during a copy process.
However, if unexpected problems occur when operating the hard disk,
formatting the hard disk may rectify this. Refer to the instructions in
chapter System settings, section Control – Hard disks. This applies
also to the use of external USB hard disks with the TV set.
Loewe are not liable for the loss of data on the integrated hard disk
of your TV set. To avoid data loss, we recommend copying important
recordings to an external storage medium.
(1
In the TV sets with mounted stereo speaker, the power switch can no longer be reached from the front of the set.
16
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
General information on menu operation
General information on menu operation
Some keys of the remote control for operating the TV set you will use
more often than others. The most important keys for navigation will
be explained in general. The numbers in the text refer to the figure
showing the remote control in chapter Remote control.
The arrow keys 22 help you to navigate in the menus and lists of the
TV set and for selecting menu items. They are arranged in the middle
of the remote control in a circle around the OK key 11 . Later in this
quick guide they will be represented as follows:
Structure of the Menu screen
Basically, the structure of the different menu screens is similar, depending on the fact if a wizard, rendering media content or a setup
menu are concerned. The structure is explained by means of three
different screens.
The functions of these menu screens are explained more detailed in
the respective chapters.
Screen structure: Wizard
Select the desired item.
A
INITIAL INSTALLATION - Menu language
Which menu language do you want to use for operation?
The OK key 11 is used to confirm a selection, for calling the highlighted
menu item and for opening the station list. In this quick guide, an
instruction for this key looks like the following:
OKconfirm.
Deutsch
(de)
Ελληνικά
(el)
Svenska
(sv)
English
(en)
Polski
(pl)
Dansk
(da)
Français
(fr)
Magyar
(hu)
Português
(pt)
Italiano
(it)
Suomi
(fi)
Русский
(ru)
Español
(es)
Slovenščina (sl)
Norsk
(no)
Nederlands (nl)
Slovenčina
(sk)
₼㠖
(zh)
Čeština
Türkçe
(tr)
(cs)
Back with
B
C
Proceed with
Using the numerical keys of your remote control 29 you enter programme channels and teletext pages directly. With key 0 you open
the AV list. In this user guide, entering numbers with numerical keys
is shown as follows:
(A) Title bar with name of the wizard and the current operating step.
Entering programme channel directly.
(B) Selected items, whose number can be different according to the
operating step.
The numerical keys are also used to enter text (see chapter General
information on menu operation,section Entry of characters by
remote control).
The Home view is the central overview page for all of your TV set‘s
operating modes. You reach Home view with the HOME key 27 .
(C) Bottom line showing the available operating controls. If required,
instructions and information are inserted.
Screen structure: Rendering of media content (example:
Audio player)
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
A
B
Back
HOME: Call Home view.
C
Pressing the BACK key 24 briefly brings you one level up in the wizard.
Pressing the BACK key longer closes all opened fade-ins. An example
for the BACK key in this quick guide:
BACK: Stop text entry and exit entry box.
Hands Open
Chasing Cars
00:00
Shut Your Eyes
D
02:56
04:27
Prolonged pressure on the INFO key 25 shows a key guide window that
gives you information on the currently most important key functions.
E
If the function for a key is not available, this will be indicated by an
inserted symbol
on the right above.
(A) Title bar with selected album / subdirectory.
(B) Menu item Back to exit the menu or to go back to the previous
menu item.
(C) Selection of album or title
(D) Time bar
(E) Bottom line with the different symbols for controlling the playback
function.
17
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
General information on menu operation
Screen structure: Setup (example: picture)
A
B
Picture
C
3D
Picture adjustment
Navigation: Wizards
D
If your desired display format has not been automatically
selected then you can choose it in the 3D settings menu.
You may display the 3D image in 2D or vice versa.
DVB-S settings (ASTRA1 19,2°E)
Please specify whether you want to search for scrambled stations too.
Note: Scrambled stations can only be received with an integrated CA module and
additional card.
Contrast
Brightness
Colour intensity
Image+
Active
Picture format
Scrambled stations
no
Search method
Network search Frequency search
Symbol rate
22000
Accept Logical Channel Number
no
Back with
yes
yes
Proceed with
more ...
(A) Selected function in the Home overview (here: system settings)
(B) Home Menu System settings, with selected menu item Picture.
Go to next step.
(C) Menu items Picture focusing on 3D
(D) Help text for the selected menu item Picture > 3D
Navigation: Selection of elements (example: On-screen displays)
Highlighting and thus selecting the symbols/elements or menu items
on the screen can be effected by the arrow keys on the remote control.
So you can see all the time where you are. As soon as there is a bar
above a symbol or text, this is a selected element.
On-screen displays
...
On-screen
displays
B
If the menu item(s) (marked white) is/are already
correctly preset:
Otherwise:
Mark the menu items to be changed. The
update will be adopted automatically. The
fount colour of the previously active item will
change to grey. If not,
OK confirm the selection.
Go to next step.
Back
Display time
<
7s
Volume display
off
on
Automatic menu info
off
on
Key explanation
off
on
Permanent clock display
off
on
Automatic HDMI hint
off
on
C
Navigation: Element selection in lists using initials
>
A
Using the numerical keys of the remote control you can jump into list,
e.g., Internet radio station lists.
If the list is sorted in alphabetical order, you jump to the entered letter.
For example, when pressing the key 7 three times you jump to the first
list element starting with letter R.
In case of numerical sorting, you can directly select the stations with
the numerical keys.
If you select "on" here, the informational text belonging to each selected menu item will always appear
simultaneously.
(A) Selectable elements / menu items.
(B) The text in the line where the marker is currently located is white.
(C) Move the selection marking by means of the arrow keys to the menu item to be set.
The position of the marking is easy to see by the blue line.
In most cases, the marked menu item will be automatically
adopted. The font colour of the previously active item will change
to grey, that of the newly selected item to white.
In a few menus, to confirm a selected menu item is required by
pressing OK.
18
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
General information on menu operation
Entering characters with on-screen keyboard
For certain functions, entering letters or characters is required, e.g., for
Web addresses (URLs) in the browser or for renaming archive entries.
An on-screen keyboard appears for entering text.
Enter/change internet address
Back
http://www.loewe.de
q
a
Adopt
(2 sec)
OK
w
s
e
r
d
t
z
f
g
u
i
h
j
k
y
x
c
v
b
n
m
.-/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
www.
.de
Space
Delete
.com
Cancel
o
Key
Characters (uppercase - lowercase)
1
[space] 1
2
ABC2ÄÆÃÅĀÀÁĆÇČ - abc2äæãåāâàáćçč
3
DEF3ĖËĒĘÊÈÉ - def3ėëēęêèé
4
GHI4ÏĪĮÎÌÍ - ghi4ïīįîîìí
P
I
l
5
JKL5 - jkl5
9
0
6
MNO6ÖOEÕŌÔÒÓØ - mno6ńñöoeõōôòóø
.
/
7
PQRS7ß - pqrs7ß
8
TUV8ÜŪÛÙÚ - tuv8üūûùú
9
WXYZ9 - wxyz9
0
.0-/_:+,;?!=&#%~@$*’()”§\{}[]<>´`^|
ABC
.net
Table of characters for entering text by means of the remote
control
Adopt
Cancel
on a letter with a triangle shows more letters
highlight character / on-screen button,
OK Adopt character.
In the event of letters with a triangular, additional
letters are displayed when pressing the OK button
longer (2 sec).
For the selection of special characters use the .-/
field.
To conclude the entry:
Mark Adopt,
OK confirm the selection.
Entry of characters by remote control
Alternatively to the on-screen keyboard you can also enter the desired
characters by means of the remote control (as with the keypad of a
mobile phone).
Mark text entry field.
Under the 1st letter of the name you will see a line
indicating the current input position.
Input position one character to the right (also for
blanks).
Input position one character to the left.
Input the letters one after another. When using the
remote control, press the numerical keys just as on
a mobile phone keypad (0-9) until the desired symbol
is displayed. The available letters are printed on the
individual numeric buttons.
You find the exact key assignment in the character
table in the right column.
To conclude the entry:
Mark Adopt,
OK confirm the selection.
19
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
General information on menu operation
Info display
Operation without remote control
The info display provides an info text appropriate to the on-screen
display that can assist you further with the operation of your TV set.
Changing Volume
+ / – Increase/reduce volume.
An on-screen display is faded in.
The factory setting is that the info display is shown
automatically for each menu item. In this case you can
temporarily hide the info texts with the INFO key.
Switching radio on or off or switching to radio
The automatic info display can be hidden via a menu
setting. Then it can be displayed temporarily by pressing the INFO key.
R Radio on or switch between TV and Radio.
Calling direct control on TV set
...
Energy efficiency
Home Mode
Premium
Mode
The priority here is low energy consumption in home use. In this
case, the TV switches off automatically for the sake of saving
energy, after it has been out of operation for four hours.
M Call direct control on TV set.
Shop Mode
Operating
mode
Station selection
AV selection
3D
Contrast
Picture format
Service
Permanently display or hide the automatic info display
Once you have become familiar with how to operate the TV set, you
can switch off the automatic info display.
R Scroll down.
HOME: Call Home view.
M Scroll up.
Mark System settings,
OK call system settings.
– Scroll left.
+ Scroll right, adopt settings, confirm.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Close all displays
Mark more ...,
move to next column.
Press M longer.
Mark On-screen displays,
call on-screen display settings.
Select Automatic menu info,
select on / off.
On-screen displays
...
On-screen
displays
Explanations of the settings:
Operating Switch between TV and radio operation.
mode
Back
Display time
<
7s
Volume display
off
on
Automatic menu info
off
on
Key explanation
off
on
Permanent clock display
off
on
Automatic HDMI hint
off
on
>
Station Call Station selection.
selection
AV selection Select AV interface.
3D Calling 3D settings.
If you select "on" here, the informational text belonging to each selected menu item will always appear
simultaneously.
OK adopt settings.
Contrast Set contrast.
The power consumption of the TV set depends
directly on the value set here.
Picture Selecting the picture format.
format
Service
20
The Service menu item is provided for service
purposes by dealers only.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Initial installation
Initial installation wizard
Initial installation after switching on for the first time
The Initial installation wizard starts automatically with an initial installation. It may be called repeatedly again (see chapter Extras ,section
Special functions – Repeat initial installation).
Energy Home mode:
efficiency The emphasis for home use is on low energy consump(continued) tion. The automatic dimmer is activated.
Premium mode:
This mode optimises the settings to a brighter environment at a higher energy consumption. The automatic
dimmer is activated.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be confirmed afterwards once again.
If at least one station is locked, the access code must be entered
before repeating initial installation (see chapter System settings,
section Control – Parental lock).
For information on navigation within the wizard refer to chapter
General information on menu operation.
Shop mode:
The picture settings are aligned to operation in the
presentation room. The automatic dimmer is deactivated. If the ambient brightness diminishes, the energy
consumption is not reduced.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be confirmed afterwards once again.
First installation wizard routine
The selected settings affect the routine of the Initial installation wizard.
Menu
language
The presetting can be changed later in Extras ‫ט‬
Energy efficiency or in the System settings under
Picture‫ ט‬Picture adjustment.
INITIAL INSTALLATION - Menu language
Which menu language do you want to use for operation?
Deutsch
(de)
ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
(el)
Svenska
(sv)
English
(en)
Polski
(pl)
Dansk
(da)
Français
(fr)
Magyar
(hu)
Português
(pt)
(fi)
Italiano
(it)
Suomi
ȇɭɫɫɤɢɣ
(ru)
Español
(es)
Slovenščina (sl)
Norsk
(no)
Nederlands (nl)
Slovenčina (sk)
中文
(zh)
Čeština
(cs)
Türkçe
(tr)
Proceed with
Proceed to next step.
Operating
mode
Operating mode
Please specify if you wish to use the full TV function of your set, or if you wish to use it
purely as a monitor.
Select desired Menu language.
As TV set
Selecting the language of the user guidance is the
wizard’s first step. Then you simply follow the instructions on your TV screen.
As monitor only
Back with
Proceed with
Proceed to next step.
Select the Operating mode.
Energy
efficiency
Use the TV set as a TV set:
Continued with Location of TV set (see below).
Energy efficiency
Here you define how energy efficiently you operate your TV. With the "Home Mode"
setting you put the focus on low energy consumption for home use. The "Premium Mode"
is optimised to a brighter environment with a higher energy consumption. The "Shop
Mode" is designed for operation in a showroom.
Use the TV set just as a monitor:
see chapter Initial installation, section TV set as a
monitor.
Note: If you select "Home Mode" here, the TV set will automatically switch off to save
energy after no longer being operated for 4 hours.
Home mode
Back with
Premium mode
Shop mode
Proceed with
Location of
TV set
Select Energy efficiency.
Determine how energy efficient your TV set shall
be. The value for the contrast (and thus the brightness of the background lighting) is adapted and
the automatic dimmer activated or deactivated
depending on the presetting.
Choosing Home mode automatically activates
shutdown. For Premium mode or Shop mode,
automatic shutdown is initially deactivated.
See chapter For your safety for further information on automatic shutdown.
Location of TV set
Please specify the location of your TV set so that the available stations can be sorted
according to the specify country.
(DK)
Denmark
(L)
Luxembourg
(S)
Sweden
(E)
Spain
(N)
Norway
(SK)
Slovakia
(F)
France
(NL)
Netherlands
(SLO) Slovenia
(FIN)
Finland
(NZ)
New Zealand
(TR)
(H)
Hungary
(P)
Portugal
(UK)
(I)
Italy
(PL)
Poland
(IRL)
Ireland
Back with
Turkey
United Kingdom
Other country
(RUS) Russia
Proceed with
Select Location of TV set (national defaults
are adopted).
For certain locations (e.g., Australia), there
is finally a selection screen where you can
indicate in which state/territory the device
is being operated.
Proceed to next step.
21
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Initial installation
Selecting
antennas
Setting options for reception via analogue cable:
Connect antenna cable(s)
Your television will automatically search for stations. With OK , highlight which antenna
cables are available for your TV set and connect them to the correct antenna sockets,
which are specified here in the right-hand column.
Antenna cable(s) for:
to antenna socket(s):
Cable analog
ANT TV
Terrestrial (DVB-T)
ANT TV
Cable (DVB-C)
ANT TV
Satellite (DVB-S / cable 1)
ANT SAT
Satellite (DVB-S / cable 2)
ANT SAT2
Back with
If you have not selected Cable analog in the list of available antennas:
Proceed to Setting options for DVB-T reception.
TV/col.
standard
TV/col. standard
Please select the TV/colour standard.
Proceed with
Automatic BG+L
SECAM-BG
PAL-BG
SECAM-DK
PAL-DK
SECAM-L
PAL-I
Select antenna cable.
OK Connect/disconnect antenna cable.
Ahead of each selected antenna, the symbol
appears.
Cable analog:
analogue stations via
cable
Terrestrial (DVB-T):
digital stations via
antenna
Cable (DVB-C):
digital stations via
cable
Satellite (DVB-S/cable 1):
digital stations via
satellite
Satellite (DVB-S/cable 2): digital stations via
satellite
Proceed to next step.
Extent of
station search
Extent of station search
The CA module "name module" provides a special station list "name list".
Taking this into consideration, specify which stations are to be searched
automatically and mark at least one of the two items below with OK .
All receivable stations excluding stations in the special station list
Stations in the special station list "name list"
Back with
Proceed with
Considering the plugged CA module(s) specify
which stations should be searched automatically.
If the CA module(s) do(es) not support this function or if no CA module is plugged in, this step will
be skipped.
Proceed to next step.
Depending on the antennas (analogue cable, DVB-T,
DVB-C, DVB-S) selected, the appropriate settings
appear below.
22
Back with
NTSC
Proceed with
The selection of a Colour standard is only required
when the Location of TV set Other country was
selected. Otherwise, the country-specific default
settings will be preset when selecting the Location
of TV set. This step will be skipped then
Select appropriate colour standard.
Proceed to next step.
Depending on the antennas (analogue cable, DVB-T,
DVB-C, DVB-S) selected, the appropriate settings
appear below.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-T reception:
If you have not selected DVB-T antenna in the list of available antennas:
Proceed to Setting options for DVB-C reception.
If a CA module is plugged in during Initial installation and if the
item Station of the special station list was selected in Extent
of station search, the routine continues with the step Supply
voltage (see right column).
Scrambled You can state whether coded stations are to be
stations searched for in the search/update. Select yes to
save all found scrambled stations. However, these
stations can only be received in connection with a CA
module and the appropriate Smart Card. Handling
of the CA module is described in chapter Extras,
section CA module.
Search If you want to run the station search independently
method of the channel grid, select Frequency search for
the search method.
Network
selection
Network selection (DVB-T)
Please state from which network you wish to receive your station.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK button.
Freeview
other network
Back with
Proceed with
If several networks are available via DVB-T, you can
decide which network you want to receive your channels from.
Select network,
OK Confirm selection.
Accept
Logical
Channel
Number
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-T) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
Proceed to next step.
Supply
voltage
Supply voltage DVB-T antenna
Please state here whether your DVB-T antenna needs a supply voltage. Antennas with an
integrated amplifier need a supply voltage on the antenna line.
Proceed to next step.
no (0V)
Back with
Settings
yes (5V)
Proceed with
DVB-T settings
Please specify whether you want to search for scrambled stations too.
Note: Scrambled stations can only be received with an integrated CA module and
additional card.
Scrambled stations
no
Search method
Channel search
Accept Logical Channel Number
no
Back with
yes
Frequency search
yes
Proceed with
Select and adapt settings for DVB-T reception.
Select supply voltage no / yes.
If you use a DVB-T antenna that requires a supply
voltage (active antenna) and which is not already
supplied via a power adaptor, then select yes (5V)
for the antenna’s power supply.
How to align your DVB-T antenna is described in
chapter System settings, section Connections
– Antenna DVB.
Proceed to next step.
23
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-C reception:
If you have not selected DVB-C antenna in the list of available antennas:
Proceed to Setting options for DVB-S reception.
If a CA module is plugged in during Initial installation and if the item
Stations in the special station list was selected in Extent of
station search, the station list of the CA module will be adopted.
Further settings described on this page will then be skipped. The
procedure of the initial installation will then be continued with the
step Setting options for DVB-S reception.
Network
selection
Network selection (DVB-C)
Scrambled You can state whether coded stations are to be
stations searched for in the search/update. Select yes to
save all found scrambled stations. However, these
stations can only be received in connection with a CA
module and the appropriate Smart Card. Handling
of the CA module is described in chapter Extras,
section CA module.
Search If you select Frequency search here, a search is
method performed for all receivable stations. With Network
search, only the stations which the networks supply
are searched - either for all receivable networks
or only for the particular network specified under
Network ID.
Please state from which network you wish to receive your station.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK button.
Start The DVB stations are only searched for in the frefrequency quency range above the start frequency.
Unitymedia
Standard
Back with
Proceed with
If several networks are available via DVB-C, you can
decide which network you want to receive your channels from. The normal DVB-C settings are derived from
the selection of the location or network and do not
need to be changed. Exactly which of the following
settings are present is dependent on which network is
selected.
Select network.
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
Network ID If you select none here, DVB signals of all current
transmitter networks are searched automatically
(recommended for most cable networks).
If, on the other hand, you specify a certain network ID
(necessary in the cable networks of some countries),
only DVB signals of this broadcasting network are
searched for automatically.
Your cable provider has the information you need.
Accept
Logical
Channel
Number
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-C) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
Settings
Proceed to next step.
DVB-C settings
Please specify whether you want to search for scrambled stations too.
Note: Scrambled stations can only be received with an integrated CA module and additional
card.
Scrambled stations
no
Search method
Network search Frequency search
Start frequency
044.00 MHz
Network ID
none
Accept Logical Channel Number
no
Back with
yes
00000
yes
Proceed with
Select and adapt settings for DVB-C reception.
24
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-S reception:
If you have not selected DVB-S antenna in the list of available antennas: Proceed to Setting options for all types of reception.
2 satellites Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs
on 22 kHz (LNBs) which are connected to the TV set by a 22
switchbox kHz switchbox.
Network
selection
Network selection
Please state from which network you wish to receive your station.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK button.
ASTRA LCN
Standard
Back with
Proceed with
Select network.
If several networks are available via DVB-S, you can
decide which network you want to receive your
channels from.
Proceed to next step.
Select
satellite
installation
Single Reception of a single satellite via a connected LNC
satellite (LNB).
Select satellite installation
Please define which satellites you receive or which satellite equipment you use.
2 satellites Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs
on toneburst (LNBs) which are connected to the TV set by a
switch toneburst switch.
Max. 4 The TV set controls a DiSEqC multiswitch to which
satellites up to four LNCs (LNBs) for different satellites are
on DiSEqC connected.
multiswitch
DiSEqC Select setting if the TV set is connected to a DiSEqC
one cable single-cable system (according to EN 50494). Several
communal Sat receivers can be connected to one Sat cable.
system
other Select setting if the TV set is connected to a singlecommunal cable system (without DiSEqC). Several Sat receiinstallation vers can be connected to one Sat cable. Contrary
to a DiSEqC one cable communal system there are
restrictions in the range of certain reception frequencies in "common" single-cable community systems.
Single satellite
2 satellites on 22 kHz switchbox
2 satellites on toneburst switch
Max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch
DiSEqC one cable communal system
Proceed to next step (to the appropriate page of
the satellite system).
Other communal installation
Indietro con
Avanti con
Selecting the satellite system.
Specify how you receive which satellite(s) (single
satellite or type of satellite system). Ask your
dealer in this regard.
The normal DVB-S settings are derived from the
selection of the location and do not need to be
changed in most cases.
25
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Initial installation
Setting options for the satellite system (single satellite):
Select
single satellite
Satellite
selection
Select satellites
Please specify here which satellite you receive.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
Setting options for the satellite system (2 satellites on 22
kHz switchbox / 2 satellites on toneburst switch):
OK
button.
Optus D1160°E
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W
Türksat 42°E
Select satellites
Please select satellite 1 and satellite 2.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
Satellit 1
OK
button.
Satellit 2
Eutelsat 16A 16°E
Nilesat 7°W
Hellas Sat2 39°E
Hot Bird 13°E
Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W
none
ASTRA3 23,5°E
Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8
Eutelsat 36A 36°E
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Eutelsat 8 West A 8°W
Optus D1160°E
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W
Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E
Eurobird 7A 7°E
Eutelsat 12 West A 12,5°W
Türksat 42°E
Eutelsat 16A 16°E
Nilesat 7°W
ASTRA2 28,2°E
ASTRA4A 4,8°E
Telestart12 12,5°W
Hellas Sat2 39°E
Hot Bird 13°E
Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W
ASTRA3 23,5°E
Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8
Intelsat901 18°W
Eutelsat 36A 36°E
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Eutelsat 8 West A 8°W
Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E
Eurobird 7A 7°E
Eutelsat 12 West A 12,5°W
ASTRA2 28,2°E
ASTRA4A 4,8°E
Telestart12 12,5°W
Back with
Proceed with
Back with
Select satellite,
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed with
Mark Satellite 1 / Satellite 2,
select satellite.
OK Adopt settings.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to next step.
Dual/single
band
Dual/single band (ASTRA1 19,2°E)
Here, please specify whether you are using a Dual Band (Universal) LNB or a Single Band
LNB.
Dual band (low/high)
Back with
LNC
frequency
(22 kHz
Switch box)
Single band
Proceed with
LNB frequencies
Please select the LNB frequency for the Low Band. High band frequency is autom. adjusted.
Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the OK button.
ASTRA1 19,2°E Low Band
9750 MHz
10000 MHz
10200 MHz
10600 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E Low Band
9750 MHz
10000 MHz
10200 MHz
10600 MHz
Back with
Select Dual band (low/high) or Single band.
Here you specify if you use a Dual Band (Universal) LNB or a Single LNB.
Proceed to next step.
LNC
frequencies
LNC
frequencies
(Toneburst
switch)
Proceed with
LNB frequencies
Please select the LNB frequencies for High and Low Bands.
Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the
ASTRA1 19,2°E low band
9750 MHz
ASTRA1 19,2°E high band
10600 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E low band
9750 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E high band
10600 MHz
Back with
10000 MHz
10750 MHz
10000 MHz
10750 MHz
10200 MHz
11000 MHz
10200 MHz
11000 MHz
OK
button.
10600 MHz
11250 MHz
10600 MHz
11250 MHz
Proceed with
LNB frequencies
Please specify the oscillator frequency for your LNB.
ASTRA1 19,2°E low Band
Back with
9750 MHz
10000 MHz
10200 MHz
10600 MHz
Proceed with
Set LNB frequencies.
OK Adopt settings.
The setting of the LNB frequency is only called
when you have used the setting Single band
in step Dual / single band.
Normally, you do not need to change the values
for high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of
your satellite system uses a different oscillator
frequency (important for the frequency display).
Proceed to next step.
Proceed with Setting options for DVB-S reception
(continued).
26
Set LNB frequencies.
OK Adopt settings.
Normally, you do not need to change the values
unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite system
uses a different oscillator frequency (important
for the frequency display).
Proceed to next step.
Proceed with Setting options for DVB-S reception
(continued).
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Initial installation
LNC .
frequencies
Setting options for the satellite system
(max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch):
DiSEqC
multiple
switch
Settings DiSEqC multiple switch
With the refresh rate you determine how often a DiSEqC command is output. This is only
necessary in a cascaded system. Your system provider will bei able to tell you more about
this.
Repeat rate
none
Control voltage 13 / 18V
off
22kHz signal
Band
Toneburst
2
on
off
Back with
1
Position
Position
LNB frequencies
Please select the LNB frequencies for both High and Low Bands.
Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the
ASTRA1 19,2°E low band
9750 MHz
ASTRA1 19,2°E high band
10600 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E low band
9750 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E high band
10600 MHz
Eutelsat W2 16°E low band
9750 MHz
Eutelsat W2 16°E high band
10600 MHz
Türksat 42°E low band
9750 MHz
Türksat 42°E high band
10600 MHz
10000 MHz
10750 MHz
10000 MHz
10750 MHz
10000 MHz
10750 MHz
10000 MHz
10750 MHz
10200 MHz
11000 MHz
10200 MHz
11000 MHz
10200 MHz
11000 MHz
10200 MHz
11000 MHz
OK
button.
10600 MHz
11250 MHz
10600 MHz
11250 MHz
10600 MHz
11250 MHz
10600 MHz
11250 MHz
off
Back with
Option
Proceed with
Proceed with
Select and adapt settings for the DiSEqC
multiswitch.
OK Adopt settings.
Repeat rate The refresh rate determines how often a DiSEqC
command is output. A refresh is only necessary with
cascaded systems.
Set LNB frequencies.
Normally, you do not need to change the values.
OK Adopt settings.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed with Setting options for DVB-S reception
(continued).
Control The control voltage controls the switching of the
voltage polarisation level (horizontal/vertical) in non-DiSEqC
capable components (e.g., control of single LNBs via
DiSEqC multiswitch).
22kHz signal The 22 kHz signal controls the switching between
high and low band in the Band setting. The Position
setting controls the selection of the satellites in nonDiSEqC capable components.
Toneburst The Toneburst controls the selection of the satellites
in non-DiSEqC but Toneburst capable components
with the Position and Option settings.
Proceed to next step.
Satellite
selection
Select satellites
Please select satellite 1 to satellite 4.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
Satellit 1
Back with
Satellit 2
Satellit 3
OK
button.
Satellit 4
none
ASTRA3 23,5°E
Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8
Optus D1160°E
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W
Türksat 42°E
Eutelsat 16A 16°E
Nilesat 7°W
Hellas Sat2 39°E
Hot Bird 13°E
Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W
Eutelsat 36A 36°E
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Eutelsat 8 West A 8°W
Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E
Eurobird 7A 7°E
Eutelsat 12 West A 12,5°W
ASTRA2 28,2°E
ASTRA4A 4,8°E
Telestart12 12,5°W
Proceed with
Mark Satellite 1 ... Satellite 4,
Select satellite.
OK Adopt settings.
Proceed to next step.
27
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Initial installation
LNB .
frequencies
Setting options for the satellite system
(DiSEqC one cable communal system):
Number of
system
channel used
LNB frequencies
Please specify the oscillator frequency for the Low Band. High band frequency is auotm. adjusted
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK button.
ASTRA1 19,2°E low Band
9750 MHz
ASTRA1 19,2°E high Band
10600 MHz
10000 MHz
10750 MHz
10200 MHz
10600 MHz
11000 MHz
11250 MHz
Number of system channel used
Do you wish to use one or two transmission channels in your single cable communal
installation? With two channels - provided they are available to you from the installation - it
is possible to watch different stations at the same time in the main screen and in the PIP.
One channel
Back with
Two channels
Retour avec
Continuer avec
Set LNB frequencies.
Normally, you do not need to change the
values unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite
system uses a different oscillator frequency
(important for the frequency display).
OK Adopt settings.
Select One channel or Two channels.
Here you specify if you use one or two transmission channels in your one cable communal
system.
In case of two channels - as far as they are available in your system - different stations can be
simultaneously viewed on the main picture and
on PIP.
You get more information on your system from
your dealer.
Proceed to next step.
DiSEqC
one cable
communal
installation
Proceed to next step.
Manual
registration
(for socket
ANT SAT)
Manual registration (for socket ANT SAT)
Please log on to your DiSEqC single-cable system that is connected to the antenna input
ANT SAT and specify the desired transmission channel and associated transmission
frequency. Please also indicate whether your single-cable system has a broad frequency
band instead of a division into high and low band. If your antenna system is designed for
this, it is possible to protect your used transmission data from being used by other
participants by having a PIN.
Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the OK button.
Transmission channel
1
Transmission frequency
1284 MHz
PIN protection
Ja
Define/change PIN
Back with
2
3
4
5
1400 MHz
6
7
8
1516 MHz
1632 MHz
1748 MHz
Nein
000
Proceed with
Select DiSEqC single cable communal installation
Please enter here which DiSEqC single cable system you are using. The following setting
parameters of your system are then adapted accordingly.
User defined
DELTA SUM-918
KATHREIN EXR-501
DELTA SUM-514
DELTA SUM-928
KATHREIN EXR-551
DELTA SUM-516
DELTA MSU-50x
KATHREIN EXR-552
DELTA SUM-518
DELTA MSU-90x/170x
KATHREIN EXR-154
Back with
Proceed with
Proceed to next step.
Satellite
selection
Select satellites
Please specify here which satellite you receive.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
OK
button.
none
ASTRA3 23,5°E
Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8
Optus D1160°E
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W
Türksat 42°E
Eutelsat 16A 16°E
Nilesat 7°W
Hellas Sat2 39°E
Hot Bird 13°E
Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W
Eutelsat 36A 36°E
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Eutelsat 8 West A 8°W
Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E
Eurobird 7A 7°E
Eutelsat 12 West A 12,5°W
ASTRA2 28,2°E
ASTRA4A 4,8°E
Telestart12 12,5°W
Back with
Select and adjust settings for the DiSEqC
single cable communal installation.
OK Adopt settings.
Transmission Select the desired transmission channel.
channel
Select DiSEqC single cable communal installation.
Proceed with
Select satellites from list,
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
28
Proceed with
Transmission Select the corresponding transmission frequency.
frequency
PIN protection If your system is designed for it, it is possible to protect your used transmission data from use by other
subscribers with a PIN.
Define/ Here you can determine and change the PIN for
change PIN PIN protection. Only possible, when yes has been
selected for PIN protection.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed with Setting options for DVB-S reception
(continued).
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Initial installation
Setting options for the satellite system (other communal
installation):
Select
single satellite
Select satellites
Please specify here which satellite you receive.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
OK
button.
Optus D1160°E
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W
Türksat 42°E
Eutelsat 16A 16°E
Nilesat 7°W
Hellas Sat2 39°E
Hot Bird 13°E
Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W
Eutelsat 36A 36°E
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Eutelsat 8 West A 8°W
Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E
Eurobird 7A 7°E
Eutelsat 12 West A 12,5°W
ASTRA2 28,2°E
ASTRA4A 4,8°E
Telestart12 12,5°W
ASTRA3 23,5°E
Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8
Intelsat901 18°W
Back with
Proceed with
Select satellite.
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
LNB
frequencies
LNB frequency, supply voltage
Please specify the oscillator frequency for your LNB.
If your TV set is connected to a single cable system without an external power supply, you
can connect the antenna supply (13 or 18V/max. 350mA) with „13V“ or „18V“.
ASTRA1 19,2°E
9750 MHz
10000 MHz
Supply voltage
off
18V
Back with
13V
10200 MHz
10600 MHz
Proceed with
Select and adapt settings.
LNC Normally, you do not need to change the values for
frequency high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of your
satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency
(important for the frequency display).
Supply If your set is connected to a single-cable system
voltage without external voltage supply, you can connect
the antenna supply (13V or 18V / max. 500mA).
Proceed to next step.
Continue with Setting options for all types of
reception.
29
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued):
Test reception
You should now receive a picture and sound from the following satellite:
Astra1 19,2°E
C/N
Level
Otherwise, please adjust your antenna. If it is already correctly adjusted, please continue all
the same, without receiving picture or sound for the moment.
Back with
Proceed with
After you have made the previous settings, you should
receive picture and sound of the selected satellites
(only possible for Astra1 and HOTBIRD).
Proceed to next step.
Settings
DVB-S settings (ASTRA1 19,2°E)
Please specify whether you want to search for scrambled stations too.
Note: Scrambled stations can only be received with an integrated CA module and
additional card.
Scrambled stations
no
Search method
Network search Frequency search
Symbol rate
22000
Accept Logical Channel Number
Back with
no
yes
yes
Proceed with
Select and adapt settings.
If several satellites are received, the following settings
must be made for every satellite. The type of settings
available may differ depending on the selected satellite
or network.
Scrambled You can state whether coded stations are to be
stations searched for in the search/update. Select yes to
save all found scrambled stations. However, these
stations can only be received in connection with a CA
module and the appropriate Smart Card. Handling
of the CA module is described in chapter Extras,
section CA module.
Search If you select Frequency search here, a search is
method performed for all receivable stations. With Network
search, from all receivable networks all the stations
are searched which are supplied by these networks.
Depending on the selected network, this step
might possibly be skipped.
Symbol rate The symbol rate is specified by the satellite provider
and normally does not need to be changed.
Accept
Logical
Channel
Number
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-S) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
Proceed to next step.
Continue with Setting options for all types of
reception.
30
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Initial installation
Age-related .
lock
Setting options for all types of reception:
Subtitle and
audio
languages
(DVB only)
Subtitle and audio languages (DVB)
You can preset the desired languages and reserve languages for subtitles and audio for
DVB programmes here.
Age-related lock
If you enter an age restriction here, all DVB programmers are locked which have an
appropriate age code and can only be watched by entering the access code.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK button.
You may preset whether you would always like to hear a special tone for visually-impaired
persons (if provided by the station), which describes the operation in more detail, with the
aid of an audio commentary. In "System Settings -> Sound," you can set its volume in
relation to the "normal" volume by means of the "Audio commentary volume."
Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the
Subtitle (DVB)
Audio (DVB)
Favoured language
OK
No age-related lock
Proceed with
Audio commentary
Alternative language
German
Italian
Czech
Hungarian
S
Englisch
Spanish
Greek
Finnish
T
French
Dutch
Polish
Slovenian
S
Back with
Proceed with
Select Age-related lock.
OK Confirm selection.
Select desired languages and alternative
languages for subtitles and audio for DVB
programmes.
Set up audio commentary for the visually
impaired.
OK Confirm selection.
You can specify an age limit for your TV set here.
DVB broadcasts which have an appropriate age
identification are locked and can only be watched
after entering the access code.
In some countries, the yes/no option does not
exist for some channels, and a compulsory age
check must be entered.
Proceed to next step.
Check
search
settings
Special security level
button.
Proceed to next step.
Check search settings
Your TV performs the following automatic search with the listed settings. If you wish to
correct them, please scroll back.
Location of TV set
Signal source(s)
Satellite system
Satellite(s)
Start automatic search
(UK) United Kingdom
Cable analogue, DVB-T, DVB-C, DVB-S
Single satellite
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Antenne Wizard
Cancel
Time and
date
Time and date
Please enter the date and time if none has been entered or if they are incorrect.
Date
Back with
14.09.2012
Time
Back with
You will see a list of the selected settings. You can go
back step by step with the key to make any changes
to the settings.
OK Start automatic search.
Now, the TV set searches for TV and radio stations.
It searches successively for stations from the selected
signal sources. The progress of search is shown by a
progress bar.
In case of a repeated initial installation routine (via
Home view under Extras
Special functions)
all stored stations will be first deleted here.
p
17:45:00
Proceed with
Depending on the selected network, this step may
be skipped.
Select time / date.
If no values or no correct values have been
entered for date and time, enter the correct values
with the numerical keys here.
Proceed to next step.
Info
station search
Result TV
The automatic station search and sort have been stopped.
1164 new TV station(s) has (have) been found.
Proceed with
The number of found TV stations is displayed.
Proceed to next step.
The number of found radio stations is displayed.
Proceed to next step.
continued on the next page
p
31
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Initial installation
Sound
playback
via ...
Sound playback via ...
Please specify here via which sound components you want to listen to your TV sound. If you
select a "Speaker system", this must be connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO LINK socket on the
back of the TV set (with an additional adapter if necessary).
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK button.
Inform about
new software
Software-Update
You have the option of performing a software update via the Internet. Please specify
whether the TV set is to automatically inform you about newly available software.
In accordance with the local laws and regulations, we would like to point out that set
numbers, the installation location of your TV set, previous updates and the current
software version will be processed and stored by an IT system, if you wish to perform
software updates via the Internet. This data ensures that we are always able to offer you an
optimum service. All data is treated as confidential.
Note: you can change this setting at any time by selecting the following options: "System
Settings -> Control->Software update -> via Internet"."
TV speakers
Speaker system
HiFi/AV amplifier
Soundprojector
Inform about new software
Do not inform
HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)
Back with
Finish wizard with
Soundprojector or TV speakers (switchable)
Back with
Proceed with
Select sound components.
OK Confirm selection.
This selection indicates which sound components
you want to use to hear your TV sound. Depending on the selection, the sound component wizard
starts with which you can make further settings.
The sound component wizard is described in
chapter System settings, section Connections – Sound components and can also be
started at any time beyond the initial installation.
Select option.
When selecting Information on new software
updates, your TV set checks at definite intervals
whether a newer software than the one installed in the
TV set is available in the Internet. A screen message
appears when a new software update is found.
Back: Exit wizard.
The initial installation wizard is complete.
Proceed to next step.
TV set as a monitor
Network
configuration
You can also use your TV set just as a monitor, i.e. if you only use it with
a PC. The tuner in the TV set cannot be used in this mode.
Netzwork configuration
Please specify if you wish to configure a network at this time. You can also perform this at a
more convenient time later (via 'System settings->Multimedia->Netzworksettings>Networking').
Configure now
Selection of Switch-on channel
Do not configure or configure later
Please specify which AV channel your TV set should switch on to.
Back with
Proceed with
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
PC IN
AVS
AV
Select option.
With the selection, specify whether you want to
configure the available network adaptor now.
Configure now: Make settings for network adaptor and proxy server (see chapter System
settings,section Multimedia / Network –
Network settings).
Do not configure or configure later: Skip
network adaptor configuration.
Proceed to next step.
32
VIDEO
SPDIF IN
Back with
Proceed with
Select AV connection.
The selected AV connection is shown when
switching the TV on.
Proceed to next step.
Initial setup continues with the Time and date setup.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Home view
Description of the individual sections/functions:
Home view
The Home view is the central overview page for all of your TV set‘s
operating modes.
TV:
Here you call the TV mode of your TV set.
See chapter TV for further information.
The list of options on the left of Home view gives you access to TV,
Video, Audio/Radio, Photo and Web.
By means of Extras and System settings you have access to more
functions and you can configure your TV set.
Video:
On the right side of the screen you find all your favourites (bookmarks)
created in the different operating modes.
The number of selectable items varies depending on the TV equipment, network connection, available media/ media servers and connected appliances.
The item Video gives you access to videos
from local (USB, home network) and online
sources.
See chapter Video for further information.
Audio/Radio:
Call Home view
With item Audio/Radio you find music
files from your local server(s) and USB
storage media and you access DVB and
Internet radio.
See chapter Audio/Radio for further
information.
HOME: Call Home view.
TV
Video
Das Erste HD
ZDF HD
RTL Television
SAT.1
ProSieben
VOX
kabel eins
arte HD
Loewe channel
Maxdome
Napster
Aupeo
Photo:
Audio/Radio
See chapter Photo for further information.
Photo
Web
Via menu item Photo you can view photos
from your local media on your TV screen.
Extras
Web:
System settings
Here you have access to multimedia content
in the Internet (MediaNet) as well as a highquality web browser.
See chapter Web for further information..
Select menu item / favourite,
OK call.
Extras:
Extras contains additional functions and
setting (e.g., Timer list, CA module).
See chapter Extras for further information.
System
settings:
In menu item System settings you find the
configuration menu of the TV set e.g., with
setting for picture, sound, connections or
sound components.
See chapter System settings for further
information.
Activated operating mode
The respective activated operating mode will be indicated in the list
of options by a small playback symbol in the lower right-hand corner
of the Home symbol.
Examples:
TV mode activated.
Audio player (Audio mode) activated.
In the opened Home view, pressing again on the HOME key brings
you back to the respective active operating mode.
33
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Home view
Favourites
Home - Favourites
You will find your favourites on the right of the individual operating
modes.
You can create favourites in the operating modes of the TV set. In this
way you get a collection of your favourite music titles, your preferred
stations and often visited Internet sites on a single overview page.
After an initial installation, TV stations, online links and radio stations
will already be automatically created as favourites independent of the
installation site of the TV set and of existing Internet links.
Creating favourites
In the operating modes of the TV set you can define the current object (station, music title, photo, etc.) as favourite by means of your
remote control.
The favourite will be added to Home view and placed at the end.
Create favourite.
If there are more favourites than can be shown on one
page, this will be indicated by rectangular symbols in
the upper right corner of Home view. Example:
Three pages with favourites exist. The first page of
them is indicated.
Manage favourites
You can edit the existing favourites in Home view. Change the sequence of your favourites as you wish or delete favourites you do not
need any more.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark the favourite to be changed.
MENU: Change favourite.
TV
Video
Das Erste HD
Audio/Radio
Photo
Web
ZDF HD
RTL Television
SAT.1
ProSieben
VOX
kabel eins
arte HD
Loewe channel
Maxdome
Napster
Aupeo
Move
Delete
End
Extras
System settings
Move favourite or delete it (see below).
Moving favourites
Move favourite to new position.
BACK: Finish procedure.
Deleting Favourites
TEXT: Delete selected favourite.
BACK: Finish procedure.
34
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Volume / Station
Selecting a station out of the station list
TV
In TV mode that can be selected via the Home view, you can use the
basic TV functions of your TV set. In TV mode you will have numerous
functionalities at your disposal as, for instance EPG and, if offered by
the station, HbbTV (hybrid broadcast broadband television).
By means of the function list you may call additional options and settings all around TV operation.
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
OK call station list.
20:15 - 23:30
ASTRA LCN
9
ZDF HD
20:15 - 21:45
Toskana
10
BR Nord HD
21:15 - 21:45
Setting the volume
11
SAT.1
20:14 - 22:19
Switching sound off/on
Sound off.
Sound on:
12
RTL Television
21:15 - 22:15
Dr. House
13
Press key again or increase the volume
using V+.
Setting the volume
n-tv
21:10 - 22:00
14
ProSieben
Mark stations.
OK The marked station will be called.
V+/V– Volume up/down.
The volume control bar will be displayed in the upper
right corner.
The volume control bar can be deactivated in the
menu.
Length of the station list
There is a possibility to influence the amount of stations by using different station lists.
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
Select station
OK call station list.
Call overview of station lists.
Select station with P+ / P–
P+/P– Station up/down.
The number and the name of the station along with
the title of the programme and that of the next
programme will be briefly shown. Also, the status
display with time and programme-dependent symbols
appears.
The symbols of the status display are described in
section Status display.
20:15 - 23:30
ASTRA LCN
9
Analogue
20:15 - 21:45
Toskana
10
DVB-C
11
Personal list 1
1-digit stations
long
Press the numerical key a little bit longer: The channel will change immediately.
Or:
Press the numerical key briefly, the station changes
after 2 seconds (changes immediately in case up to 9
stations are stored).
2-digit and 3-digit stations
Press first (and second) numerical key briefly.
short short long
Keep the last numerical key pressed a little bit longer:
The channel will change immediately.
Or:
Press all the numerical keys and the channel changes two seconds after the last number was entered (with
up to 99 or 999 saved channels it will change immediately).
4-digit stations
Press all four numerical keys briefly, the station
changes immediately.
RTL Television
21:15 - 22:15
Dr. House
13
n-tv
21:10 - 22:00
14
Select station using the numerical keys
SAT.1
20:14 - 22:19
12
Manage list
BR Nord HD
21:15 - 21:45
DVB-T
AV list
ZDF HD
ProSieben
Mark the desired list.
The station list will be changed according to the
available options. The list will be adopted automatically.
Move to the new selected list.
Explanations of the station lists:
The number and the names of the possible station lists depend on
the available signal sources (antennas, TV reception networks, etc.).
Astra LCN Only stations from the selected source / reception
Analog network are indicated in the station list.
DVB-C
DVB-T
AV list Exclusively AV inputs are shown in the station list.
Personal list Only stations of the selected personal list are indicated in the station list.
The name of the list may be changed.
Manage lists Call up the station list editing menu. (System settings
Stations
Station lists TV).
p
p
all short
If you select an unoccupied station slot, the next
available station is switched to.
35
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Station
Selecting stations by means of the expanded station list
Selecting stations by personal lists
You can save your preferred stations in up to six personal lists (e.g.,
for several users). Each personal list can contain up to 99 stations.
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
Press OK longer: Call expanded station list.
Personal list existing.
Back
Expanded station list
1 Das Erste HD
13 ZDF.kultur HD
2 ZDF HD
14 ZDFinfokanal HD
3 BR Nord HD
15 SAT.1 HD
4 SAT.1
16 RTL HD
5 RTL
17 ProSieben HD
2 ZDF HD
6 n-tv
18 VOX HD
21:00-21:45
Toskana
7 ProSieben
19 kabel eins HD
8 3sat HD
20 SUPER RTL HD
9 ARTE HD
21 N24 HD
10 EinsPlus
22 TELE5 HD
11 Eurosport
23 SPORT1 HD
12 ZDF Neo HD
24 NICK/CC HD
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
OK call station list.
Open overview of station lists.
ASTRA LCN
20:15 - 23:30
Personal list 1
9
AV list
20:15 - 21:45
Toskana
10
Manage list
ZDF HD
BR Nord HD
21:15 - 21:45
11
SAT.1
20:14 - 22:19
A..Z
Search
<
ASTRA LCN
>
<
All stations
>
12
Mark stations.
Scrolling in the station list is possible.
OK The marked station will be called.
RTL Television
21:15 - 22:15
Dr. House
13
n-tv
21:10 - 22:00
14
ProSieben
Or:
For numerical sorting: Input the channel number. The
marker will switch to the selected station. The marked
station is shown as a thumbnail picture.
OK The marked station will be called.
For alphabetical sorting: Input the first letter. The first
station for the specified letters is marked.
Mark the station.
OK The marked station will be called.
Filter and sort options of the expanded station list
Using the on-screen buttons on the bottom line of the expanded station list you can filter and sort the station list by various combinations
of options.
With open expanded station list:
Toogle between the expanded station list and the list
of options on the bottom.
Mark the desired personal list,
The station list will be changed according to the
available options. The list will be adopted automatically.
Move to the new selected list.
Mark the station.
OK The marked station will be called. Or:
Select station directly with numerical keys.
Explanation of the icons following station names:
Locked station
HDTV station
DVB-T station (digital terrestrial via antenna)
DVB-C station (digital via cable)
0..9 Numerical sorting of the station list.
DVB-S station (digital via satellite)
A..Z Alphabetical sorting of the station list.
Coded station
Searching This allows you to do targeted searches for stations.
The station name is to be entered via the on-screen
keyboard. Entry is described in chapter General
information on menu operation.
Station lists Select the station list, the stations of which are to be
displayed in the extended station list (e.g., Personal
station list, ASTRA LCN, DVB-C).
All stations Here you can specify if All stations, only HD
stations, Locked stations, Scrambled stations,
Unscrambled stations, CI+ Protected stations,
New found stations or stations No more to be
found from the selected sources shall be indicated.
36
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Status display
Explanations of the symbols in the status display (cont'd):
Status display
Transmitted audio signal:
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
Mono
INFO: Show status display.
10
ZDF HD
21:30
21:00 - 21:45 Toskana
21:45 - 22:00 heute-journal
18.07.2013
Digital
(2sec)
(2sec)
(2sec)
2
Timer list
Menu options
Station list
Expanded station list
Value-added service
Last station
Language / sound
Timeshift
Recording
Key explanation
In the left upper corner you will see in the marked field
the number and name of the station, the transmission
time and (if available) the title of the current programme.
The bar (if available) indicates the progress of the
current programme. If information about the current
programme is available, this can be called by pressing
the INFO key again.
In another adjacent field to the right, the programme
info of the following programme is displayed additionally for DVB stations.
The field in the upper right corner contains the time,
the date and, depending on the DVB station and
according to availability, various additional information
which is represented by symbols (see column on the
right).
A window with button descriptions is displayed in the
bottom right corner. The automatic display of the
button descriptions can be switched off (see chapter
System settings, section Control – On-screen
displays.
The status bar is shown automatically every time you
change channels.
The status bar is hidden automatically at the end of
the display time.
If you want to hide the status bar manually before the
display time ends, you can do this with the BACK key.
Explanations of the symbols in the status display:
General symbols:
Language/sound selection available
Subtitles available
Channel selection for multi-channel providers
3D programme
HDTV programme
HbbTV mode available from this station
Mono audio transmission analogue
Dual
channel
Dual channel sound transmission (Sound1/Sound2)
analogue
1+1
Dual channel sound transmission (Sound1/Sound2)
digital
Stereo
Stereo sound transmission analogue
6WHUHR $$&
Stereo sound transmission (HEAAC)
‫ܐ‬
۲'LJLWDO
Stereo sound transmission digital (PCM)
Dolby digital sound transmission (DD)
۲'LJLWDO
Dolby digital sound transmission (DD+)
۲'LJLWDO $$&
Dolby digital AAC+ sound transmission (HEAAC)
dts
MPEG
۲PLII
۲965HI
۲96:LGH
dts sound transmission
MPEG sound transmission
Dolby Pro Logic II sound transmission
Dolby Virtual Speaker Reference display
Dolby Virtual Speaker Wide
Transmitted audio channels:
‫܂‬
DD / dts 1.0 / mono
‫܆‬
DD / dts / MPEG 2.0
‫܉‬
DD / dts 3.0
‫܈‬
DD / dts 4.0
‫܋‬
DD / dts 5.0
‫܍‬
DD / dts 2.1
‫܅‬
DD / dts 3.1
܏
DD / dts 4.1
‫ۿ‬
DD / dts 5.1
Selected listening mode:
‫܃‬
Play centre sound or mono (left/right)
‫܃‬
Play front sound (L/R stereo)
‫܃‬
Play front and centre sound
‫܃‬
Play front and surround sound
‫܃‬
Play front, surround and centre sound
‫܃‬6RXQG
projector
Playback of sound via sound projector
‫[(܃‬WHUQDO Playback of sound via speakers connected to an
external amplifier
speakers
If the number of speakers appears in brackets, the
sound of missing speakers is transmitted by the
existing speakers (virtually). The Dolby Virtual
speaker (VS mode) developed by Dolby is activated
for the virtual sound reproduction.
37
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Function list / AV list
Explanations of the symbols in the function list (continued):
Function list
The function list contains settings and additional options. The individual list items will be briefly explained as follows:
The function list can be opened directly in TV mode or via the station
list. Depending on this, some list items may possibly not be available.
In TV mode:
MENU: Call function list.
9
Here you can display your "Electronic Programme Guide".
ZDF HD
20:15 - 21:45
Toskana
Switch screen off.
The menu item is only shown when DVB radio or an AV
source is active.
Add current station as Favourite to Home view.
Changes the Sorting between numerically and alphabetically.
Call up Edit station list.
Delete stations, shift stations, restore deleted stations.
Subtitles
Recording
AV list
Sound mode
Selecting the AV source via the AV list
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
Open up the station list AV list.
Or:
OK Call station list,
call function list.
Mark function,
OK call.
AV list
1
HDMI 1
2
HDMI 2
3
HDMI 3
4
HDMI 4
5
PC IN
6
AVS
Note: If you press OK for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
Explanations of the symbols in the function list:
Open Expanded station list.
Call EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) wizard.
Menu item is only displayed as long as the EPG wizard has
not yet been executed.
Call up Language / sound. The sound formats on offer
and their designations depend on the programme being
broadcast.
Menu item will only be indicated when other languages/
sound tracks are available.
Call up selection of Subtitles.
Menu item will only be indicated when subtitles are
available.
Open recording dialogue to programme a Recording.
Set Sound mode (number of speakers).
Call up Sound settings.
Call up and adjust Headphone volume.
Menu item will only be indicated when a headphone is
connected to the TV set.
Call up Picture settings.
Activate PIP (picture in picture).
Select desired connection,
OK switch over.
If the selected AV source provides a signal (picture), it
should be visible now.
For the VIDEO selection the set switches to cable
analog, channel E36. The TV set shows the signal of
a signal source device via antenna.
Only playback of the audio signal from the AV source (screen is off)
To play only the sound of a connected media player (e.g. MP3 player),
the AV sources can be selected so that the screen goes blank.
Switching off the screen reduces the power consumption of the
TV set.
Open up the station list AV list.
Select desired connection,
OK press at least for two seconds.
Selecting the AV source via the station list
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
OK call station list.
Call overview of station lists.
Call up Rotate TV.
Menu item will only be indicated when a motorized stand
is connected to the TV set.
Mark AV list.
The AV list will be displayed.
Move picture vertically up/down.
Move to the AV list.
Mark desired AV source,
OK switch to AV source.
38
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Electronic Programme Guide
Meaning of the colours in the EPG
Electronic Programme Guide – EPG
EPG stands for Electronic Programme Guide and provides you with
on-screen programme details. With the system, as with a printed programme guide, you can learn about the current programme. In addition
programmes can be sorted according to certain topics, memorised, and
also recordings can be programmed.
The coloured labels indicate the genre of the respective programme.
When filtering with genre selection in the header, the programmes of
the selected genre will be highlighted.
Movies
News
If a personal list has been selected, only the programmes of stations
from the personal list are displayed in the programme list.
Show
Starting and ending EPG
Sports
EPG: Switch EPG on / off.
Child
Today
17:46
11 ARD HD
19:00
20:00
SOKO Wismar
10 ZDF HD
Brisant
Arts
Küstenwache
Verbotene Liebe
Social
Alles was zählt
Unter uns
13 VOX
Music
All genres
18:00
mieten, kaufen, wohnen
14 Sat. 1
push - das SAT.1 Magazin
15 ProSieben
taff
16 kabel eins
Navy CIS
Die Simpsons
Die Simpsons
Education
Galileo
Hobby
17 SPORT1
18 RTL2
X-Diaries
Köln 50667
Berlin - Tag & Nacht
19 SIXX
Emergency Room
Private Practice
Grey‘s Anatomy
Series
Top Dog Model
EPG is only available for DVB stations.
The first time you start EPG, a wizard will start that
guides you through the necessary presettings.
Depending on the number of stations selected for EPG,
it may take some time until the programme information
is displayed.
EPG operation
In the left column there is a list of stations of your currently active
station list (e.g. DVB-C, personal list etc). With the on-screen buttons
in the header of the EPG you can select the day of the programme
preview and filter the programmes as to their genre.
INFO: short: call up detailed information.
long: show key explanations.
EPG wizard
In this dialogue you decide, for which station EPG data should be collected and displayed. With the number of stations the time for nocturnal data acquisition will increase. We recommend, also for reasons of
distinctness to select only those stations, which you receive regularly.
When the EPG is started for the first time:
Continue in the wizard and call up the EPG Station
selection.
MENU: Switch between the station list and the
on-screen buttons in the bottom line.
Scrolling in the station list.
Scrolling through the programmes.
Or:
P+/P– Scrolling in the station list page by page.
RECORD key: Schedule the recording of the marked
programme for a time.
MENU: Go to header.
Changing the station list:
Mark station list in the bottom line,
OK select desired station list.
Select station for EPG:
Mark selection of date or genre.
OK Accept changes.
MENU: Move from date to genre or from genre to
station list.
Mark the the single station,
OK Select / deselect station for EPG.
For display in the EPG, the selected stations are marked
with a check mark .
Or:
select Mark all.
OK All stations of the station list will be activated for EPG.
Or:
select mark only this one.
OK Only the marked station is activated for EPG.
39
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Electronic Programme Guide
Programme preview
Calling additional information about the programmes
Mark desired station in the station list.
OK press long: show preview.
INFO: Call up detailed information.
Detailed info
In the top left window, the current programme of the
selected station is displayed now.
Back
5 ProSieben
16:45 07.01.14
16:30-16:58 How I Met Your Mother
Stations are only changed in the preview window.
When exiting EPG, the previous station is displayed.
5 ProSieben
Eine Halloween-Party auf dem Dach seines Wohnhauses steht bevor, und
auch dieses Jahr lässt sich Ted das Ereignis nicht entgehen. Doch eigentlich
hofft er, ein Mädchen, das er vor vier Jahren dort getroffen hat, endlich
wiederzusehen.
Barney findet die Idee völlig dämlich und versucht, seinen Freund zu einer
Party bei Victoria‘s Secret zu überreden. Ted gibt die Hoffnung nicht auf,
doch dann taucht spät abends eine ganz andere Frau auf dem Dach auf
und gesellt sich zu ihm ...
Jumping to time or station
The marking must be in the station list.
View
Press the numerical key (0 through 9). The window
Select Time/Station is shown.
If there is more information on the selected programme,
it will be indicated here. You find further information
on the indicated programme in the bottom line:
Select
Alltime
genres
Today
Timer list
22:00
17:46
19:00
20:00
?????
SOKO Wismar
10 ZDF HD
11 ARD HD
18:00
Brisant
Küstenwache
The menu item is only available when the selected
programme is on the air.
Watch selected TV programme.
Memorise
This menu item is only available when the selected
programme has not started yet.
Alles was zählt
Unter uns
13 VOX
View
Verbotene Liebe
mieten, kaufen, wohnen
14 Sat. 1
push - das SAT.1 Magazin
15 ProSieben
taff
16 kabel eins
Navy CIS
Die Simpsons
Die Simpsons
Galileo
17 SPORT1
18 RTL2
X-Diaries
Köln 50667
Berlin - Tag & Nacht
19 SIXX
Emergency Room
Private Practice
Grey‘s Anatomy
Memorise the programme for later watching / listening.
Top Dog Model
For further information see column on the right.
Select time or station,
Enter numbers.
When entering a time, you always jump to the next
occurrence of the entered time (24-hour window).
If the time is already passed today, the time entered
will appear on the following day.
Always enter five digits for station presets, e.g.
00001 for preset 1 or 00134 for preset 134.
OK Activate jump.
Switching to the current broadcast
Mark current broadcast.
OK press briefly: switch to current broadcast.
The electronic programme guide will be closed.
Depending on the presetting the TV set will switch
on by itself when it is in standby.
Delete For programmes being memorised you can also
memo delete the memo.
Timer list Call up the timer list.
Schedule the recording of the selected programme
(Recording) for a time (see column on the right).
Schedule the recording of the selected programme for
(Favourite) a time. Additionally, an entry to the Home favourites
will be added.
Explanation of the symbols in the programme information:
۳
Programme in 16:9 picture format
‫ܦ‬
Programme in high picture definition (HDTV)
۲
Programme with Dolby-Digital sound
۴
Transmission of subtitles for hearing-impaired persons
۵
Programme with Parental lock (see chapter System
settings,section Control – Parental lock)
The symbols may also appear in combinations.
40
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Electronic Programme Guide
Timer programming by means of EPG
Adapting the EPG Overview
You can programme timer recordings of TV programmes conveniently
using the EPG.
Mark the desired broadcast.
Select day or genre.
OKConfirm selection.
Today
17:46
All genres
18:00
19:00
20:00
SOKO Wismar
10 ZDF HD
17:46
mieten, kaufen, wohnen
14 Sat. 1
push - das SAT.1 Magazin
15 ProSieben
taff
16 kabel eins
Navy CIS
Die Simpsons
Die Simpsons
Galileo
17 SPORT1
18 RTL2
X-Diaries
Köln 50667
Berlin - Tag & Nacht
19 SIXX
Emergency Room
Private Practice
Grey‘s Anatomy
Top Dog Model
Timer data dialogue is opened.
Back
Timer data - Recording
Data part 2
Recorder
DR+
Programme
18:00 - 18:50 Verbotene Liebe
Station
12 Das Erste
Date
14.09.2012
Beginning
18:00
End
18:50
Recording type
Once only
19:00
20:00
11
RTL Television
17:30 - 18:00
Unter uns
12
Das Erste HD
17:15 - 18:00
Brisant
19:25 - 20:15
Küstenwache
19:05 - 19:40
Alles was zählt
18:00 - 18:50
Verbotene Liebe
19:15 - 19:59
push - das SAT.1 Magazin
13
SAT.1 Bayern
RECORD key: Programme timer recording for the TV
programme.
Data part 1
18:00
18:00 - 18:50
SOKO Wismar
10
ZDF HD
Alles was zählt
Unter uns
13 VOX
News
Today
Küstenwache
Verbotene Liebe
Brisant
11 ARD HD
The options to be selected are in the header,
if not, press MENU key.
14
ProSieben
16:55 - 17:55
taff
17:58 - 18:29
Die Simpsons
15
17:00 - 18:00
18:00 - 19:00
18:29 - 18:58
Die Simpsons
18:58 - 20:14
Galileo
19:00 - 20:00
Example If you look for the next newscast select and news under
genre. Newscasts will be highlighted.
PIP: PIP: Switch in EPG view between standard and
compact view.
Configuring EPG
Mon-Fri
Daily
Weekly
You can find the EPG settings in the chapter System settings,section
Control – EPG).
Record station
Check the timer data and update it if necessary.
See chapter Extras,section Timer for explanations of the setting
options in the Timer data menu.
In the EPG a recording symbol
programme.
is placed behind the title of the
Memorising a programme via the EPG
A programme that has not started yet can be memorised. For
memorised programmes, the TV set will ask at the beginning of a
programme if it should change the channel accordingly or switch on
from the stand-by mode if this is activated in the System settings
Control
EPG menu.
p
p
Mark the desired programme.
OK Call up detailed information.
Mark Memorise,
OK Memorise programme.
In the EPG a memorise symbol
programme.
is placed behind the title of the
The memo of programmes can also be started via the timer list instructions (see chapter Extras,section Timer).
After a software update, it is likely that Memos of programmes are
deleted. After a software update, please check your timer list (see
chapter Extras, section Timer – Timer list).
41
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Teletext
Teletext
Additional page selection possibilities
Your TV set supports the two operating systems TOP text and FLOF.
Up to 1,000 / 2,000 pages (1 are stored so that you have quick access.
First possibility:
Starting and ending Teletext
Second possibility:
INFO: Call overview page 100.
Directly enter the page number.
TEXT: Call teletext.
The function of the TEXT key can be set. The factory
default is Standard teletext first.
Das Erste
Third possibility:
The page includes 3-digit page numbers.
Back
100
100 ARDtext Do 12.07.12
14:12:42
Mark desired page number.
ARD Text
Syrien: Botschafter läuft über
..
EuGH hebt Saatgut-Verbot auf
....
Bundeswehr:Feldpostaffäre beendet
Neun Tote bei Lawinenunglück .....
107
121
112
142
Live: Ticker, 11.Etappe der Tour.
Galatasaray will Hamit Altintop..
NBA: Kaman spielt mit Nowitzki...
666
211
220
14:00
14:10
15:00
312
Tagesschau
ARD-Mittagsmagazin .....
Tagesschau
100
Pressing the BACK key ends Teletext.
Yellow key:
To next topic.
Blue key:
To next range of topics.
The coloured bars (near TOP) or the coloured writing
(near FLOF) in the last to bottom line show you which
colour button you need to use to select which topic
areas and topics.
Page selection with P+/P–
P+ call next Teletext page.
P– call previous Teletext page.
14:00
14:10
15:00
312
Tagesschau
ARD-Mittagsmagazin .....
Tagesschau
Mark or ,
OK select previous / next sub-page.
The number of the current sub-page is shown
between the arrows.
Page selection with the coloured keys
advance one page.
666
211
220
Go to bottom line.
Add active Teletext page to Home favourites.
Green key:
Live: Ticker, 11.Etappe der Tour.
Galatasaray will Hamit Altintop..
NBA: Kaman spielt mit Nowitzki...
The page consists of several sub-pages, indicated by
the symbol
and the arrows in the bottom line.
Zoom in the page (press several times).
One page back or back to previous page
(depending on Teletext provider).
107
121
112
142
Fourth possibility:
Stop self changing pages.
Red key:
Syrien: Botschafter läuft über
..
EuGH hebt Saatgut-Verbot auf
....
Bundeswehr:Feldpostaffäre beendet
Neun Tote bei Lawinenunglück .....
OK Call page.
Key functions for Standard Teletext operation
:
14:12:42
Tagesschau.... 101
Kultur........ 400
Wirtschaft.... 170
Wissen........ 500
Sport..... 200/600
Ratgeber...... 530
Programm...... 300
Inhalt (A-Z).. 790
Wirtschaft
Nachrichten
–
+
TEXT: Switching between Standard Teletext and
MediaText.
9:
100 ARDtext Do 12.07.12
ARD Text
Tagesschau.... 101
Kultur........ 400
Wirtschaft.... 170
Wissen........ 500
Sport..... 200/600
Ratgeber...... 530
Programm...... 300
Inhalt (A-Z).. 790
Wirtschaft
Nachrichten
–
+
0 AV:
Back
Das Erste
Explanation of the symbols in the Teletext bottom line
Symbol
(icon)
Remote
control key
Description
–
For Teletext pages with sub-pages:
Show previous sub-page.
–
For Teletext pages with sub-pages:
Show next sub-page.
–
Hide TV picture (Teletext as full screen).
–
Insert TV picture (Split screen Teletext/
TV Picture).
–
Activate Newsflash mode.
–
Show hidden information on the Teletext
page.
–
Hide information on the Teletext
page again.
Add current Teletext page to the favourites in Home view.
Call function list with Teletext settings.
(1
Depending on the type of TV set (see chapter Technical Data).
42
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Teletext / Rotate TV
Newsflash
Rotate TV
Some text pages, e.g., live tickers, will be permanently updated. In
order to keep track of changes and also to be able to watch the TV
programme at the same time you may hide the Teletext temporarily
and can still remain informed on updates of the page.
Mark
Newsflash,
confirm with OK.
The future behaviour of the News function depends on the type of
the Teletext page:
In case of Full screen Teletext pages the Teletext will be hidden. In
the upper left corner, there will be a symbol for the activated news
function. A screen message appears when the contents of the page
has changed:
By using a connected motorized stand you have the possibility to rotate
your TV set by means of the remote control.
How to control the range of rotation and to set the switch off position,
you will find in chapter System settings, section Control – Rotate
TV.
Rotating the TV set
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
Rotate TV set to the desired position.
Or:
Rotate TV was called up in the function list.
Rotate TV
1
Rotation angle
Back
-40°
-11°
+40°
Rotate TV
Show updated page,
yes or no.
OK Confirm selection.
In case of Teletext pages which cover only a part of the Teletext page,
e.g., News tickers, the respective part will be faded in and permanently
updated.
Rotate TV set to the desired position.
The TV set may be positioned within the set
range of rotation.
BACK: Exit Rotate TV.
End News function
OK show Teletext again.
Or:
BACK: exit Teletext.
43
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
HbbTV / MediaText
HbbTV / MediaText
Open HbbTV text directly
HbbTV (1 (Hybrid broadcast broadband television) offers the user
comprehensive multimedia contents, e.g., media centres or additional
information on the current programme as far as they are provided by
the station.
Depending on the programme provider, the direct
Call of MediaText may not be possible. MediaText
must then be opened by means of the HbbTV application.
MediaText helps you to use the next generation of teletext/videotext
for HbbTV.
MediaText/HbbTV text can either be started directly or through an
HbbTV application.
MediaText/HbbTV text is offered by the selected
channel.
The TV must be connected to the Internet to use HbbTV/MediaText.
A connection speed of at least 6,000 kbit/s (DSL 6000 or equivalent) is recommended for smooth playback of videos.
Open HbbTV application
Connection to the Internet established.
TEXT: Call up “standard” Teletext (see chapter TV,
section Teletext).
By pressing the TEXT key a second time the MediaText/HbbTV-Text will be called up.
The function of the TEXT key can be set.
If an HbbTV application is available for the chosen channel after changing channels, this will be loaded during the automatic start process and
a red key symbol will appear. When starting manually, the application
will only be loaded by pressing the red key.
HbbTV is offered by the selected channel.
Connection to the Internet established.
HbbTV mode is set to on.
Red key: Load / display HbbTV application.
Navigation within the HbbTV text and how the coloured buttons are assigned can vary depending on
the provider.
Exiting HbbTV-Text
Pressing the BACK key ends HbbTV text.
The appearance, key assignment and available
functions of the HbbTV applications are dependent on
the provider.
Under certain circumstances, the recording and
bookmarking functions of the applications may not be
supported.
Loewe do not guarantee the accessibility, functionality
or content of HbbTV applications.
Hide / Close HbbTV application
BACK: Hide / Close HbbTV application.
Depending on the start behaviour set, the HbbTV
application will be hidden (automatically) or closed
(manually). In the start behaviour Automatic, you
need to press the BACK key a second time for closure.
You will see a screen message after closing.
(1
Depending on the settings selected.
44
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
PIP
Starting and ending PIP mode
Picture in Picture (PIP)
The concurrent display of two different images is referred to as Picture
in Picture.
PIP: Show/hide PIP display.
The size of the PIP display can be changed in the system settings (see
chapter System settings, section Control – PIP).
Simultaneous display of...
z (yes) / – (no)
a digitally broadcast channel (DVB-T/C/S) and
picture from an AV source (e.g., AV, HDMI1)
z
a channel via digital satellite (DVB-S) and a
channel via analogue cable television
z
a digitally broadcast channel DVB-T/C and a
channel over analogue cable television
z
a digitally broadcast channel over DVB-T/C and
a satellite broadcaster (DVB-S)
z
two channels over analogue cable television
–
two digitally broadcast channels (DVB-T/C/S)
z
a free-to-air and an encrypted digitally broadcast channel (DVB-T/C/S)
z
two encrypted channels
z
an SDTV channel and an HDTV channel (DVBC/S)
z
two HDTV channels (DVB-C/S)
z
The frame is green, if not, press the green button
The frame is green, if not, press green key.
Select the station as usual.
Picture change and station selection are restricted during recording.
Select the station for the main picture
The frame is white,
if not, press green key.
Select the station as usual.
Coloured button functions
The frame is green, if not, press green key.
Yellow key: Swaps contents of TV picture and PIP
picture.
Blue key: Start/stop PIP scan in the PIP picture.
45
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Digital Recorder
Digital-Recorder – Overview of functions
You can record programmes on the integrated hard disk of your TV set with the digital recorder of your Loewe TV set.
The various ways in which your Digital Recorder can be used are listed below.
Digital Recorder function
Digital Recorder DR+
Delay TV in live play mode (timeshift)
z
Archive recording on the integrated hard disk
z
Archive recording on the USB storage device (external hard disk)
–
Recording / Time delay with digital stations (DVB-C/-T/-S)
z
Recording / Time delay with analogue stations
–
View other channels whilst the archive recording is taking place
z
Subsequent archive recording
z
Delay TV when archive recording is running
z
View other channels with delay TV whilst the archive recording is taking place
z
Archive playback from DR+
z
Archive playback from USB storage devices (external hard disk)
z
Copy recorded programmes from DR+ onto a USB storage device
z
Copy recorded programmes onto an external recorder
–
Copy recorded programmes from one USB storage device to another
z
Permit recorded programmes to be viewed on the network
z
View programmes that have been permitted to be viewed over the network
z
Set/delete manual bookmarks
z
Hide parts of a recording
z
Start up „Follow me“
z
Continue to view „follow me“ once it has started
z
46
z
possible
–
not possible
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Digital Recorder
Returning to live picture (end timeshift television)
TV viewing with time shift
The TV broadcast that you watch is automatically recorded in the
background. You can stop the TV programme at any time and continue watching it later with a time shift. The maximum time shift is
three hours.
Recording of analogue stations is not possible.
During time-shift operation, the output signal for external devices
at the AV connection is switched off.
Time-shifted operation is perhaps not possible or only to a limited
extent for programmes of stations working with CI Plus encryption.
Press STOP key.
You see the station’s live picture again.
Switch to a different station
If you switch the channel, the time-delayed recording (time shift) is
restarted. The current time-delayed recording is discarded (time shift
buffer is emptied). When switching between encrypted and unencrypted contents of the same station the timeshift buffer is also cleared.
When doing this, the timeshift television is interrupted and you see the
live picture of the broadcast. As a precaution, start archive recording of
interesting broadcasts when watching stations with changing coding.
Interrupt watching (start timeshift television)
Setting bookmarks
Press PAUSE key.
Back
2 ZDF 20:15 - 21:45 Rundreise Gardasee
20:47
21.01.2013
Digital
Time shift
07:03 min
20:10
20:40
You can manually set bookmarks during time-shift TV watching. For
this, the time shift recording is converted into an archive recording.
2
21:10
The TV image becomes a freeze frame and the DR
status display appears.
At the top you will see the number and name of the
station if EPG or Teletext data is available, in addition
to the start and end of the current programme and the
title of the programme.
In the lower part of the screen you find the starting time
of the background recording left of the time bar. On
the right hand side of the bar you can see the time at
which the time shift recorder will be full (automatically
extends by 30 minutes, up to a max. 3 hours). The time
above the bar at the PAUSE key shows the current time.
Continue (time shift viewing)
Press PLAY key.
Back
2 ZDF 20:15 - 21:45 Rundreise Gardasee
20:47
21.01.2013
Digital
Time shift
07:03 min
20:10
20:40
2
21:10
You can now continue watching the TV programme
at the time when you had pressed the PAUSE key.
The Playback symbol appears instead of the Pause
symbol.
For further options of time-shift watching see chapter
Video, section Video playback.
47
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Digital Recorder
Archive recording
Recording of analogue stations is not possible.
Recordings of CI Plus encrypted programmes are perhaps not
possible or only to a limited extent.
Direct recording
Press the RECORD key for a short period: Start direct
recording.
Recording dialogue for the current broadcast is called.
Films that you wish to watch at a later date can be recorded in the
Digital Recorder Archive (DR+ archive).
Select recording time,
OK proceed.
If EPG or teletext data is available, the Digital Recorder stores the title
and additional information on each programme in the archive.
Check timer data and correct if necessary.
If additional languages are being transmitted for a DVB broadcast,
these are also recorded. DVB subtitles subtitles can also be recorded.
Language selection and subtitles are displayed as in TV mode.
You can watch another programme or playback a recorded TV
programme from the archive while recording a TV programme into
the archive. You can also play back the programme that you are just
recording or any other programme with time delay.
During the archive recording, the bar showing the recording progress
is red.
Direct Recording and One Touch Recording
Record interesting programmes directly into the DR+ archive by
pressing the RECORD key. When watching time-shift broadcasts the
current broadcast can be saved to the DR+ archive.
Subsequent archive recording
You can also save an already viewed and finished broadcast in the
archive provided there has been no change of station in between.
Skip or wind back to the desired broadcast and start the recording.
Time shift viewing with archive recording
Whilst an archive recording is taking place you can play back the
programme that is being recorded or watch a programme on another
channel using time delay.
For further options of time-shift watching see chapter Video, section
Video playback.
OK Start recording.
One Touch Recording
With One Touch Recording, the recording starts immediately at the
press of a button.
Press RECORD key longer: Start One Touch Recording.
Select recording time,
confirm with OK.
Check timer data and correct if necessary.
OK Adopt broadcast in timer data.
Additional information on direct recording and one touch
recording
If the broadcast was watched right from its start, it will be saved from
the beginning in the DR+ archive. Otherwise, recording begins at
the point from which viewing of the broadcast began.
Timer-controlled recording
Comfortably select your favourite programme for recording from the
EPG. The timer overview has room for 50 entries.
You will find further information on timer-recording in chapter Extras,
section Timer.
48
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Digital Recorder
Setting bookmarks during archive recording
During a running archive recording you can create bookmarks (by pressing the PLAY key a little longer). You will see a message on the screen.
Bookmarks also serve as starting and end points of intervals.
Viewing another programme from the archive during archive
recording
After you have started the recording, you can also watch a programme
you have already recorded.
Open the DR+ archive.
Mark the recorded programme,
OK view programme.
Time shift viewing during archive recording
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
The recording is continued in the background.
The recording process is continued in the background.
Display during time-shift viewing and archive recording:
2 ZDF 20:15 - 21:45 Rundreise Gardasee
Back
21:09
21.01.2013
Digital
Time shift
05:00 min
20:15
21:04
2
21:50
Switching off the TV set during recording
You can switch off the TV to standby whilst recording. The recording
is continued in the standby mode.
Never switch the TV set off at the mains and do not pull out the
plug of the TV set out of the socket. Otherwise the recording will
be lost!
Subtitles
Subtitles of a broadcast can also be stored during recording.
The recording of subtitles in DR+ continuous mode must be activated in the settings.
PLAY key: Continue playback.
You will now see the time-shift archive recording.
Calling up the subtitles during a later playback is similar to calling
subtitles in TV mode.
For further options of time-shift watching see chapter
Video, section Video playback.
STOP key: End time shift and return to the live picture
of the current archive recording.
Stop recording early
You can end a current archive recording prematurely.
Press STOP key.
Watching other stations during archive recording
After you have started the recording, you can switch to another station.
A message appears in the right upper corner of the
screen.
The second channel can be watched in time-shift TV whilst a recording is taking place (Timeshift during archive recording).
Stop recording
Ok
Cancel
OK Stop recording.
The recording process is ended. The portion of the TV
broadcast recorded up to this point is saved on the
hard disk and can be played back via the DR+ archive.
You can also end a running recording by deleting the
corresponding timer entry in the timer overview.
49
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Digital Recorder
DR+ archive function list
DR+ archive
With the DR+ archive you have access to all the recorded programmes
and start playback.
The function list of the DR+ archive contains the individual function
for its archive entries.
Mark the recorded broadcast.
An automatic Delete Manager always ensures that there is sufficient
recording space for new movies.
MENU: call function list.
Open the DR+ archive
...
Open the DR+ archive.
Detailed info
Sorting
Select desired archive,
OK Display archive entries.
Rename
Delete
Copy/Move
...
DR+
Unsere Tierwelt
20:15 - 22:00
21.09.12 ZDF HD
1/4
Favourite
Unsere Tierwelt
Delete
protection
Parentallock
Repeat
Detailed info Show detailed information on the marked archive
entry.
PIP: switch in DR+ archive view between standard and
compact view.
...
DR+
1/1
The Big Bang Theory
22.10.13
ProSieben
Richterin Salesch
14.10.13
SAT.1
The Big Bang Theory
20:15 - 22:00
22.10.13 ProSieben
Rote Rosen (1597)
21.10.13
Das Erste HD
The Big Bang Thoery
Sturm der Liebe (1850)
20.10.13
Das Erste HD
Breaking Bad
16.10.13
AXN Action
Morgenmagazin
10.10.13
Das Erste HD
Blumen der Welt
17.09.12
Das Erste
Volle Kanne Service täglich 14.09.13
ZDF HD
Familien im Brennpunkt
RTL Television
13.09.13
Sorting Sort archive entries in alphabetical (ascending A-Z
or descending Z-A) order or according to recording
date (newest entries first).
Rename Change title of archive entry.
Delete Delete archive entry from hard disk and recover
disk space.
Copy/Move Copy/Move the archive entry from an accessible
TV set to the built-in hard disk or from the built-in
hard disk to an external hard disk. After a successful
moving, the recording is automatically deleted from
the source.
Favourite Add archive entry to Home favourites.
See chapter Home view for further information.
Playing from the DR archive
Mark the required archive entry,
OK Start or continue replaying the selected archive
entry.
Delete Activate or deactivate protection against automatic
protection deletion by the Delete Manager.
Parental Protect recorded broadcast by a four digit PIN against
lock unauthorised playback.
The menu item is only available when a access
code is defined in the parental lock (see chapter
System settings, section Control – Parental
lock).
During the playback of DR+ archive entries, the output signal for external devices at the AV connection
is switched off.
Repeat Play archive entry repeatedly (in a loop) when the
archive entry is replayed in the future.
Explanation of broadcast information
The progress bar in the upper part of the broadcast information shows
you how much of the recording has already been watched.
Further information on the recording, as far as available, can be called
via the function list (see column on the right).
Rotate TV (1 Rotating the TV set.
Settings opens the video settings.
Archive entry with set parental lock
Archive entry with set Delete protection
Archive entry with active playback
(1
Menu item will only be indicated when a motorized stand is connected to the TV set.
50
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Digital Recorder
Displaying detailed information on the recording
Deleting recordings from the archive
If detailed information exists on the recorded broadcast from the EPG,
you can deplay it.
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
STOP key: Call delete dialogue.
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
MENU: Call function list.
Or:
Mark Detailed info,
OK Display detailed information on the broadcast.
MENU: Call function list.
Back
Detailed info
Die mehrteilige Dokumentation "Unsere Tierwelt" liefert
Ihnen bisher nie gezeigte, unglaubliche Einblicke in die
heimische Welt der Tiere.
Mark Delete,
OK call.
OK Confirm deletion. The DR+ archive will be
displayed again.
Das Erste HD
20:15 - 22:00
Unsere Tierwelt
Unsere Tierwelt
...
DR+
3/9
Blumen der Welt (10)
19:00 - 19:45
19.09.12 Das Erste HD
Blumen der Welt (10)
View
For the explanation of the symbols in the bottom line
see chapter TV, section EPG.
Changing the title of an archive
Or:
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
MENU: Call function list.
mark Rename,
OK Call.
Back
Rename
...
Rename
Unsere Tierwelt|
Q
W
E
R
T
Z
U
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
³
Y
X
C
V
B
N
M
.-/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Space
(2 sec)
OK
Delete
Cancel
Select no,
OK Cancel procedure and return to function list.
It may take some time to delete recordings from
external hard disks, depending on the length of the
programme and recording quality. To ensure a correct
deletion process, cancel the presence of the external
hard disk via MediaHome, before unplugging it from
the TV set. You will see a screen message as soon as
the hard disc can be removed.
abc
9
0
Adopt
on a letter with a triangle shows more letters
Select characters,
OK Move character to input line.
For further information on character input see chapter
General information on menu operation.
End input with Adopt. This saves the change
permanently.
Or:
BACK: Cancel renaming.
51
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Digital Recorder
Copying/Moving your recordings
Setting/cancelling delete protection
You should copy recordings that you want to save permanently on an
external USB hard disk.
You can provide films with a delete protection to prevent an automatic
deletion by the delete manager.
Copying recordings, which originate from a CI Plus encrypted
station, is perhaps not possible or only to a limited extent.
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
MENU: Call function list.
Mark Delete protection,
OK Call.
Copying recordings to an external hard disk
You can also copy/move recordings onto an external hard disk, and
archive them or make them available to other Loewe LCD TV sets
(even those without DR+).
...
Delete
protection
yes
Adopt with
OK
no
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
MENU: Call function list.
Mark Copy or Move,
OK call.
Back
Timer data
...
Copy/Move
Target
EXTHDD
Programme
Copy
USB2
20.09.12 ZDF HD Unsere Tierwelt
Move
Mark yes / no,
OK Adoptsettings.
Delete manager
Select target in Timer Data Dialogue.
Select Copy or Move.
OK Start the procedure.
After a successful moving, the recording is automatically deleted
from the source.
Copying to an external hard disk takes place in the background and
at a significantly higher speed. You see a screen message, when
copying has finished.
The status of copying assignments in progress/pending can be
seen in the timer list.
The TV set must not be switched off with the mains switch during
the copying process!
52
The Delete Manager always makes sure there is enough memory space
on the hard disk for new recordings.
If the capacity on the hard disk is nearly fully exhausted, the oldest
recording(s) are automatically deleted in order to create space on
the hard disc.
Recordings which have been protected with a delete protection are
not deleted by the Delete Manager. However, you can still delete these
recordings manually.
To avoid data loss, we recommend copying important recordings to
an external USB hard disk.
Delete the recordings from the Digital Recorder after copying.
Loewe are not liable for data loss from the Digital Recorder’s hard
disk.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Digital Recorder
Locking/unlocking a movie (Parental lock)
You can lock movies that your children are not permitted to view, for
instance. Playback is then only possible after entering a PIN.
In order to activate the Parental lock, a code number (PIN) must have been defined beforehand
(see chapter System settings, section Control
– Parentol lock).
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
MENU: Call function list.
Mark Parental lock,
OK Call.
...
Parental
lock
yes
Adopt with
OK
no
Select Yes / No,
OKAdopt.
The titles of locked films in the DR+ archive will be
replaced by asterisks * when a parental lock is active
and thus cannot be read anymore. The detailed
information for the recording cannot be called up.
The cover of the recording will be replaced by a
picture of a lock. In addition, the entry will be labelled
with the symbol
.
Viewing a locked movie
The desired locked entry in the DR+ archive is
marked.
...
DR+
1/4
When the access code of the parental lock has not
been entered yet:
OK call entry of PIN.
Enter your PIN.
After the access code has been entered, the lock
of the archive entries will be temporarily released.
OK View film.
53
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Digital Recorder
DR+ Streaming
Follow me function
You can release your DR+ archive entries in order to view these on
other Loewe TV sets linked to the network.
The Follow me function enables you to interrupt a current broadcast
and to continue viewing at an alternative TV set from the point of
interruption.
To use DR+ Streaming, at least two Loewe TV sets with MB180,
SL1xx or SL2xx chassis are required (at least one of which has
DR+ integrated). The TV sets also need to be connected via a
wireless connection (WLAN) or a cable connection (e.g. Ethernet,
PowerLine).
DR+ Streaming must be enabled in the system settings.
Archive entries can only be provided or released in the network by
TV sets with integrated hard disks (DR+).
Playback of released archive entries is possible on all TV sets with
MB180, SL1xx (with/without DR+) and SL2xx chassis linked to
the network.
Functions that would require write access to a released device
(parental lock, delete protection, renaming, deleting an entry or
bookmark, creating a bookmark, deleting/hiding parts of a recording) are not available during playback of a DR+ archive entry via
the network.
Playback of DR+ archive entry via the network
Select desired archive,
OK Display archive entries.
Remote TVBA
Also use other archives is activated at the target
TV set.
Press PAUSE key.
Back
2 ZDF 20:15 - 21:45 Rundreise Gardasee
20:40
Festungen, Burgen, Schlösser (5)
20:00 - 21:00
16.09.12 arte HD
Festungen, Burgen, Schlösser (5)
Urlaubsziele
Natur pur
18.08.12 ZDF HD
Mark the required archive entry,
OK View archive entry.
Time shift
00:03 min
20:10
20:40
2
21:10
The TV image becomes a freeze frame and the DR
status display appears.
.
You will see a message on the screen.
The archive recording starts in approximately 20
seconds without an entry. The TV set switches itself
off after starting the recording. The broadcast is adopted into the DR archive.
The recording TV set will make the broadcast available to the network from now.
You can indicate the beginning of a Follow me
recording at the target TV sets in your network by
a screen display.
Continue Follow me recording on the second TV set
Call on the TV set, where you want to view the broadcast, the DR
archive of the recording TV set.
Open the DR+ archive.
Select archive of the recording TV set,
Display archive entries.
Mark Follow me recording,
OK View recording.
54
21.01.2013
Digital
Activate Follow me
Open the DR+ archive.
...
Share DR+ archive with other devices is activ.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
TV
Media+
General information on media reproduction
Accessing your media
Home view gives you access to photos, videos and music from your
personal storage media, e.g., from storage media connected via USB
and from media servers in your home network to which your TV set
is connected.
HOME: Call Home view.
TV
The item Web gives you access to an Internet browser and multimedia
data from the Internet.
Video
Das Erste HD
ZDF HD
RTL Television
SAT.1
ProSieben
VOX
kabel eins
arte HD
Loewe channel
Maxdome
Napster
Aupeo
Audio/Radio
Please follow also the information below for the MediaNet Internet
functions which can be called under Web.
Photo
Web
Extras
Connecting the TV set to your network
System settings
To receive media via media servers in your home network or via the
Internet, you have to integrate your TV set in your home network. You
can connect your TV set both with a wired connection (Ethernet,
PowerLine) or via a wireless radio connection (WLAN). For wireless
connections, the TV set has an internal WLAN antenna.
Mark desired function,
OK call function.
Your Loewe TV set supports the UPnP AV standard for data playback
in the home network. You can find more detailed information on this
in the chapter Glossary.
Video:
see chapter Video.
Audio/Radio:
see chapter Audio/Radio.
Photo:
see chapter Photo.
Web:
see chapter Web.
Help for configuration problems
Loewe cannot provide any support for PC hardware and software or
network components owing to the diverse configuration options with
home networks.
Please contact the administrator of your home network and/or specialist
dealer for support when setting up and for maintenance of network connections, storage media, media server software and network devices,
e.g. routers.
Playing music and videos, displaying images
The windows for playing music and videos and for displaying photos
are comparable for all cases irrespective of the media source. The
relevant players are therefore grouped together.
Exit media
MediaNet
If you wish to use MediaNet we recommend registering your TV set
on our homepage.
http://support.loewe.tv
(International),
http://support.loewe.tv/uk (United Kingdom and Republic of
Ireland),
http://support.loewe.tv/au (Australia) or
http://support.loewe.tv/nz (New Zealand).
HOME: Call Home view and select another function
(see above).
Or:
Press TV or AUDIO key for TV and radio mode swapping (1.
(using the Register free-of-charge option).
Simply follow the steps in the registration process.
The MAC address of your TV set is required for the registration. You
can find this in the TV set under Extras ‫ ט‬Special functions ‫ט‬
Integrated features ‫ ט‬MAC address (TV).
(1
The assignment of the AUDIO key can be changed. The description refers to the standard setting.
55
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Video
Video Function list
Video
The item Video gives you access to videos from local (USB, home
network) and online sources. The individual subitems are described
in detail in the following.
High definition movie material (HD movies) from format 720p
upwards (resolution 1280 x 720 or higher) should be played back
via a wired connection. If there is a wireless connection, then
technical limitations (e.g., fault liability, bandwidth limitations) can
cause disruptions in the playback right up to a complete breakdown
of the playback.
The video function list contains the individual functions for your videos.
MENU: Open function list.
Sorting
...
Favourite
Video_2.avi
0.68 GB
Video_3.avi
1.03 GB
Rotate TV
Settings
Video_4.avi
0.04 GB
Video_5.avi
0.29 GB
Calling video selection
Video_6.avi
0.19 GB
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark Video,
OK call list of video sources.
Video_7.avi
0.74 GB
Video 8 avi
The availability of the following items depends on the currently
marked object (data source, directory, file).
DR+ archive
MediaNet
TwonkyMedia
Unmount Unmount USB data storage medium before removing it in order to prevent data loss.
WMP11
USB
Sorting Sort videos in alphabetical (ascending A-Z or descending Z-A) order, file size or date (newest entries first).
Ajastin
Favourite Add video to the Home favourites..
Rotate TV Rotating the TV set.
Mark function,
OK call.
DR+ archive Programmes that you have recorded onto the integrated hard disk using the Digital Recorder are compiled in the DR+ archive. Via the DR+ archive you
can replay, edit or delete your recorded programmes.
For further information see in chapter TV, section
Digital Recorder – DR+ archive
MediaNet Call MediaNet ‫ט‬Browse ‫ט‬Video.
USB USB storage media on the USB connections of
your TV set. The exact designation depends on the
relevant storage medium.
Twonky- Examples with media servers in your home network.
Media The exact designation depends on the media server
WMP11 used.
Timer Call up the timer list (siehe chapter Extras,section
Timer – Timer list).
56
Menu item will only be indicated when a motorised
stand is connected to the TV set.
Settings opens the video settings.
Mark desired function,
OK Confirm selection.
Selecting videos
Mark desired directory,
OK open directory.
Repeat procedure if necessary.
...
USB1
Source: USB1
Title: Video_1.avi
Size: 0.47 GB
Video_2.avi
0.68 GB
Video_3.avi
1.03 GB
Video_4.avi
0.04 GB
Please also observe the notes in chapter System
settings, section Control – Software update
regarding USB sticks!
Video_5.avi
0.29 GB
The media sources shown here depend on the
devices available/used.
Video 8 avi
Video_6.avi
0.19 GB
Video_7.avi
0.74 GB
Mark desired video,
OK Start or continue playback of the selected video
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Video
Video playback
Symbol
Remote
control key
Description
General information on video playback
long
The description of the following functions applies to the playback of
videos from the DR+ archive as well as for videos from USB storage
media or from media servers in the home network.
For playback of DR+ archive entries we have additional playback
and editing capabilities. The explanation of these functions you find
in section Additional functions for DR+ archive playback.
Only for playback from DR+ archive:
Skip to next bookmark.
During the playback of DR+ archive entries, the output signal for
external devices at the AV connection is switched off.
11:27
21.01.2013
Digital
00:00
only for playback from DR+ archive:
Skip to previous bookmark.
Back
DR+ archive : ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
38:42
only for playback from DR+ archive:
Delete bookmark manually.
The function is only available when
a manually set bookmark is within
five seconds around the playback
position.
2
–
only in time-shift mode:
Start DR+ Follow me recording.
–
only for playback from DR+ archive:
Call dialogue for deleting bookmarks.
–
only for playback from DR+ archive:
Call interval functions.
45:00
hh:mm
only for playback from DR+ archive:
Use current still image at title image in
the DR+ archive.
Video status display
The video status bar provides you with further options on the current
playback.
Show status bar.
BACK: Hide the status display again.
Description of the symbols in the status display for video
playback
Symbol
Remote
control key
Description
hh:mm
–
For playback from DR+ archive:
Activate / deactivate again the repetition
of the currently played archive entry.
–
Skip to desired position in the playback.
Add currently played video to the favourites in Home view.
Call detailed info on the current playback.
Call function list with video settings.
Call list view (select video).
–
Rotating the TV set.
–
For playback of videos from USB storage media or from the home network:
Switch repetition (loop playback) of all
titles of the current directory ON/OFF.
–
For playback of videos from USB storage media or from the home network:
Switch ON/OFF repetition (loop playback) of the current title.
–
Change picture format of the video
playback.
long
Only for playback from DR+ archive:
Set bookmark manually.
In case of time-shifted viewing the timeshifted recording will be converted into
an archive recording.
57
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Video
Pause playback (freeze picture)
Skipping with Smart jump
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
The Smart jump function ensures that the jump width is halved each
time the jump direction is changed or doubled after three jumps in
the same direction (max. 8 minutes). This way you can quickly find a
certain spot of the recording.
The settings for Smart jump you find in the System settings under
Control‫ט‬more ... ‫ט‬DR+ ‫ט‬Smart jump.
DR+ archive:
00:00
38:42
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
45:00
hh:mm
PLAY key: Continue playback.
00:00
Jump
36:42
45:00
hh:mm
By briefly pressing the or keys you can skip forwards and backwards in the movie. The jump distance is adjustable.
Skip forwards.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
For example, you are searching for the beginning of a broadcast that
has already started:
Press repeatedly quickly to jump back.
If you have jumped past the beginning of the programme, jump in the opposite direction:
Press . This jump in the opposite direction is only
carried out for half the jump distance. Jump
forward using .
00:00
38:42
45:00
If you have jumped past the start of the programme:
J ump back again. In the process, the jump
distance is cut in half again.
hh:mm
By halving the jump distance when changing direction again you can
find your way to a specific position.
Skip backwards.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
Jump by entering a time
You can jump to any position in the video by entering a time.
Show status bar.
00:00
34:42
45:00
mark hh:mm (Jump to ...).
DR+ Archiv:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
hh:mm
00:00
38:42
45:00
00:38
Enter the desired time with the numerical keys.
OK Execute jump.
58
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Video
Wind
Repeat
To search for desired scenes in movies you can fast forward and rewind
at three different speeds. Sound is not audible during winding.
Videos can be repeated, i.e., replayed in an endless loop. Depending
on the source (DR+ archive, USB storage medium, media server in
the network), single or all videos can be replayed in an endless loop.
or press a little bit longer.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
Repeated playback of DR+ archive entries
Show status bar.
mark Repeat
confirm with OK.
00:00
40:42
The current archive entry will be replayed repeatedly.
The repetition setting remains active for this archive
entry even when the playback is finished.
hh:mm
By each brief pressing of or the speed will increase
until you switch back to the first speed.
Available speeds: 2x, 5x, 10x.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
,
To deactivate playback again:
mark Repeat off
confirm with OK.
,
Back
Flora und Fauna
Repeating videos from USB storage media or media servers
Show status bar.
00:00
43:42
hh:mm
In case of time-shift viewing, playback is automatically activated when the end of the recording
is reached. You are then about 10 seconds behind
the live picture or when rewinding at the beginning
of the time shift recording.
In case of Fast forward of archive entries, playback
will finish at the end of the recording. The DR+ archive is displayed again.
PLAY key: Continue playback.
mark Repeat title
,
OK Switch the repetition of the individual video ON/
OFF.
The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated or another video is replayed.
Or:
mark Repeat all
,
OK Switch repetition of all titles of the current directory ON/OFF.
The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated or another directory in the overview is
selected.
Repeat title and Repeat all cannot be activated simultaneously.
Using one of the two functions deactivates the respective other one.
In the case of Internet videos, please wait until these
are buffered in the memory. This can take a few
seconds, depending on the bit rate of the film and
Internet speed.
59
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Video
Slow motion
Select language/sound
At an active pause (freeze frame) you can select from four slow motion speeds (for wind/rewind). There is no sound during slow motion
replay. When viewing HDTV slow motion backwards is not possible.
Videos, especially those recorded from TV broadcasts, can contain
several sound tracks. Select sound track/language:
Show status bar.
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
mark Settings
OK Call settings.
,
mark Language/sound,
OK call Language/Sound selection.
Language /
sound
00:00
38:42
45:00
stereo
You can select other movie languages and other sound
formats here.
Adopt with
OK
Dolby Digital
2.0
Dolby Digital
5.1
hh:mm
Press or briefly.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
mark desired sound or desired language,
OK select sound track.
00:00
38:42
45:00
Changing the picture format
hh:mm
Show status bar.
Mark Change Picture format
OK set picture format.
Increase speed:
Press or several times briefly.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
,
You can choose between small or full image settings.
Small image setting shows the video close to the
original resolution. The video status bar is permanently shown below the image.
The full image setting enlarges the image to fit the
entire screen. The status bar can be set to visible or
hidden.
00:00
38:44
45:00
hh:mm
The speed increases every time you press the button
until eventually switching back to the initial speed.
60
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Video
Additional functions for DR+ archive playback
Interval functions
There are additional editing and playback functions for playback of
recorded programmes from the DR+ archive. These are explained
as follows.
The intervals between manually or automatically set bookmarks
(intervals) can be faded out for future playbacks. In addition to that,
unwanted intervals at the beginning or end of your recorded broadcast
can be deleted.
An archive entry is replayed.
Setting bookmarks
To retrieve interesting scenes in a movie later, you can manually set the
bookmarks. In addition, there are also automatically set bookmarks
every time a broadcast is changed. You can jump to each of the bookmarks in succession by pressing a key.
In case of a running time-shift recording (timeshift television), this will
be converted into an archive recording when a blank is set.
Show status bar.
Move to the desired interval in the recorded broadcast
by skipping or winding.
PAUSE: Stop play.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
PLAY key (press a little bit longer): Set bookmark.
You will see a message on the screen. The drive display is then faded
in and you will see the set bookmark above the bar for the playback.
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
00:00
Hide
00:00
38:42
38:42
Cancel
Delete to start
Delete to end
Mark Interval functions
OK Call interval functions.
45:00
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
45:00
,
Back
Flora und Fauna
hh:mm
Automatically set bookmarks are white. Manually
set bookmarks are blue.
00:00
Determine cover picture
The covers for the display of the entry in the DR+ archive can be freely
determined by you during an archive replay:
Hide
Cancel
38:42
Delete to start
45:00
Delete to end
Jump / wind to the desired position in the recording.
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
mark Adopt as cover picture
OK confirm.
,
You will see a message on the screen. The image will
be displayed next to the broadcast in the DR archive
in future.
PLAY key: Resume play.
61
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Video
Hiding intervals
Deleting intervals
Defined intervals will be deleted when you delete the corresponding
bookmark at the beginning or the end of the interval.
The Interval functions are activated.
mark Hide,
OK hide current interval.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
Jumping to Bookmarks
mark next bookmark
,
OK Jump to next bookmark.
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
00:00
38:42
45:00
hh:mm
This interval will be skipped when the archive entry is
replayed in the future.
00:00
38:42
45:00
hh:mm
Show hidden section again
In System settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ט‬more ... ‫ט‬DR+
‫ט‬Notify hidden sections ‫ ט‬yes must be selected.
A screen message will appear when a hidden section is
skipped during replay of a DR+ archive entry.
mark previous bookmark
,
OK Jump to next bookmark.
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
Select yes,
OK confirm.
During future replays, the hidden section is displayed
again.
Deleting part of the recording
00:00
Press PAUSE key at such a position from which the
recording shall be deleted up to the beginning or to
the end.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
00:00
Hide
Cancel
Back
Flora und Fauna
38:42
Delete to start
45:00
Delete to end
Call Interval functions.
mark Delete to start or Delete to end,
confirm with OK.
mark Confirm delete
OK Delete part of recording.
00:00
38:42
hh:mm
62
23:51
hh:mm
45:00
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Video
Deleting individual bookmarks
Subtitles
Subtitles of a broadcast can also be stored during recording see chapter Extras, section Timer – Entering the Timer data.
Jump to the manually set bookmark to be deleted.
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
Showing recorded subtitles during playback:
Show status bar.
mark Settings
OK Call settings.
00:00
23:51
,
45:00
mark Subtitles,
OK Call up available subtitles.
hh:mm
Press PLAY key for a little bit longer: Delete bookmark.
Subtitles
off
Here you can display the programme subtitles, if they are
provided.
Adopt with
OK
German
Deleting the Bookmark during playback
You can delete your manually set bookmarks during the playback of
the DR+ Archive entry.
Manually set bookmarks are blue, automatically set bookmarks are
displayed in grey. Automatically set bookmarks cannot be deleted.
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
mark Delete bookmark
OK call delete dialogue.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
00:00
Delete all bookmarks
Mark the desired subtitles,
OK show/hide subtitles.
,
38:42
Delete bookmark ←
Delete bookmark →
45:00
Cancel
Delete all All manually set bookmarks (blue) in the current
bookmarks recording are deleted.
Delete The manually set bookmark to the left of the current
bookmark ← position will be deleted.
Delete The manually set bookmark to the right of the current
bookmark → position will be deleted.
OKConfirm selection.
PLAY key: Continue playback.
63
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Audio/Radio
Audio/Radio
With item Audio/Radio you find music files from your local server(s)
and USB storage media and you access DVB and Internet radio. The
individual subitems are described in detail in the following.
Calling Audio selection
Audio/Radio Function list
The audio/radio function list contains the individual functions for your
music titles.
MENU: Open function list.
...
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark Audio/Radio,
OK call list of audio sources.
DVB radio
auch
01 Ist das noch Punkrock?
02 Bettmagnet
03 Sohn der Leere
04 TCR
05 Das darfst du
06 Tamagotchi
07 M&F
08 Freundschaft ist Kunst
09 Angekumpelt
10 Waldspaziergang mit Folgen
11 Fiasko
12 Miststück
13 Das finde ich gut
14 Cpt. Metal
15 Die Hard
16 zeiDverschwÄndung
03:00
03:07
03:42
03:44
03:20
03:06
04:16
03:22
02:34
03:27
02:44
03:39
02:27
04:36
02:20
02:59
Sorting
Favourite
Rotate TV
Settings
Internet radio
MediaNet
MediaCenter
TwonkyMedia
WMP11
The availability of the following items depends on the currently
marked object (data source, directory, file).
USB
Unmount Unmount USB data storage medium before removing it in order to prevent data loss.
Mark function,
OK call.
DVB radio The TV set can receive digital radio stations over DVB.
For further information see chapter Audio/Radio,
section Radio mode (DVB radio).
Internet radio The TV set can receive digital radio stations over the
Internet.
For further information see chapter Audio/Radio,
section Radio mode (Internet radio).
MediaNet Call MediaNet ‫ט‬Browse ‫ט‬Music.
Media A Loewe media centre connected to your home
Center network.
Twonky- Examples with media servers in your home network.
Media The exact designation depends on the media server
WMP11 used.
USB USB storage media on the USB connections of
your TV set. The exact designation depends on the
relevant storage medium.
Please also observe the notes in chapter System
settings, section Control – Software update
regarding USB sticks!
The media sources shown here depend on the
devices available/used.
Sorting Sort music titles in alphabetical (ascending A-Z or
descending Z-A) order, title number, file size or date
(newest entries first).
Favourite Add music title to the Home favourites.
Rotate TV Rotating the TV set.
Menu item will only be indicated when a motorised
stand is connected to the TV set.
Settings opens the audio settings.
Mark desired function,
OK Confirm selection.
Selecting music titles
Mark desired directory,
OK open directory.
Repeat procedure if necessary.
...
auch
01 Ist das noch Punkrock?
02 Bettmagnet
03 Sohn der Leere
04 TCR
05 Das darfst du
06 Tamagotchi
07 M&F
08 Freundschaft ist Kunst
09 Angekumpelt
10 Waldspaziergang mit Folgen
11 Fiasko
12 Miststück
13 Das finde ich gut
14 Cpt. Metal
15 Die Hard
16 zeiDverschwÄndung
03:00
03:07
03:42
03:44
03:20
03:06
04:16
03:22
02:34
03:27
02:44
03:39
02:27
04:36
02:20
02:59
Mark desired music title,
OK Start or continue playback of the selected
music title.
64
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Audio/Radio
Pause playback
Audio playback
PAUSE key: Stop current playback.
Description of the symbols in the status display for audio
playback
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
Back
Back
Hands Open
Chasing Cars
00:00
Hands Open
Chasing Cars
02:56
04:27
Shut Your Eyes
02:56
00:00
Shut Your Eyes
04:27
PLAY key: Continue playback.
Wind
Symbol Remote
control key
Description
Call list view (select music title / station).
You can fast forward music titles at four different speeds. Sound is not
audible during winding.
Press a little bit longer.
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
–
Rotating the TV set.
–
Only for playback of music titles from
USB storage media or from the home
network:
Switch repetition (loop playback) of all
titles of the current directory ON/OFF.
–
–
Only for playback of music titles from
USB storage media or from the home
network:
Switch ON/OFF repetition (loop playback) of the current title.
Only for playback of music titles from
USB storage media or from the home
network:
Switch shuffle playback for the titles of
the current directory ON/OFF.
Hands Open
Back
Chasing Cars
00:00
Shut Your Eyes
02:56
04:27
With each brief pressing of the speed will increase
until you switch back to the first speed.
Available speeds: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x.
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
Back
Switch off the TV screen.
Hands Open
Add the current station / music title to
the favourites in Home view.
In case of DVB radio:
Show EPG detailed info on the current
broadcast.
Chasing Cars
Shut Your Eyes
00:00
PLAY key:
04:10
Continue playback.
For playback of music titles from
USB storage media or from the home
network:
Call detailed info on the played music
titles.
Call function list with audio settings.
65
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Audio/Radio
Select another title / play current title from start
Repeat
Music titles can be repeated, i.e., replayed in an endless loop.
BACK: Call music selection.
Select music title as described in chapter Audio/
Radio, section Selecting music titles.
Show status bar.
Or:
,
Mark Repeat title
OK Switch the repetition of the individual music title
ON/OFF.
Press P+ :
Play next title of current album / directory.
The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated or another music title is replayed.
Press P– :
Play current title from start.
Or:
Press P– again:
Play previous title of the current album / directory.
Mark Repeat all
,
OK Switch repetition of all music titles of the current
directory ON/OFF.
Or:
The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated or another directory in the overview is
selected.
Go to line with music titles,
scroll in music titles.
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
Back
Repeat title and Repeat all cannot be activated simultaneously.
Using one of the two functions deactivates the respective other one.
Repeat and Shuffle (see below) cannot be activated at the same
time. Activating a repeat operation deactivates shuffle.
Hands Open
Chasing Cars
00:00
Shut Your Eyes
02:56
04:27
Shuffle playback
The music titles of your current medium are replayed in random order.
OK Start playback of the marked title.
Show status bar.
,
Mark Shuffle playback
OK Switch shuffle playback of the titles in current
album / directory ON/OFF.
Repeat and Shuffle (see above) cannot be activated at the same
time. Activating the shuffle playback deactivates repeat.
66
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Audio/Radio
Switching the screen ON/OFF
Green key: Switch screen OFF.
Or:
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
Hands Open
Back
Chasing Cars
Shut Your Eyes
02:56
00:00
Mark Screen off
OK Switch screen off.
04:27
,
Switching off the screen reduces the power
consumption of the TV set.
Switch on the screen with the remote control:
Press green key.
Switch on the screen on the TV set:
Press R on the ring cursor on the TV set.
Ending playback
STOP key:
End playback and return to music selection.
67
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Audio/Radio
Radio mode (DVB radio)
Setting the volume
The TV set can receive digital radio stations via DVB.
The AUDIO key has been preset for radio operation in the factory.
Radio mode on
AUDIO key on the remote control
V+/V– Volume up/down.
Other sound settings are the same as for the volume
setting in TV mode (see chapter TV, section Setting
the volume).
Or
Press R on the ring cursor on the TV set.
Switching the screen on/off
Green key: Switch screen OFF.
Or:
Switching off the screen reduces the power
consumption of the TV set.
HOME: Call Home view.
Select Audio/Radio,
OK call.
Select DVB radio,
OK call.
You see the radio station list.
...
ASTRA1
19,2°E
Switch on the screen with the remote control:
Press green key.
Switch on the screen on the TV set:
Press R on the ring cursor on the TV set.
2 ANTENNE BAYERN
3 Bayern 3
DVB radio function list
4 Bayern 1
MENU: Call function list.
5 Radio Eins
Or:
6 hr1
OK call station list,
call function list.
7 hr2
Mark function,
OK call.
Select station,
OK call.
See chapter TV, section Function list for further information.
Exit radio mode
AUDIO key or
2 ANTENNE BAYERN
press TV key on the remote control (TV mode is
called).
Or:
HOME: Call Home view.
Select another operating mode,
OK call.
Station switching
The radio mode is switched on and a radio station
has been selected (see above).
P+/P– or press the numerical keys on the remote
control.
Or:
OK call station list.
Select station,
OK call.
68
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Audio/Radio
Radio mode (Internet radio)
Setting the volume
The TV set can receive digital radio stations via the Internet.
V+/V– Volume up/down.
The names of the directories and stations in the Internet radio mode
are given by the provider vTuner. Changing the arrangement of stations or renaming them is not possible here.
Internet radio is only accessible if a connection to the Internet has
been established.
Other sound settings are the same as for the volume
setting in TV mode (see chapter TV, section Setting
the volume).
Switching the screen on/off
Radio mode on
HOME: Call Home view.
Green key: Switch screen OFF.
Select Audio/Radio,
OK call.
Or:
Internetradio -> Antenne Bayern Classic Rock Live
Back
Select Internet radio,
OK call.
You see the radio station list.
Internet radio
Buzz
Antenne Bayern Classic Rock Live
by Genre
by Location
Favorites
Local Germany
New Stations
Mark Screen off
OK Switch screen off.
Popular Stations
Switching off the screen reduces the power
consumption of the TV set.
Recommended Stations
Mark desired directory,
OK open directory.
Repeat procedure if necessary.
Select station,
OK call.
For further information on the control of the Internet
radio see chapter Audio/Radio, section Audio
playback.
,
Switch on the screen with the remote control:
Press green key.
Switch the screen on with the remote control:
Press R on the ring cursor on the TV set.
Internet radio function list
MENU: Call function list.
Station switching
BACK: call station list.
Select stations as described in the left column.
Mark function,
OK call.
See chapter TV, section Function list for further information.
Or:
P+/P– Scroll through the current Internet radio directory to look for stations.
Exit radio mode
Press TV key on the remote control (TV mode is
called).
Or:
HOME: Calling the Home view.
Select another operating mode,
OK call.
69
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Photo
Photo function list
Photo
Via menu item Photo you can view photos from your local media and
from online sources on your TV screen. The individual subitems are
described in detail in the following.
The photo function list contains the individual functions for your
photos.
MENU: Open function list.
Calling Photo selection
...
Slide show
HOME: Call Home view.
Sorting
Favourite
Mark Photo,
OK call list of photo sources.
Rotate TV
Photo
MediaNet
TwonkyMedia
WMP11
USB
The availability of the following items depends on the currently
marked object (data source, directory, file).
Unmount Unmount USB data storage medium before removing it in order to prevent data loss.
Mark function,
OK call.
MediaNet Call MediaNet ‫ט‬Browse ‫ט‬Photo.
Twonky- Examples with media servers in your home network.
Media The exact designation depends on the media server
WMP11 used.
USB USB storage media on the USB connections of
your TV set. The exact designation depends on the
relevant storage medium.
Please also observe the notes in chapter System
settings, section Control – Software update
regarding USB sticks!
The media sources shown here depend on the
devices available/used.
Slide show Start slide show of the photos in the currently selected directory.
See chapter Photo, section Photo display for
further information.
Sorting Sort photos in alphabetical (ascending A-Z or descending Z-A) order, file size or date (newest entries first).
Favourite Add music title to the Home favourites.
Rotate TV Rotating the TV set.
Menu item will only be indicated when a motorised
stand is connected to the TV set.
Photo You can apply frequently used picture settings here.
Mark desired function,
OK Confirm selection.
Selecting a photo
Mark desired directory,
OK open directory.
Repeat procedure if necessary.
...
Pictures
Source: USB1
Title: CRW_7266b
Date: 19.07.2013
Size: 4036 KB
Mark desired photo,
OK View photo zoomed to full screen.
70
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Photo
Full-screen mode
Photo display
A photo is marked.
Description of the symbols in the status display for photos
OK View photo in full-screen mode.
USB1 -> CRW_7266b
Back
USB1 -> CRW_7266b
Back
Show previous / next picture.
Symbol Remote
(icon)
control key
Description
Rotating the photo
–
Call list view (select photo).
–
Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the left.
–
Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the right.
On-screen display of status bar.
Mark
or
.
OK rotate photo by 90 degrees to the left/right.
USB1 -> CRW_7266b
Back
Start slide show.
Pause current slide show.
–
short
Show previous photo.
short
Show next photo.
Rotating the TV set.
Menu item will only be indicated when
a motorised stand is connected to
the TV set.
Add currently displayed photo to the
favourites in Home view.
Slide show
PLAY key:
Start slide show.
USB1 -> CRW_7268
Back
Call detailed info on the displayed photo.
Call function list with photo settings.
PAUSE key:
Pause slide show.
PLAY key:
Continue paused slide show.
Photo in full-screen mode / exit slide show
STOP key:
Full-screen mode / end slide show and
return to photo selection.
71
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Web
Web
MediaNet
Here you have access to multimedia content in the Internet (MediaNet)
as well as a high-quality web browser.
Call MediaNet
WEB: Call MediaNet (1.
Calling the Web selection
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark Web,
OK call Web.
MediaNet
Thus you open the Web-APP Portal.
Browser
or
HOME: Call Home view.
Select Web,
OK call.
Mark MediaNet,
call.
Home
MediaNet - Home
Browse
New
Settings
Imprint
Recommendations
mark function,
OK call.
MediaNet Under the menu item MediaNet you will find a
continually expanding platform for interactive TV
applications from the Internet.
All applications are optimised for use on the TV.
The upper portion of the MediaNet home screen
contains new online content.
The lower portion of the MediaNet home screen
contains Recommendations given by Loewe.
The given content may change from time to time
without prior notice.
Browser Call Web browser of the TV set.
For further information see chapter Web, section
Browser.
Select Home,
OK go to the right to choose the online content.
Mark the desired online content,
OK Display/play content.
The navigation within the various applications
depends on the provider.
Functions in the MediaNet home screen
Home Moves to the right to choose the online content.
Browse Under Browse you can list and call the online content
by subjects.
Settings In the Settings for MediaNet you can select countries, for example, to take advantage of various
services.
Imprint Providing the legally required information on the
parties responsible for the content.
Exit MediaNet
HOME: Call Home view and select another function.
(1
The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter System settings, section Control – Web key function).
72
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Web
MediaNet – Browse
Define application as favourite
MediaNet-Browse is called.
Mark the desired application.
Under the item Browse, you browse the full range of applications by
topic.
Add the marked application to the Home favourites.
Back
All
MediaNet - Browse
Recommendations
All
The favourite will be added to Home view and placed
at the end.
Video
MediaNet – Settings
Photo
MediaNet settings are called.
Service
Games
Here, you can find setting options for MediaNet.
Entertainment
Back
News
Country Selection
MediaNet - Country Selection
Select Countries to display various services
Imprint
Filtering applications
Select the genre / topic,
OK call applications of the genre.
Germany
Belgium
Austria
Netherland
Switzerland
Luxemburg
France
UK
Italy
Denmark
Spain
Sweden
Portugal
Finland
Select desired application,
OK open application.
Service
Games
MediaNet - Browse
Entertainment
Games
Select the desired setting,
OK call.
News
Sport
Music
Country Select countries from which you want to get inforSelection mation on services (see below).
Imprint Providing the legally required information on the
parties responsible for the content.
Country Selection
Change filter
Go to column with genres / topics.
Mark country,
OK select / deselect country.
Select another genre / topic,
OK call applications of the selected genre.
Applications from countries that are marked with a tick
here, are offered in MediaNet.
Exit Browse
Exit Settings
BACK: Return to the MediaNet home screen.
BACK: Return to the MediaNet home screen.
Or:
Or:
Go to column with genres / topics.
Go to column with settings.
Select Back,
OK return to the MediaNet home screen.
Select Back,
OK return to the MediaNet home screen.
73
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Web
Browser
Entering a URL (Internet address)
You can access Internet sites directly using the integrated Opera
browser. The web browser can also be used without an Internet
connection. Thus you can access local devices which provide a web
interface (e.g. router, home control, home network server).
Browser status is displayed.
Mark the URL (Internet address) of the
indicated Internet site,
OK Open address entry box.
Calling the Web browser
Enter/change internet address
HOME: Call Home view.
Back
http://www.loewe.de
Select Web,
OK call.
Select Browser,
OK call.
Start page will be opened.
Adopt
(2 sec)
OK
q
w
e
r
t
z
u
i
o
P
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
I
y
x
c
v
b
n
m
.-/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
www.
.de
Space
Delete
.com
Cancel
.net
ABC
9
0
.
/
Adopt
Cancel
on a letter with a triangle shows more letters
Select required character,
OK Adopt character.
In the event of letters with a triangular, additional
letters are displayed when pressing the OK button
longer (2 sec).
Å Delete character to the left of the cursor.
.-/ The selection switches to special characters.
INFO: display browser status.
Explanation of the symbols in the browser status
abc Switch between upper/lower case.
Space Enter blank space.
Delete Delete all characters.
Define current site as homepage.
Update the displayed Internet site.
100% Change zoom factor of the displayed site / browser.
Cancel Cancel input. The entry box will be closed and the
previous Internet site will be displayed again.
Adopt Adopt address and open new Internet site.
Add displayed Web site to Home view (in the Favourites
area).
Navigating on Web sites
The characters may also be entered by the numerical keys of the remote control (see left column).
Exit Browser
HOME: Call Home view and select another function.
P+/P– Scroll page vertically.
/ Scroll page horizontally.
Select link or text input field,
OK open link or confirm text input.
For the entry of text, press the numerical key (0-9)
repeatedly as with a mobile phone until the desired
character appears. The available letters are printed on
the individual numeric buttons.
BACK: Stop text entry and exit
entry box.
74
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Extras
Extras
Timer
Extras contains additional functions and settings (e.g., Timer list, CA
module settings).
Timer list
Call Extras
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark Extras,
OK call Extras.
Timer
This allows you to open a list which contains all the programmed
timertasks.
Software
DR+
Streaming
Energy efficiency
CA module
Viaccess
CA module
AlphaCrypt
All programmed recordings, earmarked programmes and copy jobs
are listed in the timer list.
You can also programme new recordings, earmark other programmes and copy pre-recorded programmes from the DR+ archive to an
external USB hard disk by means of the timer list.
When you have programmed timer recordings, the TV set can only
be switched off to the standby mode. Never switch the TV set off
at the mains and do not pull out the plug of the TV set out of the
socket. Otherwise no timer recordings can be made.
After a software update, it is likely that Memos of programmes and
Timer entrys are deleted. After a software update, please check your
timer list.
Call Timer list
Long press: call up the timer list.
Special functions
Back
Timer
Timer list
Explanation of the subitems of Extras
Timer Under the menu item Timer you find the timer list
as well as the timer services such as alarm clock or
time-triggered switch-off of the TV set.
For further information see column on the right.
Software Carry out software update.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Software for further information.
DR+ Switch off the TV set to be in an advanced standby
Streaming mode (server function). The access to your TV entries remains activated for a preset time.
See chapter Extras, section DR+ Streaming for
further information.
Energy Here you can determine how energy efficient your
efficiency TV set shall be.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Energy efficiency for further information.
CA module 1 Make settings for your CA modules.
[Name]
This menu item appears only it at least one CA
module is plugged in.
Timer Services
Mon 24.09.
10:32 - 11:00
ProSieben
How I Met Your Mother
24.09.
12:15 - 12:44
ProSieben
Malcolm mittendrin
24.09.
20:15 - 21:15
RTL Television
Wer wird Millionär?
Mon 25.09.
20:00 - 20:15
Das Erste HD
Tagesschau
Add new
Create
newly
All entries
>
Create new timer instruction (recording, copy,
memo).
Explanation of the symbols in the timer list:
Recording
Recording in progress
Marked programme
Repeated recording (daily, weekly or Mon-Fri)
Serial recording
The exact designation of the menu item and available subitems depends on your CA module(s).
See chapter Extras, section CA module for further
information.
Special Here, you find the equipment overview of your TV
functions set and repeat the initial installation. Moreover, you
reset the various settings to the factory settings here.
See chapter Extras, section Special functions for
further information.
75
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Extras
Timer
New instruction: New recording
New recording – Manual recording (current station)
In the Timer list, New recording is selected.
In the Timer list:
Mark Create newly,
OK call.
Mark New recording,
OK call. The function list for recording will be
opened.
Manual recording
9
Recording
Current programme
9 ZDF HD 20:15 - 21:45
Toskana
Mark recording duration.
The selection of a recording duration programmes
always a recording of the currently viewed station.
For Any station and time see below.
OK Call Timer data dialogue.
Thereby you can record the programme currently being
watched.
20:15
Following programme
9 ZDF HD 21:45 - 22:10
heute journal
Recording via EPG
The selected recording duration is preset in the
timer data. Check timer data and correct them,
if required. In case of a previous selection of
??? Min, enter definitely the recording duration.
Open DR+ Archive
Mark Adopt to Timer.
OK Confirm timer data and adopt timer instruction.
Recording has been started.
Mark the desired option,
proceed.
Manual Programme the recording manually.
recording For further information see column on the right.
Current Record currently watched TV programme.
programme
Menu item will only be indicated when EPG data
are available for the current station.
Following Record following programme.
programme
Menu item will only be indicated when EPG data
are available for the current station.
Recording Programme recording of a programme via the elecvia EPG tronic programme guide (EPG).
Open DR+ opens the DR+ archive.
archive
76
New recording – Manual recording (other station)
Manual recording has been selected (see above).
Mark Any station and time,
OK Call Station selection.
Mark desired station,
OK Adopt station in timer data.
Check timer data and correct them, if required.
Mark Adopt to Timer.
OK Confirm timer data and adopt timer instruction.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Extras
Timer
New recording – Current programme
Record conflict
After calling the Current programme the timer data dialogue will be
displayed. The current programme is preset in the timer data.
If you wish to programme a new recording which overlaps a timer
recording already saved, the Recording conflict dialogue will open.
Determine whether one or both recordings are to be made here.
Check timer data and correct them, if required.
Mark Adopt to Timer.
OK Confirm timer data and adopt timer instruction.
Recording has been started.
If you decide for both, you have to state which of the two programmes
is to be recorded fully.
BACK: Interrupt programming of the new recording.
Update timer data of the newly programmed
recording.
New recording – Following programme
After calling the Following programme the timer data dialogue will
be displayed. The following programme of the current station is preset
in the timer data.
Check timer data and correct them, if required.
Delete/change programmed timer instruction
Use this function in the timer list if you want to delete recordings
already programmed, to end a running timer recording or to change
a timer instruction.
The Timer list is displayed.
Mark Adopt to Timer.
OK Confirm timer data and adopt timer instruction.
Mark desired timer instruction,
The text of a currently active timer instruction is red.
If you delete this timer instruction, the recording is
stopped.
New copy job
Back
Timer
You should copy recordings that you want to save permanently on an
external USB hard disk.
Timer list
Copying recordings, which originate from a CI Plus encrypted station,
is perhaps not possible or only to a limited extent.
Timer Services
Mon 24.09.
10:32 - 11:00
ProSieben
How I Met Your Mother
24.09.
12:15 - 12:44
ProSieben
Malcolm mittendrin
24.09.
20:15 - 21:15
RTL Television
Wer wird Millionär?
Mon 25.09.
20:00 - 20:15
Das Erste HD
Tagesschau
In the Timer list:
Mark Create newly,
OK call.
Add new
Mark New copy,
OK call.
The DR+ archive will be called. For further information
on copying refer to chapter TV, section DigitalRecorder.
Change with
All entries
OK
>
Delete with
OK Change marked timer instruction.
The timer instruction will be displayed.
Or:
STOP: Delete marked timer instruction.
New memo
You memorise interesting programmes, which have not started yet,
using the electronic programme guide (EPG).
OKConfirm delete.
Timer instruction will be deleted.
In the Timer list:
Mark Create newly,
OK call.
Mark New memo,
OK call.
EPG will be called. For further information on Memorise
refer to chapter TV, section Electronic Programme
Guide.
77
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Extras
Timer
Entering the Timer data
After selecting the station you wish to record, timer data will be displayed.
The setting options for the timer data differ depending on the recorder
selection, whether an analogue or DVB station is to be recorded or via
which route (EPG, manually) the recording has been programmed.
Timer data - Recording
9
Current programme
101 Das Erste HD 20:15 - 21:45
Tatort: Jagdzeit
20:15
Standard settings
Back
Recorder
DR+
Programme
20:15 - 21:45 Tatort: Jagdzeit
Station
101 Das Erste HD
Date
23.07.2012
Beginning
20:15
End
21:45
Recording type
Once only
Mon-Fri
Daily
Delete Safeguard the recording from being deleted autoprotection matically by using the delete manager.
Weekly
Serial
Update timer data, if required, or press
OK for confirmation.
If an external DVD recorder was selected as recording source, start
replay at the connected device manually from the beginning of the
entered recording time.
Please also read the instructions in chapter Extras, section CAModul concerning the recording of encoded programmes.
Explanations of the setting options in the menu Timer datapart 1 – Standard settings
Station (only available when the selected station can be
received via different signal sources, e.g. DVB-T and
DVB-S)
Select the signal source for the recording.
Date Day of recording.
Beginning Starting time of the recording.
End End time of the recording.
Recording Programmes can be recorded in different ways:
type Once only: The programme will be recorded at the
specified time.
Mon-Fri: The programme will always be recorded
from Monday to Friday at the specified time.
Daily: The programme will be recorded every day at
the specified time.
Weekly: The programme will be recorded every week
at the specified time.
Serial (1: A programme running regularly, but with different start times, can be conveniently programmed.
In this case, the TV set is checking ervery day at the
specified time, whether the programme is available
in the EPG data. If so, the program is recorded, if not,
the next review will be made the following day.
only available if EPG data exists.
78
Lock Only allow later playback of this recording after
recording entering the PIN number (Parental lock).
If a PIN still has not been entered under System
settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ ט‬Parental lock, the Parental lock will at first be activated.
Additional options
Record station
(1
Explanations of the setting options in the menu Timer datapart 2 – Additional options
Auto time Your TV set can use the automatic time control
control (1 (Accurate Recording) for recording a programme.
The automatic time control takes control of the
corresponding monitoring of the start and end time
for DVB stations. The recording is started at the beginning of the broadcast and switched off at the end,
even if the start and/or end time have been changed
by the programme provider.
The automatic time control is not supported by
all stations.
If yes is selected and automatic time control is
not supported by the recorded channel then no
recording is made.
If the programme information (Event-ID) should
not be available any more for the recording of a
programmed broadcast. e.g., due to a programme
change or because the Event-ID has been changed
by the station, the programme cannot be recorded. The broadcasters alone are responsible for
the transfer of this data for using automatic time
control. The availability of the appropriate data
cannot be guaranteed by Loewe.
Recording Select whether broadcast subtitles are to be recorsubtitles ded too.
In case of a direct recording the presetting is
taken from System settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ט‬more
... ‫ט‬DR+ ‫ט‬Recording subtitles.
Favourite When selecting yes the recording will be added to
the Home favourites.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Extras
Timer
Explanations of the setting options in the timer functions
menu:
Timer Services
This menu offers you convenient alarm services. Programmed alarms
are also active when the TV set has been switched off to standby.
If the TV set is switched on from the standby mode by alarm, a screen
message appears. If this is not confirmed within 5 minutes with the
OK key, the TV set switches automatically off again for safety reasons.
The TV set can also be switched off automatically at certain times. A
screen warning appears one minute before automatic switch off. The
automatic switch off can be interrupted by pressing any key.
Switch off The set switches to the standby mode automatically
once at the specified time.
If a time is specified which has already passed on
the same day, the set switches off at this time the
next day.
Switch off The set switches to the standby mode automatically
daily every day at the specified time.
Call Timer Services
One time The set alerts you once today at the specified time.
alarm If a time was specified which has already passed on
the same day, the alarm is saved for the next day.
Pressing long: Call up the timer.
Mark Timer Services.
Or:
Wake up The set regularly alerts you from Monday to Friday
Mon-Fri at the set time.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark Extras,
OK call Extras.
Wake up Sat The set alerts you regularly every Saturday at the
specified time.
Mark Timer,
go to next column.
Wake up Sun Explanations of setting possibilities in the Timer
functions menu.
Mark Timer Services.
Back
Timer
Timer Iist
Timer Services
Switch off once
no
yes, at 23:59
Switch off daily
no
yes, at 23:59
One-time alarm
no
yes, at 23:59
Wake up Mon-Fri
no
yes, at 23:59
Wake up Sat
no
yes, at 23:59
Wake up Sun
no
yes, at 23:59
Wake up with
TV
Radio
Wake up with Specify whether the TV set switches on in the event
of an alarm from the standby mode in TV or Radio
mode with the respectively last active station.
Wake up Set the desired volume of the alarm tone. The alarm
signal tone is emitted as a continuous tone as a guide
volume during the setting.
Wake up signal volume
Adopt with
OK
Select the desired setting,
OK change.
OK adopt.
79
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Extras
CA module
Conditional Access module (CA module)
In order to receive coded digital stations, a Conditional Access module (CA module) and a Smart Card must be inserted in the CI slot of
your TV set.
The CA module and the Smart Card are not part of the set of equipment supplied with the TV set. They are usually available from your
dealer. Loewe does not provide any guarantee for the functioning of
the CA module.
The TV set must first recognise and set up the CA module during initial
operation. Therefore, it can take up to a minute until decoding starts
during initial operation.
Inserting the Smart Card into the CA module
Push the The side of the card with the gold chip on it should be pointing towards the thicker side of the insertion slot (see illustration). Note
the direction of the arrow printed on the Smart Card.
Searching for scrambled stations
HOME: Call Home view.
Select System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Automatic scan TV+Radio,
go to next column.
Select Change search settings,
OKwizard guides you through the search settings.
Under scrambled stations you have to select yes.
Next select Start search/update,
OK start updating the station list.
Contact side
Calling CA module information
CA module
Smart Card
This menu is only available when a CA module is
plugged in.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark Extras,
OK call Extras.
Inserting the CA module into the TV set’s CI slot
Switch off TV set using the mains switch.
Remove the cover from the rear of the set.
Select desired CA module.
The indicated name depends on the inserted
CA module.
go to next column.
Select CA module,
OK call information.
The content of this menu depends on the provider of
the CA module.
Removing the CA module
Switch off TV set using the mains switch.
Insert the CA module carefully into one of the two CI slots, ensuring
that the contact side goes in first. Do not use force. Make sure the
module is not twisted in the process. Push the CA module in as far as
it will go.
Remove the cover from the rear of the set.
Pull the CA module out of the CI slot.
Replace the cover.
Finally, close the side cover.
Troubleshooting (CA module)
The following information can help, if problems should occur when
running a CA module:
Switch the TV set off to the standby mode. Remove the CA-module
from the TV set. Switch the TV set off completely. Wait a few seconds.
Reinsert the CA module. Switch the TV set on again.
If errors continue to occur, make a note of the displayed two-digit
error code (only possible for CI Plus capable CA modules) and contact
your dealer.
80
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Extras
CA module / DR+ Streaming
DVB Common Interface Standard (CI)
DR+ Streaming
Selection possibilities in the CA module menu and performance capability of your CA module depend on the type of module used and
the software installed on it. Consult the manufacturer of the module
if you have any questions.
Here, you can switch off the TV set to the advanced standby mode for
DR+ Streaming.
DVB Common Interface Plus Standard (CI
Plus)
Advanced standby mode with DR+ Streaming access
Switching off the accessible TV set ends access to the DR+ archive.
You can, however, switch your TV set to an advanced standby mode
to enable access to the DR+ archive even when the TV set is switched
off (server function).
HOME: Call Home view.
CI Plus is an advanced development of the DVB Common Interface
Standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible to the
previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards according to
the past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots, as far as
the programme provider permits this.
Mark Extras,
OK call Extras.
Mark DR+ Streaming.
Software
AV Auswahl
Programme providers, who use the CI Plus standard, can assign
different rights for their broadcast programmes. For instance, the
programme provider can restrict or completely prevent recording or
later watching of an encoded programme. If there are such regulations,
these also apply to time-shifted watching of television programmes.
A screen message informs you of this fact, if you would like to record
such a programme. Recording is carried out in such a case (an appropriate entry is displayed in the DR+ archive), later watching of the
programme is however not possible at all or only for a limited period
(e.g., 10 days). A possible time limitation of the playback will also appear in the corresponding entry in the DR+ archive.
All restrictions mentioned here are the responsibilities of the broadcaster. The TV set simply values the broadcaster set signalling as
neutral.
Furthermore, the programme provider can prevent external copying
of protected programmes.
DR+
Streaming
Energy efficiency
By activating this function you can make your TV set
available to other LOEWE TVs that are set up for this for a
specified period of time (can be configured using the digital
recorder menu item "System settings -> Control -> more ->
DR+ -> DR+ Streaming -> DR+ standby").
CA module
Viaccess
CA module
AlphaCrypt
Special
functions
OK Confirm.
The TV set will switch to the advanced standby mode. The DR+ archive
will then be accessible within the network for the period of time set in
the DR+ Streaming - Settings.
It could be necessary to enter the parental protection PIN of the CA
module when programming the data, if you want to record a CI Plus
protected programme, which has been protected against viewing by
minors. The Parental lock PIN can also be store in the TV set. The secret
number of the TV set is required for watching the programme later.
The appearance of the CA module menu depends on the manufacturer
of the module.
Software update for CI Plus capable CA modules
Every now and then, there will be new system software for your CA
module software. There are two software update types.
Recommended update:
Information on an available update is displayed. You can either run this
or cancel the procedure. If you do not install the update, the information
will reappear in regular intervals until the update has been installed.
Forced update:
Information on an available update is displayed. The module does not
decode any more until the update has been successfully implemented.
81
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Extras
Special functions / Integrated features
Special functions
Integrated features
Calling special functions
Here you can obtain information on the integrated features of the
TV set.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark Extras,
OK call Extras.
Mark Special functions,
go to next column.
See the rating plate on the rear of the set for the precise product
designation.
Call Integrated features
HOME: Calling the Home view.
Mark Extras,
OK call Extras.
Special
functions
Integrated
features
Here you can obtain information on the integrated
features of your TV set.
Repeat initial
installation
Reset to
Mark Special functions,
go to next column.
Mark Integrated features,
OK call Integrated features.
Back
Integrated features
Integrated
features
Manufacturer
LOEWE
Serial number
834
Article number
52401B43
Chassis
SL220
Software
2.1.34.0
CI Plus
NO
Nicam
Select desired function,
proceed to next column.
DD/DTS
PIP
Digital Recorder (DR+)
Channel 1
A/T/T2/C/S/S2
Channel 2
A/T/T2/C/S/S2
Move content up and down with the cursor
Explanations of the setting options in the Special functions
menu:
Integrated See right-hand column.
features
Repeat initial You can repeat the Initial installation again at any
installation time. You are guided through the various menus
where i.a. an automatic TV/radio station search is
automatically carried.
Caution: All stored stations and all created personal
lists will be deleted by this!
If a parental lock is activated, the access code must
be entered before repeating initial installation.
Reset to Reset the settings of Picture/Sound, Speaker system
factory or Network to factory settings.
settings
82
Here you can obtain information on the integrated features of your TV set.
Scroll content up/down.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
System settings
Under the menu item System settings in the Home menu you find
all settings and adaptabilities of your TV set. These are explained to
you more in detail as follows.
Calling System settings
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call.
Picture
Here you can adjust among other things: Contrast, colour,
brightness, picture adjustment, sharpness, picture format.
Sound
Station
Control
Multimedia
/ Network
Connections
Or:
Press MENU key longer: call System settings.
Explanations of the setting options:
Picture Here you do the settings referring to the representation of the picture signal on your TV set.
See chapter System settings, section Picture for
further information.
Sound Under this menu item you find the settings for sound
playback.
The subitems of the menu depend on the currently
selected sound component.
See chapter System settings, section Sound for
further information.
Stations Move and delete TV and radio stations. In addition
to that you can automatically and manually update
the complete station list. Your stations can also be
arranged and optionally sorted in personal lists.
See chapter System settings, section Stations
for further information.
Control In this menu you find settings for additional functions
of your TV set like picture in picture (PIP) and digital
recorder (DR+) as well as interfunctional settings
like time and date, parental lock or software update.
See chapter System settings, section Control for
further information.
Multimedia / By means of the Multimedia / Network menu you
Network configure your network adaptor and network access.
Moreover, you can make settings for video and music
playback here.
See chapter System settings, section Multimedia/Network for further information.
Connections Using this menu you configure external devices that
are connected to one of the numerous connections
of the TV set.
See chapter System settings, section Connections for further information.
83
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Picture
Explanations of the picture settings (continuation):
Picture
Here you do the settings referring to the representation of the picture
signal on your TV set.
Calling picture settings
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Picture,
go to next column.
Picture
3D
If your desired display format has not been automatically
selected then you can choose it in the 3D settings menu.
You may display the 3D image in 2D or vice versavice versa.
Picture adjustment
Contrast
Brightness
Colour inten
Image+
Active
Picture format
Colour Here, you can give the TV picture a warmer or colder
temperature hue according to your personal taste.
Sharpness Here you can adjust picture sharpness to obtain the
best definition.
Move picture When using the TV aspect ratios Panorama or Zoom,
up/down the text or graphic displays at the top and bottom are
not or only partially visible. You can move the picture
up or down with the up/down menu control keys to
make the displays visible.
Auto depending on video (VBD+):
dimming The background lighting is reduced depending on
the current video content and the video signal is
simultaneously amplified in order to get an improved
contrast of your TV picture.
depending on the environment (OPC):
The contrast of your TV picture is automatically
reduced vs. decreasing room brightness (Optical
Power Control – OPC).
more ...
The automatic dimming also results in a lower
power consumption of the TV set.
Select desired picture function,
proceed to next column.
Explanations of the picture settings:
3D Do the settings for your TV set‘s 3D display.
Picture You can switch between three preset picture settings
adjustment and the three personal picture values that you have
adjusted.
Contrast The contrast setting depends on the brightness of
the room. The brighter the surroundings the higher
the contrast should be set.
The power consumption of the TV set depends
directly on the value set here.
Brightness Set the brightness so that the black areas of the
picture only just appear black.
Colour Set the colour intensity to suit your personal taste.
intensity
Image+ Picture enhancement on/off.
Active
Picture Set picture format.
format
more ... call with OK (see right-hand column).
84
Due to a reduction in the luminance in 3D mode
for technical reasons, this function is deactivated
when showing 3D content.
Film quality DMM reduces jolt in rapid picture object movements
improvement and rolling text displays. This applies especially for
(DMM) movies.
Digital Noise With active DNC (Digital Noise Control) you can
Control (DNC) eliminate or reduce picture noise.
Skin tone Adjust the skin tone so that the most natural facial
skin colour is achieved.
Deblocking To minimise the visible interference to the picture
filter caused by modern compression methods for images
and image sequences (formation of small blocks),
a so-called deblocking filter can be activated which
counteracts this interference.
PC IN For some PC image formats, horizontal as well as
display vertical position and the phase position of the image
can be corrected.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Picture
Picture adjustment
Selecting the picture format
By selecting one of the three presets (Home Mode, Premium Mode
or Shop Mode), the picture settings for whichever signal input group
that is currently active will be set to predefined settings.
You can use Personal Mode to specify individual settings for contrast,
colour intensity, colour temperature, sharpness and digital noise suppression. Here you can enter your own specifications for each signal
input group.
The setting options depend on the transmitted picture content.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Picture,
go to next column.
Mark Picture format,
go to next column.
Calling picture adjustment
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
...
Home Mode
Premium
Mode
The priority here is low energy consumption in home use.
In this case the TV switches off automitically for the sake
of saving energy, after it has been out of operation for four
hours.
This 16:9 TV mode enables a proportionally correct display
of 16:9 pictures. You select this mode when the picture
signal is not supplied by a PC (normal case).
16:9 Zoom
4:3 TV
Mark Picture adjustment,
go to next column.
Picture adjustment
16:9 TV
16:9 PC
Mark Picture,
go to next column.
...
Picture format
4:3 PC
4:3 Zoom
Adopt with
OK
Shop Mode
Personal
Mode
Select format,
OK adopt selected format.
Explanations of the picture formats for HD signals:
Select mode,
OK adopt selected mode.
When selecting one of the three preset picture
adjustment modes you have to specify additionally
if the mode shall be set only for the currently
selected signal source, e.g., Only for HD Digital or
for the entire TV.
Explanations of the picture adjustment modes:
Home Mode The emphasis for the picture settings is here on low
energy consumption for home use. In this case, the
TV set switches automatically off after 4 hours of
unattended time.
Premium The picture settings in Premium Mode are optimised
Mode for a brighter environment at the cost of higher energy consumption.
Shop Mode The picture settings in Shop Mode are adjusted to
operation in the presentation room.
Personal Here, you can recall your last personal picture setMode tings.
4:3 TV Proportionally correct display of 4:3 or 16:9 broad16:9 TV casts. You select this mode when the signal is not
supplied by a PC (normal case). A small part of the
picture is truncated. This may be necessary to hide
possible interference at the edge of the picture,
which arises from the signal supplied.
16:9 PC Proportionally correct display of 4:3 or 16:9 broad16:9 PC casts without loss of information.
You select this mode when the signal is supplied
by a PC.
4:3 Zoom Proportionally correct display. Maximum picture
16:9 Zoom magnification. Displayed text may get lost.
Explanations of the picture formats for SD signals:
16:9 Proportionally correct display of 16:9 broadcasts.
4:3 Proportionally correct display of 4:3 broadcasts.
Panorama 1 Proportionally correct display of 4:3 broadcasts on
the 16:9 screen. Station logo and subtitles remain
visible.
Panorama 2 Format filling display (factory default) of 4:3 broadcasts on the 16:9 screen. Station logo and subtitles
remain visible.
Zoom Proportionally correct display. Maximum picture
magnification. Displayed text may get lost.
PALplus Is a 4:3-compatible 16:9 picture broadcast supplied
by the station which is detected automatically.
85
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Picture
3D function
Explanations of the 3D settings:
You can use the 3D functionality of your TV set to display 3D material
transmitted by a channel or from an external player that is connected.
You require a pair of Loewe Active Glasses 3D to be able to use the
3D functionality in its entirety (see chapter Accessories). Please read
the operating instructions included with the 3D glasses.
3D settings
Using the 3D settings you can select the correct display format,
should this not have been detected automatically. What’s more, you
can choose to view 3D material in 2D or “traditional” 2D material in 3D.
For 3D content that is being played back from an external HDMI player,
the 3D display format is normally recognised correctly when the factory setting 3D mode ‫ט‬Automatic is selected. You may need to set
the 3D mode manually to view 3D content from broadcasters.
Owing to a reduction in the luminance in 3D mode for technical
reasons, Auto-dimming - Room and Auto-Dimming- Video (VBD+)
are deactivated when 3D contents is displayed.
If the TV set is operated with the remote control during a 3D playback, flicker effects can occur in the 3D glasses when doing this.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
top/bottom To display 3D content in top/bottom format. When
viewing 3D content with this option, two almost identical images are displayed one above the other and
put together correctly by the TV set.
Mark 3D,
go to next column.
3D
Back
3D->2D
off
on
2D->3D
off
on
3D mode
Automatic
side by side
top/bottom
With this you can select the correct display format, should this not be recognised automatically, or you can deactivate
the 3D mode.
Select settings,
OK adopt.
86
3D mode
Automatic If the TV is set to this setting (factory setting), then
the TV set automatically switches over to the correct
3D mode, if this is possible and supported by the
broadcaster.
Only change the setting if the 3D content is not displayed correctly.
The 3D mode is Automatic reset the next time you
switch on the TV set.
Mark Picture,
go to next column.
3D
2D->3D
off/on If you set 2D->3D to on, all 2D image material will be
displayed in 3D. You will need to wear the 3D glasses
to view it properly.
side by side To display 3D content in side by side format. When
viewing 3D content with this setting, two almost
identical images are displayed next to each other
and put together correctly by the TV set.
Calling 3D settings
...
3D->2D
off/on If you set 3D->2D to on, the 3D material from TV stations as well as from external players will be changed
into 2D and played back. The three dimensional (3D)
effect will disappear. You will not need to wear the 3D
glasses to view it properly.
The 3D mode is Automatic reset the next time you
switch on the TV set.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Picture
Picture format / 3D mode
If 3D contents are recognised by the TV device, the picture format
cannot be subsequently changed. The picture format when in 3D
operation is always 16:9 PC.
Instruction / Symbol
If 3D content is detected by the TV set, a corresponding message
appears. The instruction text will disappear after the display time
has elapsed.
The following images will
be displayed in 3D mode.
For this part, put the 3D
glasses on and then
switch them on. Viewing
3D images for extended
periods of time can tire
out the eyes and/or cause
feelings of dizziness.
In the status display, 3D content is indicated by an icon.
125
ASTRA 3D
20:15 - 21:00 ASTRA 3D Demo
21:00 - 21:45 ASTRA 3D Demo
20:42
21.01.2013
Digital
2
87
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Sound
Sound
Explanations of the sound settings (continued):
Calling the sound settings
The selectable menu items depend on the selected station and the
connected sound components (e.g., sound projector).
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Sound,
go to next column.
Sound
Sound mode
Sound
adjustment
Loudness
Souond picVolume adjustment
more ...
Possible sound formats depend on the number of channels
available in the received audio signal. If more audio
channels are supplied than the number of speakers available
then you can create a pseudo mode by selecting the speaker
number which is contained within brackets. If you select
“optimal” then the number of speaker used will automatically,
if possible, match the number of audio channels received, this
normally gives the best sound quality. If a sub woofer is
connected it is always active unless you select mono mode i.e
a single speaker.
5‫ =܃‬playback of front, surround and centre sound
4‫ =܃‬playback of front and surround sound
3‫ =܃‬playback of front and centre sound
2‫ =܃‬playback of front sound
1‫ =܃‬playback of external centre sound or mono (left/right)
Amplifier ‫ =܃‬playback via HiFi/AV amplifier
Select sound function,
proceed to next column.
Explanations of the sound settings:
Sound mode Select the number of speakers you want to hear. The selection depends on the connected sound components
and on the transmitted audio signal.
If the number of speakers appears in brackets,
the sound of missing speakers is transmitted by
the existing speakers (virtually).
Optimum The momentarily reproduced audio signal is output
with the ideal number of speakers.
‫ ܃‬Play centre sound or mono (left/right).
‫ ܃‬Play front sound (L/R stereo).
‫ ܃‬Play front and centre sound.
‫ ܃‬Play front and surround sound.
‫ ܃‬Play front, surround and centre sound.
HiFi/AV Play via an external HiFi amplifier. Selection is only
amplifier possible if an amplifier has been selected in the
sound components wizard.
Dolby PLII Here you can make Dolby Pro Logic II sound settings
mode for movie and music.
Menu item only appears with certain sound mode
settings.
Sound Here, you can adapt preset sound characteristics
adjustment of the respective broadcast. Selectable are, e.g.,
Speech, Classical, Pop, Custom music and Film
soundtracks. For personal music and film sound you
can do the settings for pitch and bass sound (high
and low frequencies).
88
Audio Set the volume of the audio commentary to be
commentary relative to the volume of the programme being
volume transmitted.
Should negative values result (those in the area of
-50… -1), the audio commentary is quieter than the
programme sound. Should positive values result
(those in the area of +1… +50), the audio commentary is louder than the programme sound. If the
value 0 results, then the audio commentary is at the
exactly the same volume as the programme sound.
The menu item only appears if audio commentary
is activated (see chapter System settings, section Control – DVB settings) and is offered by
the current station.
Additionally, the Loudspeaker sound or Headphone sound must be set to normal + audio
commentary must be switched on (see next page).
Loudness Proper boost of bass and treble tones at low volume.
Sound
picture
synchronisation
If the sound and picture are not precisely in sync,
you may correct this here. Move the mark on the
bar downwards, slowing down the sound compared
with the picture. Move the mark upwards, speeding
it up compared with the picture. Time adjustment
of the sound occurs in steps of 10 ms in each case.
only available for DVB stations.
Volume The volume can differ according to the individual
adjustment stations. If the sound is too loud or too quiet in relation to other stations, adjust the volume. When the
menu is open, you can select the stations one after
another with P+/P– and adjust every single station
conveniently.
more ... call with OK (see next page).
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Sound / Stations
Explanations of the sound settings (continued):
more ...
Loudspeaker/ For analogue stations:
Headphone Selection options for Mono/ Stereo or Sound 1 or
sound Sound 2 for bilingual programmes, separately for
the loudspeakers and the headphones.
For DVB channels:
You can choose here if you wish to listen to a special
soundtrack for the visually impaired over the speakers. This soundtrack uses an audio commentary to
describe the action taking place on-screen.
The menu item only appears if an audio commentary is offered by the current channel.
Auto volume The volume may vary when receiving stations with
different standards, when switching from station to
station or during commercials.
You can reduce these differences in volume by
selecting auto volume on. For music and live broadcasts you get a better sound spectrum with auto
volume off.
AV You can indicate here which sound is output via the
output signal AV socket for dual sound programmes: Sound 1 (e.g.
main language), sound 2 (e.g. foreign language), or
sound 1+2 (both simultaneously).
Stations
Under the item Stations you find all settings concerned with station
search for TV and DVB radio as well as functions for creating and
editing the various station lists.
Station management is not possible as long as a programmed timer
recording is active.
If at least one station is locked, the access code must be entered
prior to automatic search.
The procedure for radio stations or Station lists Radio is similar to
that for TV stations or Station lists TV. Therefore, this procedure is
described only for TV stations.
Call Stations menu
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Stations,
go to next column.
In this mode you open a wizard which automatically
searches and saves all the TV and radio stations. Please
follow the instructions in the dialogues below.
Stations
Manual scan
Radio (incl.
Station lists
TV
Station lists
Radio
Update
Maximum You can limit the volume adjustment of the loudvolume speakers. This prevents selecting a volume which
is too loud.
Maximum Set the sound level to be heard after switching on the
switch on TV set with the mains switch or after a power failure.
volume When switching on the TV set in standby mode, the
volume last used is retained unless it was above this
switch-on level. Otherwise it is limited by this.
Balance Set stereo balance so that the volume impression is
identical on the left and right.
Auto speech If the automatic speech detection is activated,
detection the sound of the current programme is automatically output with optimum comprehensibility when
speech is detected.
Select desired function,
proceed to next column.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Stations menu:
Automatic Here you start the wizard that searches and stores
scan all TV and DVB radio stations.
TV+Radio
Manual scan Here, you can enter all the settings available for a
TV TV station.
Manual scan Here, you can enter all the settings available for a
Radio DVB radio station.
Station lists Here you can move and delete TV stations in all
TV lists. You can put together your most frequently
watched programmes in one or more lists of personal favourites.
Station lists Here you can move and delete DVB radio stations in
Radio all lists. You can put together your most frequently
watched programmes in one or more lists of personal favourites.
Update If the channel list is not up to date, it will be updated
station list automatically, provided the parameter Allow is
automatically selected.
89
Individual 40-55
User guide
Automatic scan TV+Radio
For automatic scan TV+Radio, a search wizard will be started that
searches for new stations which are not yet stored.
You have to repeat the initial installation and automatically search for new stations if you want to delete
all the existing stations and automatically search for
new ones.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Mark Automatic scan TV+Radio,
go to next column.
In the upper info text the current search settings will
now be displayed:
SEARCH WIZARD - Check search settings
...
Your TV carries out the update of the station list (search for new stations; delete
stations no longer broadcast) with the following settings:
Location of TV set
Signal source
Change search settings
D Germany
Cable analogue
Start search/update
End with
Explanations of some search settings (continued):
DVB-T/C/S If several networks are available, you can decide
Network which network you want to receive your channels
selection from.
DVB-T/C/S With the selection of set location the conventional
Settings settings will be preset. Only change these defaults
if you are familiar with other parameters.
Scrambled stations: (DVB-T/C/S)
You can state whether scrambled stations are to be
searched for in the search/update. If you select yes,
coded stations will also be searched for. However,
these stations can only be received in connection
with a CA module and the appropriate Smart Card.
Ask your dealer which Smart Card you need to receive certain stations.
Search method: (DVB-T)
If you want to run the station search independently
of the channel grid, select Frequency search for
the search method.
Search method: (DVB-C)
If you select Frequency search here, a search is
performed for all receivable stations. With Network
search, only the stations which the networks supply are searched - either for all receivable networks
or only for the particular network specified under
Network ID.
Network ID: (DVB-C)
If you want to change these search settings:
Select Change search settings,
OKwizard guides you through the search settings
(see column on the right).
If you agree with these settings:
Select Start search/update,
OKstart scan.
BACK: Cancel current search/update.
Explanations of some search settings:
Age-related You can specify an age limit for your TV set here.
lock DVB broadcasts that have an appropriate age identification are locked and can only be watched after
entering the access code.
Signal source Select cable (analogue), DVB-T, DVB-C or DVB-S
depending on which signal source you want to search
for new stations.
Use the Antenna wizard to call the configuration of
the DVB-T and DVB-S antennas.
Calling up the DVB antenna configuration causes
the Change search settings dialogue to be quit.
You must call up the dialogue again after finishing
the configuration.
Cable
(analogue)
TV/colour
standard
90
With the selection of TV set location the conventional TV standard/colour standard is the default.
This should only be changed if stations with other
standards are to be searched.
If you select none here, DVB signals of all current
broadcasting networks are scanned automatically
(recommended for most cable networks).
If, on the other hand, you specify a certain network ID
(necessary in the cable networks of some countries),
only DVB signals of this broadcasting network are
searched for automatically. Your cable provider has
the information you need.
Search method: (DVB-S)
If you select Frequency search here, a search is
performed for all receivable stations. With Network
search, from all receivable networks all the stations
are searched which are supplied by these networks.
Accept Logical Channel Number: (DVB-T/C/S)
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-T/C/S) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Stations
Search for/update stations – handling of new and no longer
found stations
The number of new TV stations found is displayed after the automatic
search / update has been completed.
Proceed. The number of new radio stations found
is displayed.
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a station. However,
this requires detailed knowledge.
The manual search of radio stations is similar to that of TV stations. Therefore, the manual search for radio station is not dealt
with separately.
Calling manual search
Call list of new TV stations found.
HOME: Call Home view.
Newly found stations
...
Manual Scan TV / Radio
All newly found TV stations which are marked with a are then saved. With the
button, you can set or remove the marking.
Note: The newly found stations which you have already deleted are not marked.
3sat HD
ANDALUCÍA TV
arte
a.tv
ANIMAX
ARTE
Achtung Singles TV
ANIXE HD
ARTE Francais
Aktiv Direkt TV
anixe iTV
ARTE HD
Al Jazeera
ANIXE SD
Astrocanal TV
Al Jazeera English
ARD
Astro TV
Amore TV
ARIRANG TV
ATV+
OK
Proceed with
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Mark Manual Scan TV,
OKcall Manual Scan.
Manual TV scan (incl. antenna status)
...
Select station.
OK Mark / unmark station.
Signal source
Cable analog
DVB-T
TV standard
B/G
I
D/K
Colour standard
PAL
SECAM
Channel
E 01
S 01
Frequency
044.00 MHz
L
Back
DVB-C
DVB-S
M
Name
stores the marked TV stations. The list of new radio
stations found is displayed.
Select station.
OK Mark / unmark station.
C/N
40.5 dB
Level
54 dBμV
Search
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a station. However, this requires detailed knowledge.
Proceed.
Afterwards, a list of the stations which are saved but
which are temporarily not broadcasting or no longer
exist is displayed, if available.
The number of the memory location used is displayed
in front of the station. Please select the stations you
really want to delete.
Stations no longer found (TV)
...
The following stored TV stations were no longer found because they are not currently
broadcasting a programme or no longer exist. All TV stations marked with a
are
subsequently deleted. The unmarked stations are retained.
You can set or remove the marking with the OK button.
Channel TV
Press TV
Direct 3
iM1
Direct 4
Direct 5
Select the menu item Signal source to decide in which
area you want to search for stations.
Depending on the selected source, various setting
possibilities will be available.
On the next page, the settings for analogue cable and
DVB-T/C/S sources are described separately.
Status bar for manual search
Status bars are displayed for manual search, which
show the reception quality of the individual stations
during the station scan. The markers in all bars should
preferably be in the green area.
GoTV
ATV+
BVN
Proceed with
Select station.
OK Mark / unmark station.
Proceed. The marked stations will be deleted. The
list of radio stations no longer found is displayed.
Select station.
OK Mark / unmark station.
End search wizard.
Station name
C/N
71.5 dB
Level
58 dBμV
BER
0 E-7
C/N: (Carrier/Noise) The bar shows the signal-tonoise ratio. The value indicated in dB should be preferably high.
Level: The bar shows the receiving level of the station.
The value displayed in dBμV should be preferably high.
BER: (Bit Error Rate) The bar shows the bit error rate
of the station. The value for BER should be as low as
possible.
91
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Stations
Manual search for cable analogue (analogue cable reception):
Manual search is called.
Manual DVB-T/C/S search:
Manual search is called.
Cable analogue has been selected as signal source.
...
Signal source
Cable analog
DVB-T
TV standard
B/G
I
D/K
Colour standard
PAL
Channel
E 01
Frequency
044.00 MHz
L
Back
DVB-C
DVB-S
M
Signal source
Cable analog
Frequency
044.00 MHz
QAM modualtion
16
SECAM
Symbol rate
22000
S 01
Netzwork
Standard
C/N
40.5 dB
Level
54 dBμV
DVB-T
DVB-C
DVB-S
Station name
Name
C/N
Back
Manual TV scan (incl. antenna status)
...
Manual TV scan (incl. antenna status)
71.5 dB
Level
58 dBμV
BER
0 E-7
Search
Search
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a station. However, this requires detailed knowledge.
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a station. However, this requires detailed knowledge.
Mark and adjust settings,
OK confirm as the case may be.
Mark Search,
OK start search.
Mark and adjust settings,
OK confirm as the case may be.
Mark Search,
OK start search.
When a DVB transponder has been found:
If a station has been found:
Mark Store/Overwrite,
OK store station.
Found stations
...
Back
1024 arte HD
1025 kabel eins HD
1026 SPORT1 HD
1027 Cartoon Network
1028 Spiegel TV HD
Explanations on the search settings for cable analogue:
Search Store/Overwrite
Mark/unmark with OK
Signal source Selection of range in which you want to search for the
station.
TV standard If necessary, ask your dealer which standard to select for specific channels or AV equipment.
Colour If necessary, ask your dealer which standard to sestandard lect for specific channels or AV equipment.
Channel Direct input of channel.
Frequency Direct input of station frequency.
Range for entry: 044.75 MHz - 859.25 MHz.
Name Here, the name of the found station is displayed. You
can change the name of the station.
Mark the station,
OK Station will be ticked with . If necessary,
repeat for several stations.
Stations that already exist in the station overview
will be displayed with their station number on the
left.
Mark Store/Overwrite,
OK Stations marked with
will be stored.
Explanations of some search settings:
Signal Selection of range in which you want to search for the
source station.
(DVB-T/C/S)
Channel Direct input of channel.
(DVB-T)
Satellite Here you can select the satellite where the stations
(DVB-S) are to be searched for.
Band Here you can select the frequency band in which
(DVB-S) shall be searched.
Setting ranges: horiz/low 10694 - 11906 MHz
horiz/high 11544 - 12756 MHz
vert/low
10694 - 11906 MHz
vert/high 11544 - 12756 MHz
Frequency DVB-T/C: Direct input of station frequency.
(DVB-T/C/S) DVB-S: Direct input of LNC frequency
Symbol rate Here you can specify the symbol rate
(DVB-S) Range: 1000-45000
92
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Stations
Station lists TV / Radio
Move block / Change order
Under the menu item Station lists TV or Station lists Radio you
can edit (delete block, move block, restore deleted stations) various
lists, e.g., DVB-T, ASTRA LCN, DVB-C, etc. You can also create and
edit new Personal lists.
The function of Station lists Radio is similar to that of Station lists
TV. Therefore, editing of Station lists Radio will not be dealt with
separately.
Change station list
If at least one station is locked, the access code must
be entered before changing stations.
HOME: Call Home view.
Stations with LCN cannot be reordered. In this case,
the function Move block is hidden.
Select Move block,
move to list.
Select beginning of block,
OK mark beginning of block.
Select end of block,
OK mark end of block (selected stations are coloured
blue).
Select insert position,
OK Confirm insert position.
...
ASTRA LCN
Delete range Move range Restore stations
DVB-T
Mark Stations,
go to next column.
DVB-C
New
personal list
Select Station lists TV,
go to next column.
Mark desired station list,
call list.
Cancel process
ASTRA LCN
...
ASTRA LCN
DVB-T
DVB-C
New
personal list
Delete block
Back
ASTRA LCN
Mark System settings,
OK call system settings.
Delete list
1 Das Erste HD
10 Das Erste
19 Z
2 ZDF HD
11 ZDF
20 Z
3 RTL
12 arte
21 Z
4 SAT.1
13 RTL HD
22 S
5 ProSieben
14 SAT.1 HD
23 R
6 VOX
15 ProSieben HD
24 P
7 kabel eins
16 VOX HD
25 H
8 arte HD
17 kabel eins HD
26 S
9 Super RTL
18 Super RTL HD
27 N
Execute move
Back
Move block
Restore stations
1 Das Erste HD
10 Das Erste
19 Z
2 ZDF HD
11 ZDF
20 Z
3 RTL
12 arte
21 Z
4 SAT.1
13 RTL HD
22 S
5 ProSieben
14 SAT.1 HD
23 R
6 VOX
15 ProSieben HD
24 P
7 kabel eins
16 VOX HD
25 H
8 arte HD
17 kabel eins HD
26 S
9 Super RTL
18 Super RTL HD
27 N
Here you can move stations around in all the lists, delete stations and restore stations you have previously deleted. You
can edit frequently-used stations in one or more personal lists.
Here, you can delete and move station blocks as well
as restore deleted stations.
The following section describes how to proceed if you
wish to Delete block, Move block and Restore
stations.
Select Execute move,
OK block will be moved, or
select Cancel procedure,
OK cancel move.
Restore stations
Select Restore stations,
move to list.
Select beginning of block,
OK mark beginning of block.
Select end of block,
OK mark end of block (selected stations are coloured
blue).
Select Restore stations,
OK stations will be added again to the station list, or
Delete block
Select Delete Block,
move to list.
select Cancel procedure,
OK cancel restore.
Select beginning of block,
OK mark beginning of block.
Select end of block,
OK mark end of block (selected stations are coloured
blue).
Select Execute delete,
OK block will be deleted, or
select Cancel procedure,
OK cancel delete.
93
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Stations
Adding stations to Personal list
Compose / edit Personal list
Each personal list can contain up to 99 stations. You can compose the
personal lists to suit your convenience (e.g., topic lists). Other persons
using this TV set can create their own personal lists. You can create
up to six personal lists.
Creating and updating personal station lists is not possible as long
as a programmed timer recording is active.
The Personal list must be opened to add new
stations to it.
Select Add/remove Stations in the function list.
How to add stations is described in the left column.
Deleting stations from the Personal list
Create / edit New personal list
The Personal list must be opened to delete stations
in it.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Select Add/remove Stations in the function list,
OKactivate.
Mark Stations,
go to next column.
go to personal list.
M
ark the station to be deleted in the personal list,
Mark Station lists TV,
go to next column.
OK activate. Function of the coloured keys in standard
PIP functionality.
Mark New personal list,
OKNew personal list x will be created.
BACK: Store and close station list.
x stands for the number of the personal list.
The number depends on how many list were
already created.
ASTRA1
19,2°E
...
13
n-tv
Personal list 1
1
SAT.1
14
ProSieben
Add station to personal list:
Mark in right-hand column and press
New
personal list
2
ZDF HD
15
3sat HD
Delete station from personal list:
Mark and press OK to remove.
3
BR Nord HD
16
ARTE HD
Select other station list / sorting in right-hand
column with "right menu control button"
4
3sat HD
17
EinsPlus
Use
5
ZDF Neo HD
18
Eurosport
19
ZDF Neo HD
20
ZDF.kultur
OK
to add.
to save new list.
M
ark the station in the station list which is to be
Move / reorder stations in the Personal list
The personal list must be opened to move stations
in it.
Select Move stations in the function list,
OKactivate.
Select station to be moved in the Personal list,
OK mark (station will be coloured red).
Select insert position (insert position will be
marked with a red line),
OK Execute move. Proceed in the same way with
additional stations.
BACK: Store and close station list.
added to the personal list.
OK adds the station to the personal list.
The new station will be added at the end of the
personal list. Proceed in the same way with additional stations.
Renaming the Personal list
The Personal list to be renamed must be opened.
Select Rename list in the function list,
OKactivate.
Call up additional options.
ASTRA LCN Examples of station lists. Select the station list from
DVB-T which you add stations to the personal list. In the perDVB-C sonal list you can store stations from different sources.
Sorting The sorting procedure for the source station list may
be changed between numerical and alphabetical.
BACK: Store and close station list.
Enter new name.
Select Adopt.
OK New name for the personal list will be adopted.
Delete Personal list
The Personal list to be deleted must be opened.
Deleting of the list is irrevocable.
Select Delete list in the function list,
OKactivate.
94
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Stations
Update station list automatically
Some programme providers offer an automatic update of the station lists (Dynamic Channel Management). You may Allow or Block
an automatic station list update. If automatic updating is allowed, a
screen message about an available update appears whenever the
list is changed.
Allow/block updates
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Stations,
go to next column.
At once The station list will be immediately updated. Normally
this occurs in the background without interfering
further with the TV‘s operation. In exceptional cases,
it is however possible that during this process an automatic station change may be necessary.
After switch The channel list will be updated the next time the TV
off to set is switched off into standby mode.
standby
Later Updating the channel list will be postponed to a later
date. When the TV set is switched on and off, the
update message will appear again.
OK Confirm selection.
Mark Update station list automatically,
go to next column.
...
Allow
If the channel list is not up to date, it will be automatically
updated provided the parameter "Allow" is selected.
Block
Select Allow or Block,
OK adopt.
If the channel list is not up to date, it will be updated
automatically, provided the option Allow is selected.
Updating the station list
A message appears whenever the TV is switched on if the network
provider changes their channel list.
In Update station list automatically, Allow must
be selected.
Update station list
Because your network provider has changed its station list, it has to be adapted
on your TV set as well. Please specify when you wish to do this.
At once
After switch off to standby
Later
Proceed with
Select the desired procedure.
95
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
Control
more ...
In the chapter Control you find settings for the various operating modes
like PIP and DR+ as well as settings referring in an interfunctional way
to your TV set like, for example, time and date and on-screen displays.
Calling Control
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Select Control,
go to next column.
Control
Language
On-screen Here you can make settings for the duration, position
displays and existence of special on-screen displays.
Time and The time and date are normally obtained automatidate cally from the TV.
DVB settings Here you can make settings which only refer to DVB
stations (subtitles and audio mode, DVB character
set).
PIP Settings In this menu you can make all adjustments for the
picture-in-picture display.
Here you can define the menu language and for DVB
stations also the subtitle and audio language.
Parental
lock
EPG
DR+ Here you can do all the settings for the digital recorder.
Energy efficiency
Quick start
mode
Software
Standard Here you can do all Standard Teletext settings.
Teletext
more ...
HbbTV Here you can do all settings for the HbbTV mode.
Select desired menu item,
go to next column.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Control menu:
Language Here you can define the menu language and for DVB
stations also the subtitle and audio language.
Parental With the parental lock you can bar access to all
lock stations immediately or daily for a certain period of
time. The stations can also be locked individually.
Age-dependent locking of programs with an appropriate age code is also possible.
EPG Here you can do all EPG settings.
Energy Here you can determine how energy efficient your
efficiency TV set shall be.
Quick start Here you can enable the Quick Start Mode. The TV
mode set will then immediately switch on from standby
without delay.
Software Here you can download new software from a USB
storage medium or from the Internet (as far as
requirements exist for this).
more ... After confirmation with the OK key you will be offered
additional not so frequently used sub items for the
current menu item (see right hand column).
96
CA Here you can allocate stations to a CA module or
module(s) assign the PIN for recordings.
Rotate TV Here you can define the maximum range of rotation
and the switch-off position for a TV set with motorized stand.
Menu item will only be displayed when a motorized
stand is connected to the TV set.
Recording Here you can specify the lead time and follow-up
time for recordings.
Hard disks Here you find tools to format or check the hard disks.
key Here you can assign another function to the Web
function key. The selected function will then be called directly
when the key is pressed.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
Language
EPG
Specify the language for all menus in the TV set in the language menu.
The language for the DVB subtitles and the film language can be set
for DVB programmes.
Calling EPG settings
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Call language
Mark Control,
go to next column.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark EPG,
go to next column.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
...
Mark Language,
go to next column.
Language
...
Language
Menu
Back
Subtitle (DVB)
(de)
ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
(el)
Svenska
(sv)
English
(en)
Polski
(pl)
Dansk
(da)
(pt)
Français
(fr)
Magyar
(hu)
Português
Italiano
(it)
Suomi
(fi)
ȇɭɫɫɤɢɣ
Español
(es)
Slovenščina (sl)
Norsk
(no)
Nederlands (nl)
Slovenčina (sk)
中文
(zh)
(cs)
Türkçe
Station selection TV
Please mark the stations with
program preview.
OK
for which you want a
Data capture
TV on when
memorised
Audio (DVB)
Deutsch
Čeština
EPG
Clear database
(ru)
(tr)
Explanation of the EPG setting options:
You can change the menu language here.
Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Language menu:
Menu You can change the menu language here.
Subtitle If subtitles are provided by the DVB station, you can
(DVB) set your desired language in advance here. If this is
included in the range of languages of the station, it
will be shown automatically.
You can also specify an alternative language under
this menu item, in case your chosen language is not
offered by the station.
Audio (DVB) Specify your desired film language in advance here.
If this is included in the range of languages of the
station, it will be shown automatically.
You can also specify an alternative language under
this menu item, in case your chosen language is not
offered by the station.
Station In the Station selection you can determine for
selection TV which station in the programme guide, information
is to be displayed. Programme information is only
Station displayed for stations with in the EPG list. Using
selection the on-screen buttons in the bottom line you can
Radio mark all stations or unmark the stations or select
stations from specific (e.g., personal) lists.
Further information on EPG station selection you
find in chapter TV, section Electronic Programme
Guide – EPG wizard.
Due to the large number of receivable stations you
should restrict the station selection. This reduces the
data entry time and increases the clarity in the EPG.
Data Here you can switch the data entry for the electronic
capture programme guide (EPG) on and off.
If the data capture is switched on, your TV set tries to
update the database overnight (normally between 2
and 5 am) or, if required, two minutes after switching
to stand-by mode. The TV set must be on stand-by
for this and not switched off at the mains switch.
The indicator on the TV set lights blue during data
capture in stand-by mode.
The data are also updated while you are watching
the EPG station.
TV on when When yes is selected in the setting, the switched off
memorised TV switches on automatically in standby mode at
the beginning of a memorised programme. A screen
message appears when switching on. If this is not
confirmed within 5 minutes with the OK key, the TV
switches automatically off again for safety reasons.
Clear data This menu item allows you to remove all data from
base EPG database. It will take some time to retrieve this
data again.
97
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Parental lock menu:
Parental lock
You can select and set various security options to prevent unauthorised use of the TV set and to protect your children from unsuitable
programmes.
Call Parental lock menu
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Lock single You can lock / unlock individual or all of the stations
stations in the station list specifically.
The lock remains active until it is switched off in the
menu.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Age-related Some DVB stations also broadcast an age classilock fication. If the age set here is below the broadcast
age limit, the programme can only be watched after
entering the access code.
Mark Parental lock,
go to next column.
Parental lock
...
Parental lock
Back
Define 4 digit access code and memorise it, please.
(Note: The same digit must not be used four times).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Lock all The TV set is locked immediately the menu is exited.
stations All programmes can then only be watched after
entering the access code.
The lock can be activated both Immediately and
for a Daily defined period.
The lock remains active until it is switched off in the
menu.
Change You can change your access code at any time. Enter
access code the new access code in place of the old one.
0
Cancel
Deactivate All set parental locks (locked stations, age-dependent locks, locked films in the DR+ archive) are cancelled. The current secret code is deleted. When the
parental lock is reactivated all the previous parental
locks are set again automatically.
With the parental lock you can bar access to all stations immediately or daily for a certain period of time. The stations
can also be locked individually. Age dependent locking of prorams with an appropriate age code is also possible.
Reset All currently set parental locks are finally cancelled.
The access code is deleted.
Define a four digit access code (PIN) the first time you
open it. Note the access code (PIN) well.
The access code must not consist of the same four
digits.
Mark Confirm,
OK activate.
The new PIN must be entered and confirmed again.
The Parental lock menu will be opened.
Parental lock
...
Parental
lock
Lock all stations
Back
Lock single stations
Age-related lock
Immediately
no
yes
Daily
no
yes, from 00:00 until 00:00
Change acces code
Deactivate
Protection of minors for CI Plus programmes
Youth-protected broadcasts of programme providers with CI Plus
encoding possibly require you to enter the secret number (PIN) of
the CA module.
The Parental lock PIN of the CA module can be store in the TV set.
We recommend selecting the secret number of the TV set according
to the secret number of the CA module, since the secret number of
the CA module cannot be changed. This means that you must only
remember one secret number.
Code number
The code number cancels all entered access codes. It can be used for
example if you have forgotten your PIN. In the supplied quick guide you
find a note on the access code number. Remove this one from the quick
guide and keep it in a safe place.
You can bar access to all stations. This can be done immediately or daily for a certain period of time.
The four-digit access code (PIN) must be entered
when the parental lock is opened in future. For security
reasons, it appears encrypted (****) when entering.
Note for unlocking
As soon as the PIN has once been entered to unlock your TV set, all
currently set parental locks will be disabled temporarily. Besides of the
general locks described in this chapter, this is also valid for parental
lock of DR+ archive entries. Parental locks will only be re-enabled when
the TV set is switched off.
98
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
Energy efficiency
Quick start mode
Determine how energy efficient your TV set shall be. The value for
the contrast (and thus the brightness of the background lighting) is
adapted and the automatic dimmer activated or deactivated depending on the presetting.
If you enable the Quick Start Mode and you switch on the TV set from
standby, the TV picture can be immediately seen without delay. You
can specify the times at which your device will be in the Quick Start
Mode.
Please note that in this case you will have a higher energy consumption.
Call Energy efficiency
Default setting for the Quick Start Mode: off
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Call Quick start mode
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Energy efficiency,
go to next column.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
...
Energy efficiency
Home Mode
Premium
Mode
The priority here is low energy consumption in home use. In this
case, the TV switches off automatically for the sake of saving
energy, after it has been out of operation for four hours.
Shop Mode
Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of the setting options in the energy efficiency
menu:
Mark Quick start mode,
go to next column.
Quick start mode
...
Quick start
mode
Back
Here you can specify the times at which your device
should be in quick start mode.
6 am - 9 am
on
off
11 am - 3 pm
on
off
6 pm - 9 pm
on
off
If you choose quick start here, you will see the TV screen immediately and without delay after switching on the TV set
from standby. Note the higher energy consumption in this case.
Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Choosing Home Mode activates automatic shutdown. For Premium
Mode or Shop Mode, automatic shutdown is initially deactivated.
Home Mode The emphasis for home use is on low energy consumption. The automatic dimmer is activated.
Premium This mode optimises the settings to a brighter
Mode environment at a higher energy consumption. The
automatic dimmer is activated.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be
confirmed afterwards once again.
Shop Mode The picture settings are aligned to operation in the
presentation room. The automatic dimmer is deactivated. If the ambient brightness diminishes, the
energy consumption is not reduced.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be
confirmed afterwards once again.
99
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
Software update
USB stick - requirements
It is possible to update the software on your Loewe TV set.
USB sticks tested by Loewe and compatible in type and format can
be ordered from the Loewe dealer using the article no. 90456.900.
In the software update (package update) all the software releases in
the TV are scanned and updated as required.
Updating the software is not possible as long as a programmed
timer recording is active.
When a software update occurs it may happen that timer entries and
memorised programmes are deleted. After such a software update,
check your timer list (see chapter Extras, section Timer – Timer
list).
Here you can download a new piece of software from different sources
(if existing):
Current software versions can be downloaded from the Loewe Internet
site (see below) and installed on your TV set using a USB stick.
Please be aware of the requirements of your USB stick in section
Technical data – Media.
If your TV set is connected to the Internet, the TV set can be updated
directly via the Internet.
Software download from the Loewe Internet site for update
via USB
Where available, you can download new software for your TV set from
our homepage.
Visit our homepage under:
http://support.loewe.tv
(International),
http://support.loewe.tv/uk (United Kingdom and Republic of
Ireland),
http://support.loewe.tv/au (Australia) or
http://support.loewe.tv/nz (New Zealand).
(using the Register free-of-charge option).
Simply follow the steps in the registration process.
After the successful registration process and subsequent login to the
support homepage you have to register your TV set (have the article
number and serial number ready – both of these are on a label stuck
to the back of the set or can be looked up under Extras – Specialfunctions – Integrated features.
Then you will get a list of downloadable contents for your TV set including the software. Download the data and unpack all the files in this ZIP
archive into the main directory of your USB stick.
Then carry out the software update as described below.
100
If you would like to use your own USB stick, please follow these tips/
conditions:
• Formatting in FAT32.
• Just one partition.
• Do not use encrypted USB sticks.
• Do not use USB sticks that simulate a CD ROM drive.
• There may be no hidden files on the device.
• For some types of device, the construction of the USB stick is significant.
Maximum dimensions in mm: 70x20x10.
• If in doubt, the USB stick should be formatted as “FAT32” without
“extended attributes”.
In order to avoid problems during the software update of the tv set
the USB stick in use should meet the requirements.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
Software update via USB storage device
To do this, plug the USB stick with the downloaded software into a
free USB port of the TV set.
New software package found
New software
...
Via USB
A new software version was found.
New software: V2.3.14.0 (Current software: V.2.1.25.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the
close with the
button.
Calling Software update
button. Otherwise
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
HOME: Call Home view.
Proceed with
End with
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark Software,
go to next column.
Mark Software update,
go to next column.
Mark Via USB,
call Software update.
The version of the software package that is
currently installed will be displayed.
Proceed starts loading of the new software.
Or:
BACK: End of wizard.
The update will then not be carried out.
Load new software package
Updating software
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Current software
...
Via USB
Current software: 2.1.25.0
To load a new piece of software, you first need to search for said software on a
USB storage device that is connected (e.g. USB stick). Press the
key to start
the search.
Proceed with
...
Via USB
The "V2.3.14.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...
60%
Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Cancel with
Proceed.
The TV set searches for a new software package
on the USB stick.
If a new software version is available after the search,
an on-screen message appears (see right hand
column).
If several different software packages are found on the
USB stick, the latest software package is always used.
The software is loaded in several steps. The total loading
and programming process can take up to approx. 50
minutes in total.
Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains
switch during the entire loading and programming
process.
You will be informed at the end of the update.
To make your TV set completely ready for use again,
please turn it off and on again at the mains.
If no new software package was found in the search:
BACK:End of wizard.
101
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
New software package found
Manual update via the Internet
If an Internet connection is available, new software can be downloaded
directly and installed onto the TV set.
New software
...
Start update
A new software version was found.
New software: V2.3.14.0 (Current software: V.2.1.25.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the
close with the
button.
Calling Software update
button. Otherwise
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
HOME: Call Home view.
Proceed with
End with
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark Software,
go to next column.
Proceed starts loading of the new software.
Mark Software update,
go to next column.
Or:
Mark Via Internet,
go to next column.
You will see a message on the screen regarding
data protection.
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Data protection
...
Start update
In accordance with the local laws and regulations, we point out that machine
numbers and the installation site of your TV set , as well as the current updates
and the current software status in each case, are processed and saved by a
computer system if you use the
button to confirm. The data guarantee that
we are always able to provide you with optimal service. All data are handled
in confidence.
If you do not wish this to be the case, please press the
Proceed with
button.
BACK: End of wizard.
The update will then not be carried out.
Load new software package
Only the parts of the software package that are not up
to date will be automatically downloaded from the
Internet and updated.
Each part of the software is downloaded individually
from the Internet and is then programmed.
End with
The total time required for all the software parts to be
downloaded from the Internet is dependent on the
speed of data transfer that is being used.
If you are not in agreement with the relevant data being
passed on:
BACK: Exit the update process.
The update will then not be carried out.
The total programming process can take up to 50
minutes in total.
Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains
switch during the entire loading and programming
process.
Updating software
...
Start update
The "V2.3.14.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...
60%
Otherwise: Confirm data protection message by pressing .
Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
The version of the software package that is currently
installed will be displayed.
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Current software
...
Start update
Current software: 2.1.0.0
To load a new piece of software, you first need to search for said software on the
update server. Press the
key to start the search.
Back with
Proceed with
You will be informed once the loading and programming
process is complete.
To make your TV set completely ready for use again,
please turn it off and on again at the mains.
Proceed.
The TV set connects to the Internet and scans
the update server for new software.
If a new software version is available after the search, an
on-screen message appears (see right hand column).
If no new software package was found in the search:
BACK: End of wizard.
102
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
Load new software package
Software update via Antenna
A software update via antenna is only available for stations of the
Freeview DVB-T platform in the UK and Ireland.
Updating software
...
Via antenna
The "V2.3.14.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...
60%
Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Calling Software update
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark Software,
go to next column.
The software is downloaded in several steps. The total
downloading and programming process can take up to
approx. 50 minutes in total.
Mark Software update,
go to next column.
Mark Via Antenna,
call Software update.
You will see a message on the screen regarding
data protection.
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Current software
...
Via antenna
Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains
switch during the entire loading and programming
process.
You will be informed at the end of the update.
To make your TV set completely ready for use again,
please turn it off and on again with the mains switch.
Current software: 2.1.25.0
To load a new piece of software, you first need to search for said software on a
USB storage device that is connected (e.g. USB stick). Press the
key to start
the search.
Proceed with
Cancel with
Proceed.
The TV set searches for a new software package.
If a new software version is available after the search, an
on-screen message appears (see right hand column).
If no new software package was found in the search:
BACK: End of wizard.
New software package found
New software
...
Via antenna
A new software version was found.
New software: V2.3.14.0 (Current software: V.2.1.25.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the
close with the
button.
button. Otherwise
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
Proceed with
End with
Proceed starts loading of the new software.
Or:
BACK: End of wizard.
The update will then not be carried out.
103
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
Automatic update via the internet
At the end of the initial installation, Information on new software
updates was selected.
This item cannot be called up via the menu, but appears automatically when a new version is found in the search for software.
New software package found
If the TV set has found a new software version during the check, you
will be informed about this via a screen message.
Select the desired procedure.
New software
A new software version was found.
New software: V2.1.27.0 (Freeman Boot FRC FRCW1 STB WLAN FEA)
(Current software V2.1.25.0)
Please specify how you would like to continue:
Load the software now
Load software when switching off to standby
Load software later (max. 3 times notification)
Do not load this software version
Load the After confirmation, the new TV software will be
software loaded from the internet and then programmed.
now
Load the
software
when
switch off to
standby
The software will be loaded and programmed after
the TV set has been switched off into standby mode
for the next time. The display on the control panel
will light up blue during the update.
The TV set must not be switched off at the mains
before the downloading process is complete (control
panel display lights up white)!
Load the
software
later (at
most
three-fold
notification)
Loading the software will be postponed to a later date.
The new software message will be displayed the next
time the TV set is switched on.
If the loading process is postponed three times then
the message will only be shown again once the next
software version is available.
Do not The new software will not be loaded. The on-screen
load this message will only be shown again for the next softsoftware ware version.
version
Confirm selection.
104
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
On-screen displays
Time and date
You can select different settings in this menu which affect the onscreen displays.
Time and date are automatically detected and set via the DVB programme provider (e.g. Astra, UPC) or, during an Internet connection,
via Internet time services.
Call On-screen displays
If a definite time has been detected by the TV set (depending on
the programme provider), time and date cannot be changed.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Call Time and date
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark On-screen displays,
go to next column.
On-screen displays
...
On-screen
displays
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Back
Display time
<
Volume display
off
7s
Mark Time and date,
go to next column.
>
on
Automatic menu info
off
on
Key explanation
off
on
Permanent clock display
off
on
Automatic HDMI hint
off
on
Time and date
...
Time and
date
Time
Back
12:05:58
Deviation from Universal Time
<
Date
22.08.2012
+2:00 hour(s)
Summer/winter
off
Beginning of daylight-saving time
.03.
25.03.
End of daylight-saving time
28.10.
>
on
If you select "on" here, the informational text belonging to each selected menu item will always appear
simultaneously.
Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
The time and date are normally obtained automatically from the TV. If, as an exception, these data are not present or incorrect,
please enter the time (00:00 to 23:59) and the date (day.month.year) here using the remote control.
Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the On-screen
displays menu:
Display time Here you set the duration of the display, e.g. for
the volume or the station display when changing
stations.
The duration can be set between 2 and 9 seconds.
Volume Here you set whether a volume change is also to be
display indicated visibly on the screen.
Automatic Herewith you activate/deactivate the info text dismenu info plays for the currently selected menu item.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Time and date menu:
If a definite time has been identified by the TV set (dependent on
the channel), certain menu items may not be available.
Time Enter the time (00:00 to 23:59) with the numeric
buttons of the remote control.
Deviation
from
Universal
Time
The current time at the Greenwich Meridian 0 is to be
understood as world time. The time shift in relation
to this time must be given in hours (–11 to +13) (with
the keys or the numerical keys of the remote
control). Summer time is ignored.
Key By default, the window will appear with key explanaexplanation tions along with the status bar. Here, you can disable
this automatic display.
Date Enter the date (day.month.year) with the numeric
buttons on the remote control.
Permanent The time display can be permanently shown. It is
clock display always visible as long as no other display is made.
Summer/ If the summer time in your country is changed to
winter Daylight-saving time, select yes please.
Automatic If yes is set here, a message about the adapted
HDMI hint function of the remote control is shown whenever you
switch over to an HDMI channel position to which a
Digital Link HD capable TV set is connected.
Beginning of Enter the date on which the time is switched over to
daylight- summer time if it deviates from the automatically
saving time calculated date. This menu item appears only if yes
was selected for Daylight-saving time.
End Enter the date on which the summer time ends if
of daylight- it deviates from the automatically calculated date.
saving time This menu item appears only if yes was selected for
Daylight-saving time.
105
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
DVB settings
PIP
You can make general pre-settings for DVB stations.
Adjust size of the PIP image
HOME: Call Home view.
Calling DVB settings
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark PIP,
go to next column.
Mark DVB settings,
go to next column.
PIP
...
DVB settings
...
DVB settings
Subtitle mode
PIP
Size
Back
Small
Large
Back
Off
normal
For hearing-impaired persons
DVB character set
Western European
Audio commentary
off
Standard
Polish
Greek
Turkish
on
Here you may select the size of your Picture-in-Picture fade-in.
Here you can preset whether a subtitle is always to be displayed as soon as it is offered by the station. A special subtitle
for impaired hearing can also be selected.
Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanation of the DVB setting options:
Subtitle Here you can preset whether a subtitle is always to be
mode displayed as soon as it is offered by the station. A special subtitle for impaired hearing can also be selected.
Subtitles are not offered by all stations. Many stations
only broadcast subtitles by teletext.
DVB Select the DVB character set so that the title of the
character broadcast of your favourite received station or the
set texts of your CA module are displayed correctly.
Audio You can preset the system here to always play a
commentary special soundtrack for the visually impaired whenever one is available. This soundtrack uses an audio
commentary to describe the action taking place
on-screen.
106
Explanations of setting possibilities in the PIP Settings menu:
Size You can choose if your second picture faded in
(picture in picture) shall be displayed small or large.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
DR+
Call DR+ streaming settings
You can adapt the Digital Recorder to your requirements.
Call settings for the digital recorder
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
The DR+ settings are called (see left column).
Mark DR+ Streaming,
go to next column.
...
DR+
Streaming
Share DR+ ar-
If you select "yes" here, you will make the DR+ archive of
your TV set available to any other TV sets and UPnP clients
equipped with this feature. They will then be able to access
the archive over your home network.
Notify startDR+ device
name
DR+ device
group name
IP port
number
DR+ standby
Mark DR+,
go to next column.
...
DR+
Notify hidden sections
Jump distance
If a fade-out has already been executed in an existing
recording and you put "yes" here, after this point has been
passed you are informed during playback that the faded-out
area has just been skipped. "no" aborts this message.
Smart Jump
Recording
subtitles
DR+
Streaming
Mark desired setting,
go to next column.
Make settings,
OK confirm setting.
Explanation of the DR+ setting options
Notify If an entry has been hidden in an archive recording,
hidden you can get informed by a screen message when
sections skipping a hidden area.
Factory setting: yes.
Jump Set the standard jump distance (in minutes) used
distance for jumping forwards or backwards in the movie by
briefly pressing the or keys.
Factory setting: 02 min.
Smart jump Activate or deactivate Smart jump function.
Factory setting: on.
Serial A broadcast programmed with the recording type
recording series is recorded only if it begins within the programtolerance med start time ± series recording tolerance. Use the
numeric button on the remote control to enter the
time (always two-digit for 01 to 60 min.).
Factory setting: ± 30 min.
Mark desired setting,
go to next column.
Make settings,
OK confirm setting.
Explanation of the setting options for DR+ streaming
Share DR+ Specify here whether recorded broadcasts within
archive with your TV set’s DR+ archive are to be accessible for
other devices viewing from other TV sets (server function).
Enabled programmes can also be played on other
UPnP-AV clients in the same network.
Also use Setting yes enables you, via the archive, to also view
other recordings from other TV sets that have accessible
archives. movies within the home network (client function).
Notify Your TV set can issue a message if a follow-me restarted cording has been started on another TV set, which
„Follow me“ you can view on this TV set..
recording
DR+ Give your TV set a unique name for quick identificadevice name tion in DR+ Streaming.
DR+ device Give a name for your TV set group.
group name Using different group names enables you to group
your TV sets as required. Only TV sets under the
same group name can exchange data.
IP port IP port numbers are preset ex-factory. Under normal
number circumstances they do not require amending.
DR+ Set here how long your TV set is to continue to give
standby access to movies after it has been switched off.
This stand-by period is also activated as soon as data
exchange to another TV set has been completed.
Recording Select here whether subtitles are to be recorded for
subtitles DVB stations.
Factory setting: no (1.
DR+ For setting options see right hand column.
Streaming
(1
for devices in DK, FIN, N or S: yes.
107
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
Standard Teletext
In the Standard Teletext menu you can configure the Teletext.
Call Teletext settings
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark Standard Teletext,
go to next column.
...
Standard Teletext
Special pages
The programme preview pages and the page for the programme subtitles are
specified here.
Character set
Explanations of the Standard Teletext menu functions:
Character set Teletext character set can be switched to other languages (Russian, Greek, Polish and Turkish).
108
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
Start behaviour of HbbTV-stations
HbbTV
p
HbbTV mode on/off
When the HbbTV mode is active (factory setting), additional services
and further information (e.g., also from the Internet) can be viewed if
these are offered by the current station.
on has been selected (see left column), you can
If HbbTV mode
specify if an available HbbTV application should be loaded automatically after the channel has been changed or if this should only occur
manually after the red key has been pressed once. After loading the
HbbTV application, an on screen instruction is displayed depending
on the programme provider.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark HbbTV,
go to next column
Mark HbbTV mode,
call.
...
HbbTV
mode
on
When the HbbTV mode (Hybrid broadcast broadband TV
mode) ist actvie, additional services and further information
(e.g. from the Internet) can be viewed if these offered by
the current station.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark HbbTV,
go to next column
Mark Start behaviour of HbbTV,
call.
Start behaviour of HbbTV stations
...
Back
1 Das Erste HD
12 3sat HD
100 Das Erste HD
2 ZDF HD
13 N24 HD
101 NDR FS NDS
3 RTL HD
14 PHOENIX HD
102 NDR FS SH H
4 SAT.1 HD
15 n-tv
103 NDR FS MV H
5 ProSieben HD
16 TELE 5 HD
104 NDR FS HH H
6 VOX HD
17 SPORT1 HD
105 WDR HD Köl
7 kabel eins HD
18 arte HD
106 WDR HD Aac
8 RTL2 HD
19 DMAX HD
107 WDR HD Biel
9 SUPER RTL HD
20 Eurosport
108 WDR HD Dor
10 KiKa HD
21 VIVA
109 WDR HD Düs
11 NICK/CC HD
22 DAS VIERTE
Start all automatically
Start all manually
<
ASTRA 19,2°E
110 WDR HD Esse
>
Change between automatic ( ) and manual (?) start of HbbTV with OK .
Select the desired setting,
confirm with OK.
Mark station,
OK switch between manual (?) and automatic ( )
start of the HbbTV application of the marked
station.
Or:
Mark Start all automatically,
OK start HbbTV application on all stations automatically.
Or:
Mark Start all manually,
OK start HbbTV application on all stations manually.
Using the on-screen buttons in the bottom line you
can display stations from specific (e.g., personal)
lists.
109
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
Feature of the TEXT key
CA module(s)
With the setting Standard Teletext first (factory setting), the
standard Teletext is opened when the TEXT key is pressed for the
first time. Pressing the TEXT key for a second time will then display
the MediaText. Pressing the TEXT key for a third time will bring you
back to the TV picture. If MediaText first is selected, the TEXT key
will do the exact opposite.
Depending on the programme provider, the direct Call of MediaText
may not be possible. MediaText must then be opened by means of
the HbbTV application.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
This menu is only available when at least one CA module is plugged
in.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark CA module(s),
go to next column.
Station mapping
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
If two CA modules are both used for the decoding of stations, you
decide here which station shall be decoded by which CA module.
Mark HbbTV,
go to next column
The station mapping settings will only be taken into account, if two
CA modules are inserted.
Mark Function of the TEXT key,
call.
This statement refers explicitly to the CI slots of the TV set and not
to the modules plugged into it! When the modules are exchanged,
the mapping must be repeated.
...
Function of
the TEXT key
Standard
teletext first
If MediaText is available for the selected channel and the
"Standard teletext first“ option is highlighted, standard
teletext will be opened the first time you press the
button. Pressing the button for a second time will then display
the MediaText. Pressing the button
for a third time will
bring you back to the TV picture. If „MediaText first“ is
selected, then the button does the exact opposite (i.e. displays
MediaText first and standard teletext upon pressing the
button for a second time).
Mark Station mapping,
call station list.
Select CA module for mapping.
Mark the station,
OK map station to the selected CA module / cancel
mapping.
The icon
Select Standard Teletext first or MediaText
first.
indicates mapped stations.
Saving the PIN for recordings
This menu item is only available if a CI Plus CA module is inserted
into one of the two CI slots of the TV set that supports the recording
of broadcasts with parental lock.
Store the programme provider PIN belonging to your CA module in
order to decode CI plus programmes with parental lock for recording.
mark Saving the PIN for recordings,
call PIN entry box.
Mark the desired CA module in the
headline.
Go to the PIN entry box, enter the programme
provider PIN using the numerical keys.
Or:
Mark figure,
OK adopt figure to input line.
Conclude the entry:
Mark Adopt,
OK save PIN.
110
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
Rotate TV
Specifying the switch-off position
Here you can set the range of rotation for the motorized stand and
define the switch-off position of your TV set.
This is where you specify the position that the TV will take when it is
switched off. In order for the TV set to return to the determined switchoff
position when switching it off, this must be activated (see below).
Menu item Rotate TV appears only if you have an installation with
motorized stand.
HOME: Call Home view.
Setting the range of rotation (rotation wizard)
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
By means of the rotation wizard you can define the rotation range of the
TV set (maximum +/- 40 degrees) by setting the maximum right and
left stop position.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Rotate TV,
go to next column.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Select Set switch-off position,
call Set switch-off position.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
ROTATION WIZARD - start information
...
Mark Rotate TV,
go to next column.
Here you specify your TV's position which is adopted when switching off and
into standby mode. When you continue with
, your TV set firstly rotates to
the currently set switch-off position (provided that it has been specified).
+18°
-40°
Select Basic adjustments,
call Basic adjustment.
Proceed with
+40°
Cancel with
Rotation Wizard - Maximum right rotation Position
...
Basic adjustment
Turn your TV to the RIGHT as far as the installation location allows.
This is the maximum right turning position in future.
+31° +40°
-40°
Proceed with
Cancel with
C
all dialogue for setting the new switch-off position.
Set desired switch-off position.
The switch off position can only be defined within
the set rotation range (see left column).
Basic adjustments (to the right)
Rotate your TV set to the right as far as the
installation site allows.
This will be the maximum right rotation position
in future.
proceed.
End of wizard.
Activating the switch-off position
If the TV set is switched off with the on/off key on the remote control
or at the control panel then it will turn to the defined switch-off position. When it is switched back on, it returns to the position last set.
Rotation Wizard - Maximum left rotation Position
...
Basic adjustment
Turn your TV to the LEFT as far as the installation location allows. This is the
maximum left turning position in future.
+40°
-40° -32°
Cancel with
Finish wizard with
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark Rotate TV,
go to next column.
Basic adjustments (to the left)
Turn your TV set to the left as far as
the
installation site of your set allows.
This will be the maximum left rotation position in
future.
Select Activate switch-off position,
go to the next menu line below.
Select yes,
OK adopt.
End of wizard.
111
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
Record
WEB key function
You can set a pre-record and post-record time for timer recordings
made without auto time control. This minimizes the risk that a part
of the broadcast is not recorded due to the broadcast starting earlier
and/or finishing later.
You can assign the Web key on the remote control unit a particular
function.
The selected function will then be called directly when the key is
pressed.
Call Recording settings
Call WEB key settings
Default setting: MediaNet
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark Recording,
go to next column.
Recording
...
Recording
Back
Pre-record time
0 min 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min
Post-record-time
0 min 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min
Mark
key function,
go to next column.
...
You can assign the WEB button another function here. The
selected function is then accessed directly when the button
is pressed.
WEB
key
function
Sound/picture music
Sound
mode
Picture format
Headphone
volume
3D
Here you can enter a time span specifiying how long before the scheduled time your programmed recording should
start so that programmes which begin too early are recorded in full.
Internet radio
Photo
Select Pre-record time or post-record time.
Mark the desired duration of the pre-record
time or of the post-record time.
Factory setting: pre-record time: 1 min,
post-record time: 5 min.
112
Video
Select function.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Control
Hard disks
Formatting the hard disk
Checking the hard disk
If problems were detected when the hard disk was being tested (see
left column), re-formatting may be able to remedy the problem.
Additionally, you can re-format the hard disk in order to quickly and
easily delete all the data stored on it.
You should launch a check of the integrated hard disk once a year or
if problems arise when starting recordings (e.g. when transferring to
time-shift playback).
Call hard disk settings
Warning!
Formatting the hard disk will erase all data stored on it!
HOME: Call Home view.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark Hard disks,
go to next column.
Mark Hard disks,
go to next column.
Mark Format integrated one or Format external one,
confirm.
Mark Check integrated one,
confirm.
A warning note will be displayed.
A warning note will be displayed.
Check integrated one
...
Hard disks
Check integrated one
You should launch a check of the integrated
hard disk once a year or if problems arise
when starting recordings (e.g. when transferring
to time-shift playback).
Format
external one
Attention
Checking the hard drive
can take up to 20
minutes. To start the
process, hold down the
OK button for at least
three seconds.
OKPress at least for three seconds to start the
checking.
Or:
BACK: Cancel procedure.
Checking the hard disk (check disk) may take up to
20 min. Never ever switch off the TV set during a
check disk process.
After the check, a message will appear on the screen
showing the results of the check and tips on how to
resolve any problems that are present, should there
be any.
After checking of the hard disk the TV set must be
switched off and on again.
...
Hard disks
Format
external one
If problems should occur when operating the
integrated hard drive, it may be possible to
eliminate these by formatting the hard drive.
However, please note that all of the data on the
storage medium will be deleted in the process.
This also affects the station logos that are stored
on the hard drive. If the TV is not connected to
the Internet, station logos will no longer be
available to you in the future.
CAUTION
do you really want to
format the integrated
hard drive?
Formatting deletes all the
data on the hard
drive.
To start formatting, hold
down the OK button for
at least three seconds.
OKPress at least for three seconds to start formatting.
Or:
BACK: Cancel procedure
Never ever switch off the TV set during a formatting
process.
After the formatting, a message will appear on the
screen showing the results of the formatting and tips
on how to resolve any problems that exist, should there
be any.
After the formatting the TV set must be switched
off and on again.
Note on formatting external USB disks:
The TV set supports the two hard disk file systems FAT 32 and NTFS.
External hard disks are formatted by the TV in the FAT32 file system
to full capacity.
With FAT32, the maximum size of a file is 4 GB.
For a parallel use of TV and PC, we recommend that you reformat
the hard disk on a PC to NTFS.
113
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Network
Network settings
Under Network settings you make settings to your network adaptors
and the various types of media.
Call network settings
The Network wizard will be started. You see the current network status.
Change network settings.
Network selection
HOME: Call Home view.
Select network mode
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Multimedia / Network,
go to next column.
Mark Network settings,
go to next column.
...
Networking
Please select the desired network mode from the list or switch it off completely.
.
Note:
The "bridge function" allows additional network-compatible devices (e.g. LOEWE Blu-ray
Player) to be connected to the TV's network socket without their own network access, in
order to also use the TV's wireless network connection.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
button.
off
On, wired only
On, wireless only
On, wireless + bridge function
...
Network
settings
Networking
The following antenna wizard guides you through all the
necessary settings relevant to your network.
Back with
Host name
Proxy server
Select network access.
Wake on
LAN/WiFi
Explanations of the setting options:
Off deactivates all existing network adaptors of your
TV set.
Select desired menu item,
go to next column.
Explanations of the setting options in the network menu:
Networking Here, the network wizard starts that guides you
through all necessary settings to your network (see
right hand column).
Reset to Here, all network settings are reset to factory defactory faults.
settings
Host name Give your TV set a name so that it can be uniquely
identified in the network.
Proxy server Do the settings for using a proxy server. The proxy
server wizard will be called.
Wake on If you allow Switch on via LAN/WLAN, the TV set can
LAN/WiFi be switched on via the network when it is in standby.
Thus, energy consumption of the TV set will increase when it is in standby mode!
114
On, Access to the network only via a network cable. The
wired only wireless access is deactivated.
The network wizard will be opened.
On, Access to the network only via WLAN. The access
wireless only via a network cable is deactivated.
The network wizard will be opened.
On, wireless Both network adaptors are activated. Wireless Inter+ bridge net access is possible (WLAN).
function Internet-enabled devices connected to the network
socket (LAN) (e.g., Loewe MediaCenter, Loewe
BluTechVision 3D) can use the wireless connection
of the TV set to access the Internet via the WLAN
bridge function.
The network wizard will be opened.
Under no circumstances may the TV set be
wired and at the same time connected by a
wireless connection to the same network, e.g.
router. This may cause severe operational faults!
OK proceed.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Configuration of the built-in LAN adaptor
Configuration of the built-in WLAN bridge adaptor
The network wizard was called via the network access setting On, wired only.
The network wizard was called via the network
access setting On, wireless only or Wireless +
bridge function.
IP configuration
Search for Access points
Select type of IP configuration.
The TV set now searches for wireless routers.
BACK: Stop search.
automatic: Automatic configuration of the IP
address via DHCP server or via multiple
protocols according to UPnP specification (including DHCP).
Access point selection
After the end of the search:
OK proceed to network status (see below).
manual:
Enter your fixed static IP addresses
manually (see below).
OK proceed to Manual IP configuration.
Select required access point from the options
found.
OK Proceed to entry of WLAN password.
No access point found
If the desired access point is not found:
Manual IP configuration
If manual has been selected under IP configuration:
Enter IP, Subnet mask, Gateway and DNS server
addresses in succession with the numerical keys
on the remote control.
Manual IP configuration
...
Netzworking
Mark Search again,
OK repeat search for wireless routers.
Or:
Mark Enter access point manually,
OK enter manually the SSID of the desired access
point, e.g., when the SSID of the access point is
not transferred.
Please specify the static IP address of the network adapter.
.
IP address
192.168.000.123
Subnet mask
255.255.255.000
Gateway
192.168.000.100
DNS server 1
192.168.000.010
DNS server 2
192.168.001.010
Back with
Proceed with
OK Proceed to entry of WLAN password.
WLAN password (WPA password / WEP password / WEP index)
If your wireless network is not encrypted: Proceed to
IP configuration.
Enter WLAN password.
In case of an unknown WLAN key, contact your
network administrator.
For encryption types supported, see chapter Technical data, section Media.
proceed to network status.
Network status
You see the current network status again.
For WEP encryption
Select the WEP index,
OK proceed to IP configuration.
BACK: End of wizard.
IP configuration
Select type of IP configuration.
For the further workflow of the network wizard
see left column under IP configuration.
Network status
At the end of the network wizard you see your current
network status again.
BACK: End of wizard.
115
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Explanation of the adaptor settings:
Network shows the current type of connection (wireless or
wired).
IP The current assignment method for the IP address
configuration of your TV set (automatic or manual).
IP address Your current IP address.
Subnet mask Your current subnet-mask IP address.
Proxy server settings
In the proxy server wizard your TV set establishes the
link with a home network with proxy server.
A proxy server is not necessary for most home
networks.
Contact your home network administrator if you are
unclear about the proxy server settings.
Use proxy server
Specify if a Proxy server is used in your home network.
Gateway The IP address of your gateway.
DNS server 1 Your current first DNS server IP address.
Mark Use or Don’t use,
OK confirm selection.
The following settings will only be requested after the
selection of Use.
DNS server 2 Your current second DNS server IP address.
Proxy server name
Network (for wireless connection only)
SSID The name of your network.
MAC address (for wired connection only)
(TV) Indicates the MAC address that is built into the hardware of your TV set’s wired network adaptor (LAN).
MAC address (for wireless connection only)
(WLAN) Indicates the MAC address that is built into the
hardware of your TV set’s wireless network adaptor
(WLAN).
Connection Gives you information about the current status of
status your wireless connection (save settings, connecting,
login failed, access point not found, not connected,
connection established).
Link Specifies the signal strength as a percentage.
quality
Specify the name or IP address of the proxy server
used.
Proxy port number
Specify the network port number of the proxy server.
Proxy server login
Specify whether your proxy server requires a special
login.
Mark No login or Login necessary,
OK Confirm selection.
User name and password
User name and password are only requested after
the selection of Login necessary.
Enter your login data for the proxy server.
116
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Multimedia settings
Renderer
Under this menu item you find further settings for Audio, Video and
Photo.
Here you can allow external devices to access your TV set (renderer)
via app to render (play back) contents there.
Calling the Multimedia settings menu
Call up renderer menu
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Multimedia / Network,
go to next column.
Mark Multimedia settings,
go to next column.
...
Multimedia
settings
Default setting: on
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Multimedia / Network,
go to next column.
Mark Renderer,
go to next column.
When navigating through the files if you pause in this view
you can input whether and when the view should
automatically return to the player.
...
Renderer
on
You can allow external devices here and access your TV
(renderer) via an app to play content there.
off
Select desired settings.
Select the setting on or off.
Explanations of the setting options in the Multimedia settings
menu:
Auto return The music player will reappear whenever another
to music dialogue, e.g., music selection is called during playplayer back, and no keys are pressed for the set time period.
You can specify if and after which time the music
player reappears (selection options are No, After
1 min, After 5 min).
117
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Connections
Connections
Settings for the connection of external appliances are made in this
menu.
The menu item Connections is not available while a timer recording is active.
Calling the connections menu
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Connections,
go to next column.
Connections
Sound components
A wizard guides you step by step through the
configuration of your sound reproduction components.
Antenna
DVB
AV connecting settings
Digital Link
Gaming
mode
Select desired settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Connections menu:
Sound The sound components wizard helps you to conficomponents gure the components that are used to reproduce
the TV sound.
Antenna DVB Here you can set the parameters of the DVB-T and
the DVB-S antenna with the antenna wizard.
AV In the AV connecting settings the parameters for
connecting the AV and AVS connection sockets can be adapted.
settings
Digital Link All settings for Digital Link are made here.
Assign digital You can assign the digital audio input socket (SPDIF
audio input IN) to an AV input (AV, HDMI, AVS, etc.) here.
Gaming Here you can set a faster display of your activities on
mode the screen for various inputs of the TV set, e.g., for
games consoles.
118
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Connections
Sound playback via ...
Sound components
The sound components wizard helps you to configure the components
that are used to reproduce the TV sound. For sound reproduction, you
can configure the TV loudspeakers, active loudspeakers, loudspeaker
systems, Loewe Individual Sound Projector ID as well as analogue and
digital HiFi/AV amplifiers.
Your TV set is equipped with an integrated digital multi-channel audio
decoder. Sound signals with up to six channels (5.1 surround sound)
can be emitted through the DIGITAL AUDIO LINK interface, irrespective of whether the sound signal comes from an external device (DVD
player, Blu-ray player) or from a DVB station.
For sound formats supported by the digital audio decoder, see chapter
Technical data.
Calling the sound components wizard
For information on navigation within the wizard, see chapter General
information on menu operation.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Select Connections,
go to next column.
Select Sound components,
go to next column.
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD - Sound playback via ...
...
Sound components
Please specify here via which sound components you want to listen to your
TV sound. If you select a "Speaker system", this must be connected to the
DIGITAL AUDIO LINK socket on the back of the TV set (with an additional
adapter if necessary).
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK
button.
TV speakers
Speaker system
HiFi/AV amplifier
Soundprojector
If your TV set has no built-in speakers, the sections relating to TV
speakers may not be selected..
Some sound components can only be selected when the respective
device is connected to the TV set.
TV Sound reproduction via the built-in TV speakers
speakers (factory setting).
With the selection of TV speakers the wizard will end.
Speaker Sound reproduction via a loudspeaker system or
system active loudspeakers.
Connecting loudspeaker system:
see chapter External devices, section Connecting
the Loewe speaker system.
Connecting active loudspeakers:
see chapter External devices, section Connecting
active loudspeakers.
HiFi/AV Sound reproduction via an external analogue or
amplifier digital audio amplifier.
Connecting HiFi/AV amplifier:
see chapter External devices, section Connecting
the HiFi/AV amplifier.
Sound Sound reproduction via Loewe Individual Sound
projector Projector ID.
For further information, refer to the operating instructions of the sound projector.
HiFi/AV Sound reproduction optionally via an external
amplifier or analogue or digital audio amplifier or via the built-in
TV speakers TV loudspeakers.
(switchable)
The selection options for switching between
sound components can be called via the function
list under Sound settings.
HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)
Proceed with
End with
Select Sound component.
For selectable items see right hand column.
OK Confirm selection.
Sound Sound reproduction optionally via a sound projector
projector or or via the built-in TV loudspeakers.
TV speakers
The selection options for switching between
(switchable)
sound components can be called via the function
list under Sound settings.
Proceed to next step.
119
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Connections
Adjusting the speaker system
Select the start value of the frequency response of
the speakers for the correct setting (e.g., 50Hz for
t h e s p e c i f i c a t i o n “ Fre q u e n c y re s p o n s e
50-20,000Hz”). See the technical data of the speakers for the value.
Sound playback via ... – Speaker system
Enter here that you want to hear the TV sound over a speaker system. If
you connect active speakers, please use the setting Speaker system.
You can replace the external front speakers by the
TV speakers if necessary. In this case, TV speakers.
Then, the TV speakers transmit the sound of the
front speakers.
For information on navigation within the wizard see chapter General
information on menu operation.
When setting up the speaker system for the first time, the configuration starts with the step Connect front speakers.
Proceed to connect and set the surround speakers.
Speaker system was selected in the Sound components wizard.
Configuration/
modification
Speaker system
...
Sound components
Please specify whether you want to change the illustrated setting of your
speaker system or whether all existing settings are to be reset to the values
of the delivery state.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK
button.
Components
Distances
TV
100Hz
90Hz
4,0m
3,0m
100Hz
0dB
Please specify here whether you want to
connect external surround speakers. In this
case, their lower limit frequency must be
entered in Hz (see instruction manual and
technical data of the speakers).
100Hz
100Hz
100Hz
100Hz
100Hz
no
20 Hz
0dB
2,0m
yes
0dB
0dB
2,0m
Configuration/modification
Sound components
TV
0dB
4,0m
3,9m
100Hz
Connect surround speakers
...
Level
TV
100Hz
Connect
surround
speakers
100 Hz
200 Hz
0dB
Reset to factory settings
Back with
Proceed with
Back with
Configuration/
modification
If you want to set up or change a speaker system:
Select yes or no for the external surround speakers.
Select Configuration/modification.
If nothing has been set yet, the factory settings
or otherwise the last set values are displayed.
OK Confirm selection.
In case, external speakers were chosen as surround
speakers:
Select frequency bar
set the lower limit frequency of the surround
speakers in 10 Hz steps.
Configuration/modification of speaker system
...
Sound components
Please specify here whether you wish to fully set up a speaker system for
the first time or wish to completely modify an existing one or whether you
wish to restrict yourself to changing the speaker connections, changing
the distances of the speakers from the listening position or altering the
individual volume levels.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK
button.
Select the start value of the frequency response of
the speakers for the correct setting.
Proceed to connect and set the centre speaker.
Complete
Connections only
Connect
centre
speaker
Distances only
Levels only
Back with
End with
Connect centre speaker
...
Sound components
Please specify here whether you wish to use a
centre speaker. This function can be fulfilled by
the TV speakers, if they are not used as front
speakers, or by an external speaker. In the
latter case, its lower limit frequency must be
entered in Hz (see instruction manual and
technical data of the speakers).
no
Select Complete.
OK Confirm selection.
TV speakers
Back with
TV
100Hz
90Hz
100Hz
100Hz
100Hz
External speaker
Proceed with
Proceed to connect and set the front speakers.
Connect
front
speakers
Connect front speakers
...
Sound components
Please specify here whether you wish to use
the TV speakers or external front speakers as
front speakers. In the latter case, their lower
limit frequency must be entered in Hz (see
instruction manual and technical data of the
speakers).
100Hz
100Hz
100Hz
100Hz
100Hz
TV speakers External speakers
20 Hz
Back with
100 Hz
200 Hz
Proceed with
Select External speakers or TV speakers.
For External speaker go to the frequency bar
below and
set the lower limit frequency of the external
front speakers in steps of 10 Hz.
Select whether the TV speakers or an External
speaker is to reproduce the centre sound or no
if no centre speaker is connected.
If no centre speaker is connected, the front speakers
also transmit the centre sound parts additionally.
For External speaker go to the frequency bar
below and
set the Lower Limit Frequency of the external
front speakers in steps of 10 Hz.
Select the start value of the frequency response of
the speakers for the correct setting.
Proceed to connect the Subwoofer.
continued on the next page
120
p
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Connections
Connect
subwoofer
Adjust
speaker level
Connect subwoofer
...
Sound components
Please specify here whether you want to
additionally connect a subwoofer for very
good bass reproduction.
TV
100Hz
90Hz
100Hz
no
Adjust speaker level
...
100Hz
Sound components
100Hz
yes
Back with
You hear a sound from every speaker one after
another. But you can also select the speakers
manually with the menu control buttons
up/down. Set the volume for the respectively
active speaker shown in blue so that you get
approximately the same volume impression
from all the speakers.
-12 dB
0 dB
TV
4,0m
Proceed with
For balanced audio reproduction all speakers should
be set to the same volume level. A noise signal will
be reproduced automatically on each speaker in
succession. Adjust every speaker to equal perceived
volume from your listening position. The selected
speaker will be coloured blue.
Distance to left front speaker
Please enter the distance of the left front
speaker from your listening position here.
3,0m
4,0m
3,9m
2,0m
Back with
+12 dB
select speakers manually.
Proceed to Distance to left hand front speaker.
0.1 m
0dB
Proceed to next speaker or
If no subwoofer is connected, the front speakers
additionally transmit the sound parts intended for
the subwoofer as far as possible.
Sound components
0dB
0dB
Adjust the volume for the speaker.
Select yes or no for Subwoofer.
...
0dB
0dB
Proceed with
Back with
Distance to
left front
speaker
TV
0dB
4.0 m
2,0m
After adjustment of the last speaker.
10.0 m
Proceed to Subwoofer phase.
Proceed with
Subwoofer
phase
Subwoofer phase
...
Sound components
Here you can reverse the phase of your subwoofer. Test both values in
music reproduction and then select the one with which you get a better
bass reproduction.
0° 180°
Set the distance between the left front speaker
and your listening position in 10 cm steps.
Back with
Finish wizard with
Measure the distances from your listening position
to the front, surround, and centre speakers respectively. The digital audio decoder calculates delay
times from this for the loudspeaker signals, so that
these reach the listener simultaneously.
Proceed to the respective other speakers (right
front speaker, left surround speaker, right
surround speaker, centre speaker and subwoofer)
and also
The selected speaker will be coloured blue.
After setting the distance to the subwoofer.
Proceed to Adjust speaker level.
Switch a station or a DVD player playing music to music
playback.
Test both values (0º and 180º) and select the
one with which you get a clearer bass reproduction from your listening position.
Back: Finish wizard.
This ends the sound components wizard for connecting and setting up a speakers system.
121
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Connections
Setting the HiFi/AV amplifier
Sound
formats
Sound formats
...
Sound components
Sound playback via ... - HiFi/AV amplifier
Please specify, what kind of sound formats can be processed by your
HiFi/AV amplifier and mark them by the button OK .
Stereo (PCM)
dts
The sound components wizard permits configuration of different
audio amplifiers (stereo amplifiers, surround amplifiers, analogue or
digital) with different digital audio formats (Dolby Digital, dts, MPEG,
and stereo/PCM). See the user guide of the audio amplifier for more
information.
MPEG
Dolby Digital
Back with
Proceed with
For information on navigation within the wizard see
chapter General information on menu operation.
HOME: Call Home view.
Select sound formats which can be decoded with
the digital amplifier (see operating manual of the
used amplifier).
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
OK adopt sound formats.
Select Connections,
go to next column.
Select Sound components,
Call sound components wizard.
Sound
reproduction
via ...
Proceed to next step.
Amplifier
Type
Amplifier Type
...
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD - Sound playback via ...
...
Sound components
Sound components
Please specify which amplifier type is connected.
Surround amplifier
Please specify here via which sound components you want to listen to your
TV sound. If you select a "Speaker system", this must be connected to the
DIGITAL AUDIO LINK socket on the back of the TV set (with an additional
adapter if necessary).
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK
button.
Back with
Stereo amplifier
Proceed with
TV speakers
Speaker system
HiFi/AV amplifier
Soundprojector
HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)
Proceed with
End with
Please select the amplifier type which is connected (surround or stereo amplifier).
Mark HiFi/AV amplifier or HiFi/AV amplifier or
TV speakers (switchable),
OK Confirm selection.
HiFi/AV Select setting when an amplifier is connected and
amplifier the TV speakers are not used.
HiFi/AV
amplifier or
TV speakers
(switchable)
Select setting when an amplifier is connected and
the TV speakers are used. In the sound mode selection the audio reproduction can then be switched
between the amplifier and the TV speakers.
Proceed to next step.
TV
loudspeakers
as centre
speaker
TV loudspeakers as centre speaker
...
Sound components
Please specify whether you want to use your built-in TV speakers as active
centre speakers of your multi-channel speaker system. If so, connect the
centre output (pre-amplifier output, not speaker output) of the HiFi/AV
amplifier to the CENTER IN socket.
No
yes
Back with
Finish wizard with
Proceed to next step.
Type of sound
transmission
Type of sound transmission
...
Sound components
Please select whether the TV sound signal should be transmitted to the
HiFi/AV amplifier by a digital (via the SPDIF OUT) or analog (via the AUDIO
OUT) signal.
digital
Back with
analogue
Proceed with
If surround was selected for type of amplifier:
For every connected surround amplifier, select whether
the TV loudspeakers are to be used as centre speakers.
If yes, establish a connection between the centre
output of the amplifier and the CENTER IN socket of
the TV set via a cinch cable.
Attention: Do not use the centre speaker connection of the amplifier, use the centre pre-amp
output instead!
Select whether the sound is to be transmitted
digitally or analogue to the the amplifier (see right
hand column):
digital: Proceed to Sound formats.
analogue: proceed to Type of amplifier.
122
Back: Finish wizard.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Connections
Antenna DVB
AV connection settings
Here you can make settings for the DVB-T antenna and call the antenna
wizard for the DVB-S antenna.
In the AV connection settings menu the parameters for the AV connection socket can be adapted.
Call Antenna DVB
Calling the connections menu
HOME: Call Home view.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Connections,
go to next column.
Mark Connections,
go to next column.
Mark Antenna DVB,
go to next column.
Mark AV connecting settings,
go to next column.
...
Antenna DVB
Antenna
DVB-S
The following antenna wizard guides you through all the
necessary settings relevant to your antenna system.
Antenna
DVB-T
...
Please input whether a device is connected to the AV
socket and if so, which device.
AV connecting settings
Signal type
Allow switching voltage
Select the desired setting,
call.
Select the desired setting,
call.
Explanations of the setting options in the antenna DVB menu:
Antenna Here the antenna wizard starts guiding you through
DVB-S all the settings relevant to the DVB-S antenna. The
settings of the DVB-S antenna wizard are explained
in the procedure of initial installation.
Antenna Here you can set whether your DVB-T antenna needs
DVB-T a supply voltage.
Antennas with an integrated amplifier need a supply
voltage on the antenna line. In this case, select Supply voltage 5V and confirm with OK.
Otherwise, select No supply voltage and confirm
also with OK.
Positioning/aligning DVB-T antenna
If you are receiving one or more DVB-T stations with picture and sound
interference then you should change the installation location and
alignment of the antenna. Ask your dealer to tell you which channels
are used to broadcast the DVB-T stations in your region.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the AV connecting settings
menu:
Device at Indicate here whether a set and, if yes, which one is
connection connected to the AV socket.
AV
Signal type You set the signal type of the device connected to AV
or AVS here. Normally, you should leave the setting to
Automatic VHS/SVHS; otherwise select a suitable
signal type. You can find out more from your dealer.
Allow If this function is activated, the video and audio of an
switching external unit connected to the AV connector (not at
voltage AVS) will immediately be reproduced on all TV broadcast sites when playback is started up, provided that
the external unit supplies a switching voltage.
A DVB-T station is received and selected.
Calling manual search (see chapter System settings, section Stations
– Manual TV/Radio scan).
Due to the preset stations, the signal source is already selected as
DVB-T. Position and align the antenna so that maximum C/N values
and levels are reached.
Search for DVB-T stations one after the other and compare values for
C/N and Level. Then position/align the antenna to the weakest station
so that maximum values for C/N and Level are obtained. The value
for BER should be as low as possible.
Thereafter, perform an automatic search for all DVB-T stations.
123
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Connections
Digital Link
Gaming mode
In the digital link menu you make further setting for comfortably linking
external devices to the TV set.
For the inputs of your TV set on which game consoles, PC applications
or even Karaoke machines are operated, we recommend you to activate the Gaming mode. Your activities are then displayed quicker on
the screen by reducing the complex picture improving techniques.
This mode can be set separately for every input of your TV set.
Call Digital Recorder Link menu
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Connections,
go to next column.
Mark Digital Link,
OK call Digital Link.
...
Digital Link
Digital Link
Remote
Thus you can permit (on) or prohibit (off) automatic
communication between the TV set and external devices
connected to it (e.g. BluRay player) via the HDMI cable. One
of its functions is to switch these devices on and off
alternately.
Call Gaming mode menu
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Connections,
go to next column.
Select Gaming mode,
OK call.
Back
Set Gaming mode for inputs...
Shutdown
...
Gaming
mode
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
AV
AVS
PC IN
VIDEO
Retour
SPDIF IN
Mark/unmark with
Select the desired setting,
call.
Explanations of the setting options in the Digital Link menu:
Digital Link Herewith you can allow or forbid the automatic comHD munication between the TV set and linked external
functionality devices (e.g., BluRay player). Among other things, it's
role is that these devices switch mutually on and off.
Remote TV Here you can select whether the TV set is to switch
switch on of on automatically from Standby mode, if Digital Link
the TV set HD or Digital Link Plus capable devices connected
to an HDMI or to AV inputs start playback or display
a screen menu.
OK
For the inputs of your TV set on which game consoles, PC applications or even Karaoke machines are operated, we
recommend you to activate the "Gaming mode". Your activities are then displayed quicker on the screen by reducing
the complex, picture improving techniques. This mode can be set separately for every input of your TV set.
Select connection,
OK Gaming mode for selected connection on/off.
You can recognise AV connections with set Gaming
mode by the symbol after the connection name. A
dice icon
is shown in the extended station list behind
the corresponding AV input when filtering on the AV list.
Back
Expanded station list
1 HDMI 1
2 HDMI 2
3 HDMI 3
4 HDMI 4
5 PC IN
HDMI 2
6 AVS
7 AV
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD Functionality ‫ ט‬on has been selected.
Shutdown of
the ext.
device via TV
button
You can select here whether the external Digital Link
HD device that is currently playing back should be
automatically shut down as soon as you switch back
to the TV or another AV channel.
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD Functionality ‫ ט‬on has been selected.
124
8 VIDEO
9 SPDIF IN
A..Z
Search
<
AV list
>
<
All stations
>
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
System settings
Connections
Assign digital audio input
In order to be able to hear also the digital sound of an external device
connected to an AV input, an AV input can be assigned to the digital
audio input socket SPDIF IN of your TV set. By switching to this AV
input, the digital audio signal at the SPDIF IN input is communicated
to the integrated digital multi-channel audio decoder and the digital
audio output socket SPDIF OUT. You will then hear the digital sound
of the assigned AV input instead of the analogue sound if available.
Connecting devices to the digital audio input
TV set
SPDIF
IN
DVD player
DIGITAL
OUT
AV
AV
For the digital audio playback from an external device, e.g. the DVD
player, you have to feed the digital audio signal to the TV set.
The external digital audio signal can be reproduced via the digital
multichannel audio decoder integrated in the TV set, via an externally
connected digital audio amplifier or via a Loewe Individual Sound
Projector ID.
If an external audio amplifier or Loewe Individual
Sound Projector ID is used, this must be registered
in the sound components wizard.
HOME: Call Home view.
Connection example for a DVD player
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Connections,
go to next column.
Select Assign digital audio input,
go to next column.
Select AV input.
...
Assign digital
audio input
no
If a device connected to an AV input is connected
additionally to the digital audio input (SPDIF IN socket) of
the TV set, you have to select this AV input here if you want to
listen to the sound of the set in digital quality. IF you select
"no", you hear the analogue sound.
to AVS
to HDMI1
to HDMI2
to HDMI3
to HDMI4
to PC IN
OK adopt.
To connect a DVD player to the digital audio input of
the TV set, for example, connect the digital output
socket of the DVD player (DIGITAL OUT) via a cinch
cable to the SPDIF IN socket on the TV set (see right
hand column).
125
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
External devices
Devices to the HDMI connections
Connecting an external device via HDMI/DVI adaptor
The HDMI connections (High Definition Multimedia Interface) allow
the transmission of digital video and audio signals from a player (e.g.
DVD player, Blu-ray player, game console, camcorder, set-top box)
via a single cable.
If your external device, e.g., a PC has an HDMI interface, you can also
connect the this via an HDMI socket to your TV set. If a DVI/HDMI
adaptor cable is used, the corresponding sound will either be fed
through the analogue sound input socket of the VGA adaptor (1 on
AVS or digitally via the SPDIF IN socket on the TV set.
The digital video and audio data are transmitted without data compression digitally and therefore lose none of their quality.
A maximum of five devices can be connected in cascade to every HDMI
socket. The devices are arranged in the AV list and in the station list
below the appropriate HDMI socket. If the respective device sends
its own device name, this appears in place of the connection name.
Your TV set can show optimally 24p movies, which are output from a
connected HDMI player, e.g., Loewe BluTech Vision 3D.
Digital video signals from a DVI player can be also be reproduced by
the HDMI connection using a DVI/HDMI adaptor cable. The sound
must be piped in additionally (see right column).
HDMI and DVI both use the same copy protection method HDCP.
For digital sound transmission, the SPDIF IN socket must first be
assigned to the desired HDMI input via System settings ‫ ט‬Connections ‫ ט‬Assign digital audio input.
Connecting an external device via HDMI
If your external device has an HDMI interface, the sound signal will
usually be transmitted via the HDMI connection.
If this is not the case, connect the analogue or digital sound as described above. Refer to the appropriate operating manual for further
information on the version of the HDMI interface on your external
device, e.g., PC.
Connecting the device
Playback from the device
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
If the device at HDMI supports the Digital Link HD functionality, the
TV set will automatically switch to the corresponding HDMI input after
starting the replay at the HDMI device.
Connect the device by an HDMI cable (Type A, 19-pole) to one of the
HDMI sockets of the TV set.
An HDMI device is connected to the side HDMI socket (e.g. camcorder)
in the same way as shown in the figure.
The HDMI input can also be called up manually:
Call AV list.
TV set
AV list
Blu-ray player
1
HDMI 1
2
HDMI 2
3
HDMI 3
4
HDMI 4
5
PC IN
6
AVS
HDMI
Note: If you press OK for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
HDMI1
Connection example of an HDMI device (e.g. Blu-ray Player)
Select HDMI socket.
With Digital Link HD-capable devices the device
name may possibly appear in place of the connection name.
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected HDMI device. The
best possible format for the picture is detected and set
automatically.
(1
Adaptor set is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
126
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
External devices
Operation of Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) enabled devices
For playback with an external Digital Link HD enabled device connected
to the HDMI socket of the TV set, user commands are transmitted to
the external device with a few exceptions (volume, sound on/off). You
will also be informed by an on-screen display as soon as you switch to
the corresponding HDMI input.
Pressing briefly TV switches to TV mode (back to
previous station).
Pressing TV for a longer period switches between
HDMI and TV operation.
A message on the screen informs you about the
currently selected mode.
Digital Link HD
Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC)
The Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) system operation allows Loewe
television sets to transmit the remote control signals via the HDMI
connection of a TV set to compatible HDMI devices, such as e.g. Loewe AudioVision. You can therefore set up a concealed CEC capable
HDMI device.
Concealed installation of HDMI devices
To this end, first assign the HDMI CEC function with Code 22 to the
required device key (STB, VIDEO or AUDIO) as described in chapter
External devices, section Setting the remote control for other
Loewe devices.
Now assign the Digital Link HD function to the used HDMI device.
Automatically switching off external devices
When returning to TV mode by briefly pressing the TV key (see above)
the external device can be switched off.
You can find the settings in the System settings ‫ ט‬Connections
‫ט‬Digital Link ‫ ט‬Shutdown of the ext. device via TV-button.
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD - Functionality ‫ט‬
on has been selected.
Remote TV switch via Digital Link
You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from
Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a
Digital Link HD-enabled device.
You can find the settings in the System settings ‫ ט‬Connections ‫ט‬
Digital Link ‫ ט‬Remote switch on of TV set.
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD - Functionality ‫ט‬
on has been selected.
Switching off the TV set and connected devices (system
standby)
The operation of the TV set must be enabled (see above).
Press the key long: TV set and all CEC-enabled devices
connected to the HDMI ports will be switched off to
standby (system standby).
Assign HDMI device
The CEC capable HDMI device is connected to one
of the HDMI sockets of the TV set and switched on.
Press required button for 5 seconds.
A selection menu appears on the TV set.
Select HDMI device for key
Back
Select HDMI device for key
No device
BluTech Vision
Cancel
Select required device from the list.
OK Accept.
From now on, the commands of the remote control are
communicated from the TV set to the HDMI device, if
the corresponding device button (STB, VIDEO or
AUDIO) has been pressed previously.
127
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
External devices
Devices on AV
An additional device such as a DVD player, VCR/DVD recorder etc.
can be connected to the TV set by means of an adaptor at the AV
socket. The required Scart adaptor is part of the adaptor set. The
adaptor set is available as an accessory from your Loewe dealer (see
chapter Accessories).
The AV sockets can process different signal types. Which signal type
your accessory device provides can be found in the operating manual
of the appropriate device.
Connecting a DVD player to the TV set
A DVD player has been selected in the System settings ‫ ט‬AV
connecting settings ‫ ט‬Device at connection AV.
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the Scart output of the DVD player to the TV set’s AV socket
using the Scart adaptor (1 .
Plug the adaptor plug into the AV socket of the TV set so that the arrow
on the plug is visible.
Use a fully equipped Scart cable (available from your dealer) for this.
Owing to the large number of AV devices available on the market, we
can only mention a few examples for the connection of accessory
equipment to the AV sockets here.
If the sound of the device connected to an AV socket is to be transmitted digitally, a cinch cable must be plugged between the coaxial digital
output of the auxiliary equipment and the SPDIF IN socket of the TV
set. In addition, the digital audio input must be assigned to the appropriate AV socket. This is done via System settings ‫ ט‬Connections ‫ט‬
Assign digital audio input.
TV set
DVD player
AV
AV
Remote TV switch on via Digital Link
You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from
Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a
Digital Link Plus-enabled device connected to AV.
Connection example of a DVD player
You can find the settings in the System settings ‫ ט‬Connections ‫ט‬
Digital Link ‫ ט‬Remote switch on of TV set.
Playback from AV device
If the device at AV supports the Digital Link Plus functionality or if in
the System settings ‫ ט‬Connections ‫ ט‬AV connecting settings ‫ט‬
Allow switching voltage ‫ ט‬yes, the TV set will automatically switch
to the corresponding AV input after starting the replay at the AV device.
The AV input can also be called manually, however.
Call AV list.
AV list
5
AV
6
AVS
7
PC IN
8
VIDEO
9
SPDIF
Select AV,
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected device.
(1
Adaptor set is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
128
Note: If you press OK for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
External devices
Connecting a DVD recorder to the TV set
Devices on AVS
A DVD recorder has been selected in the System settings ‫ ט‬Connections ‫ ט‬AV connecting settings ‫ ט‬Device at connection AV.
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the Scart output of the DVD player to the TV set’s AV socket
using the Scart adaptor (1 . Use a fully equipped Scart cable (available
from your dealer) for this.
Plug the adaptor plug into the AV socket of the TV set so that the arrow
on the plug is visible.
If you want to receive and record analogue stations with the receiver
(tuner) built into the recorder, the recorder must be looped into the
aerial cable.
Connect the DVD recorder as shown in the connection example below.
TV set
R
TV
DVD recorder
ANT IN
The AV input AVS offers the possibility of connecting, e.g., a digital
camera, a camcorder or a PC via different adaptors.
The adaptors required in the following are part of an adaptor set. The
adaptor set is available as an accessory from your Loewe dealer (see
chapter Accessories).
The AV inputs AVS and PC IN available in the AV list both refer to
the AVS socket at the side of the TV set. AVS is always to be chosen
in the AV list if the Scart adaptor or the S-video adaptor are used.
Select PC IN in the AV list when you connect a device via the VGA
adaptor.
Connecting Camcorder/camera
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the video output of the camcorder to the TV set’s AVS
socket using the S-video adaptor (1 . Use the AV cable enclosed with
the camcorder for this.
Plug the adaptor plug into the AVS socket of the TV set so that the arrow on the plug is visible.
Depending on the type of plug, an additional cable is required for the
audio connection.
AV
TV set
ANT OUT
AV
Camcorder
AVS
Connection example of a camcorder
Connection example of a DVD recorder
If your camcorder has an HDMI output, you can also connect the device
to the HDMI sockets HDMI3 or HDMI4 on the side of the TV set.
Playback from AV device
Call AV list.
AV list
5
AV
6
AVS
7
PC IN
8
VIDEO
9
SPDIF
Playback from AV device
Note: If you press OK for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
Call AV list.
AV list
6
AVS
7
PC IN
8
VIDEO
9
SPDIF
Note: If you press OK for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
Select AV,
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected device.
Select AVS,
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected device.
(1
Adaptor set is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
129
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
External devices
Connecting PC / Set-top box
Playback from the device
You can connect a PC and thus use the TV screen as a monitor.
When connecting a PC or auxiliary device to the AVS socket of the
TV set, adjust the output signal on your PC first so that it matches
one of the signals in the table in chapter Technical data, section
Signals via AVS (PC IN) / HDMI.
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Call AV list.
AV list
7
PC IN
8
VIDEO
9
SPDIF
Note: If you press OK for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
Connect the device to the TV set’s AVS socket with a VGA cable and
the VGA adaptor (1 . Plug the adaptor plug into the AVS socket of the
TV set so that the arrow on the plug is visible.
Connect the analogue audio signal of the PC to the VGA adaptor via
the jack plug socket.
PC
TV set
AUDIO
Select PC IN,
OK switch over.
VGA
Adjusting the geometry of the PC picture
AVS
Connection example of a PC
The adaptor set AV SL2xx includes an adhesive cable holder.
Stick it next to the AVS socket 1 . Secure the VGA cable with it to
prevent the VGA adaptor from being pulled out of the jack by the
heavy VGA cable.
For more information, refer to the installation instructions supplied
with the adaptor kit.
1
Alternatively, connect the digital audio output of the PC or auxiliary equipment to the SPDIF IN socket of the TV set with a cinch cable.
The digital audio input can be assigned to the AVS or PC IN socket in
System settings ‫ ט‬Connections ‫ ט‬Assign digital audio input.
(1
Adaptor set is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
130
You can set the position (vertical, horizontal) and the phase position of
your PC. The settings you find under System settings ‫ ט‬Picture ‫ט‬
more ... ‫ ט‬PC IN - Display.
Connecting devices with component connection (YPbPr / YUV)
External units with component connection YPbPr (often informally
referred to as YUV; see also Glossary) can be connected to the AVS
socket of the TV set using two adaptors. In addition to the VGA adaptor,
a component VGA adaptor is required (available from your dealer).
The other units are connected as described in the left column.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
External devices
Connecting the Loewe speaker system
Connection
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Set-up
The arrangement of speakers and TV set can look like the illustration
below:
Front
left
Front
right
Stereospeaker I 40/46/55
as centre speaker
The subwoofer is connected to the TV set via the DIGITAL AUDIO
LINK interface. Plug a network cable (Category 5e or higher) to the
DIGITAL AUDIO LINK port of the TV set. Connect the Ethernet cable
to the RJ45 socket of the Digital Audiolink / Audiolink converter
available as accessory. Connect the converter to the AUDIO LINK
socket of the Subwoofer.
Ethernet cable
(Cat. 5e or higher)
TV set
Subwoofer
Surround
left
Surround
right
Converter
Digital Audiolink / Audiolink
Subwoofer
Example for placing the Loewe sound system
The front and surround speakers should be installed symmetrically
to the TV set and to your sitting position.
You can position the subwoofer anywhere on the floor. We recommend
placing it in front asymmetrically next to the TV set.
If you use another speaker than the Stereospeaker I 40 / 46 / 55 to be
the centre speaker, place it in the middle below the TV set.
For the manual settings in the sound components wizard enter the
distances of the centre speaker, and the front and surround speakers to your sitting position. This guarantees a natural spatial image
of the sound.
Connection of the Loewe Individual Speaker system to the TV set
Connecting the speakers to the subwoofer
further information on the wiring of the speakers you find the the
instruction manual of the speaker system.
Sound reproduction via the speaker system
The sound reproduction by the speaker system can be adjusted in the
sound components wizard.
131
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
External devices
Connecting active loudspeakers
Connecting the HiFi/AV amplifier
If you want to use another similar speaker system or active speakers,
you can connect these to the AUDIO LINK port of the TV set using
an adaptor cable.
Connecting digital HiFi/AV amplifiers
Plug a network cable (Category 5e or higher) to the AUDIO LINK
port of the TV set. Connect the Ethernet cable to the RJ45 socket
of the Digital Audiolink / Audiolink converter available as accessory. To the other end of the convertor you connect the adaptor
cable Audiolink / 30cm / 9pin + 5.1 Out + Center In. Connect
the cinch connectors of the adaptor cable to the cinch connectors of
the speakers / subwoofer.
Connect the digital audio output of the TV set SPDIF OUT to the digital
audio input of the amplifier via a cinch cable:
TV set
Digital amplifier
DIGITAL IN
The cinch connections of the adaptor cable are labelled:
R
for Front right
SR for Surround right
L
for Front left
SL
C for Centre
for Surround left
SPDIF
OUT
SUB for Subwoofer
The connections for the adaptor cable are pre-amplifier
outputs. Therefore, only active loudspeakers / active
subwoofers may be connected directly to the adaptor cable.
Front
left
Front
right
Center
Subwoofer
Connect digital audio (pre) amplifier via audio return channel
(HDMI ARC)
Connect the HDMI1 socket of the TV using an HDMI cable with the
HDMI socket of the ARC-compatible audio (pre) amplifier (e.g.Loewe
MediaVision 3D). It is not necessary to log-in the amplifier separately
with the TV set.
L
C
SUB
R
SR
C
SUB
R
SR
SL
L
Surround
left
SL
Connecting analogue HiFi/AV amplifiers
Surround
right
Use a stereo cinch/jack adaptor cable to connect the analogue audio
output AUDIO OUT to the analogue audio input of the amplifier:
TV set
CENTER
IN
Analogue amplifier
AUDIO IN
R
L
Adapter cable
Converter
Digital Audiolink / Audiolink
TV set
Ethernet cable
(Cat. 5e or higher)
AUDIO
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO
LINK
Reproducing sound via an HiFi/AV amplifier
The sound reproduction via connected HiFi/AV amplifiers can be
adjusted in the sound components wizard.
Connection of active speakers to the TV set
Sound reproduction via the speaker system
The settings for sound reproduction via active speakers you find in
the sound components wizard.
132
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
External devices
Connecting an external digital sound device (e.g., CD player)
Audio playback from external devices
Connect external AV devices (e.g., MP3 player, DVD player) for sound
reproduction to the AV inputs of the TV set.
Connect the digital sound output (Cinch/RCA socket) of the player to
the SPDIF IN socket of the TV set.
CD player
Connecting an external appliance (e.g. MP3 player)
TV set
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect the output (jack receptacle) of the MP3 player via S-video
adaptor (1 (AVS) or the VGA adaptor (1 (PC IN) to the AVS socket of
the TV set.
Plug the adaptor plug into the AVS socket of the TV set so that the arrow on the plug is visible.
MP3 player
SPDIF
IN
TV set
AVS
Playback from the device
AV adapter
Call AV list..
Connection example of an MP3 player
AV list
Select AV input
The selection of the AV input for a device at the AVS socket (connection as described above) is describe here as an example. The
procedure is similar to the selection of the other AV inputs.
9
7
SPDIF
PC IN
8
VIDEO
9
SPDIF
Note: If you press OK
OK for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark Extras,
OK call Extras.
Mark AV list,
OK call AV selection.
AV list
1
HDMI 1
2
HDMI 2
3
HDMI 3
4
HDMI 4
5
PC IN
6
AVS
Select SPDIF,
OK switch over..
Note: If you press OK for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
Mark desired AV source,
OK switch to AV source.
Start playback on the connected device.
Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12)
You can connect either the Loewe Individual Sound Projector ID or a
home network system of different manufacturers (e.g. AMX, Crestron)
to your TV set via the RS-232C (RJ12) interface.
As to the configuration of the RS-232C (RJ12) interface and for further
information on the various home networking systems contact your
dealer please.
Start playback on the external device after selecting
the AV input.
Only playback of the audio signal from the AV source (screen
is off)
To play only the sound of a connected media player (e.g. MP3 player),
the AV sources can be selected so that the screen goes blank.
Switching off the screen reduces the power consumption of the
TV set.
Open the AV station list.
Select desired connection,
OK press at least for two seconds.
(1
Adaptor set is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
133
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
External devices
Operating Loewe units
Setting the remote control for other Loewe devices
Using the remote control for the TV mode of the TV set
You can operate various Loewe devices with the remote control. The
device keys STB – VIDEO – AUDIO can be reassigned to operate
different Loewe devices.
Press the TV key, the LED above it will light for approx.
5 seconds.
Press the required device key and the STOP key
simultaneously for 5 sec. until the corresponding LED
display flashes twice.
Using the remote control for a Loewe recorder
Then enter the two-digit device code from the list below.
The corresponding LED indicator light flashes twice.
Press the STB key, the LED above it will light for approx.
5 seconds.
Unit
Using the remote control for a Loewe player
Press the VIDEO key, the LED above it will light for
approx. 5 seconds.
Using the remote control for the radio mode of the TV set
Press the AUDIO key, the display above it will light for
approx. 5 seconds.
As long as a key is pressed, the LED for the selected operating mode
lights up (TV – STB – VIDEO – AUDIO). This allows you to check
which operating mode the remote control is set to every time you
press a button.
The factory setting of the keys is described above (see also table in
right hand column). The assignment of the buttons can be changed
to suit the existing accessory devices (see right hand column).
Code
Factory setting
Loewe ViewVision 8106 H
10
Loewe Viewvision, Centros 21x2
12
Loewe ViewVision DR+ DVB-T
13
Loewe Auro 2216 PS/8116 DT
14
Loewe BluTech Vision Interactive
15
Loewe Sound Projector
17
SetTopBox (STB) data base
18
STB
Loewe TV - Digital radio
19
Audio
Loewe Mediacenter
20
Loewe BluTech Vision 3D
21
HDMI CEC mode
22
Loewe AudioVision
24
Loewe Individual Sound Projector ID
25
Apple IR codes
26
Apple IR codes (Apple TV-2G)
27
Loewe Soundbox
28
Loewe SoundVision
29
Loewe AirSpeaker
30
Loewe Soundport
31
Loewe MediaVision 3D
35
Restore defaults
99
VIDEO
Set unit for sound control function on the remote control
The keys for the sound control functions Volume ( 10 ) and Sound on/off
( 1 ) are programmed ex-factory to interact with the TV set. The unit to
be operated can be modified.
The device must first be placed on one of the device key of the
remote control (see right column) before the tone-control functions
can be changed to the appropriate device.
Press the TV key and the numerical key simultaneously for minimum 5 seconds. The LED above the
selected TV key flashes twice.
Function
Audio
Functions
134
Buttons
Unit
TV + 3
Auro/AudioVision/MediaVision 3D
TV + 4
Mediacenter
TV + 5
Loewe TV
TV + 6
Loewe TV with sound projector without system connection
The codes shown here only apply to direct operation of the auxiliary
device device.
The available codes may vary depending on the status of the firmware in the remote control.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Teaching the remote control
Teaching the remote control
Teaching individual keys
By means of key code 18 (Set-Top Box data base) your remote control
Assist may be taught for your Set-Top Box (e.g., decoder, external cable
tuner). Thus, you spare yourself the use of several remote controls.
All keys (except the TV, STB, VIDEO and AUDIO device keys as well
as the V+/- keys and
) can be taught for the operation of units
which are not contained in the integrated data base. The functions of
the selected button are then completely or partially overwritten with
the new codes.
For the use of 2-digit key codes see chapter External devices,
section Operating Loewe units.
The following options are available for teach-in:
- Entering a 3-digit code number
Place the TV remote control and the remote control to be replaced
in such a way that the infrared windows face each other at a distance
of 1-5 cm (see sketch).
- Set-Top Box read-out
- Teaching individual keys
- Delete learned codes
In the following, the STB key is dealt with as an example since
device code 18 is preset for this key ex-works. Code 18 may also be
assigned to the AUDIO and RADIO keys; the following description
applies accordingly.
Entering a 3-digit code number
The STB key can be programmed directly by means of a devicedependent 3-digit code. You find a list of these codes in chapter Code
page at the end of this instruction manual.
Keep the STB and OK keys depressed for five seconds.
The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
Enter the 3-digit code from the list. The LED above the
STB key lights up for 1 second.
OK end the programming mode. After a successful
programming the LED flashes twice.
When entering a wrong code number, the LED lights
up for 2 seconds. Do this programming once again.
Read-out of programmed Set-Top Box
The code of the currently programmed device on the STB key can be
indicated by the remote control.
Keep the STB and OK keys depressed for five seconds.
The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
1-5 cm
Keep the STB and the red key simultaneously
depressed for five seconds. The LED above the STB
key lights up permanently.
Press key to be taught on the TV remote control.
The LED above the STB key flashes.
On the original remote control press the button
which is to be taught.
The LED above the selected STB key flashes twice.
If the code is not correctly recognised, the LED above
the STB key flashes ten times. Then repeat your entry
on the original remote control. If necessary correct the
allocation of the two remote controls. Continue with
the other buttons as described above.
To end the teaching mode, press the STB key again.
After 10 seconds without an entry the teaching mode
is automatically terminated.
It is possible that not all remote control codes can
be taught.
You can make a note of the functions, which you
have allocated to the keys, on the notes pages at the
end of this instruction manual.
Press INFO key.
The LED above the STB key shows the programmed
code by flashing. The figure "0" will be indicated by
flashing 5 times.
135
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Teaching the remote control / Loewe Apps
Deleting individual key functions
You can delete the taught function of an individual button.
Press STB and green key simultaneously for five
seconds. The LED above the STB key lights up permanently.
Press key to be deleted on the TV remote control.
The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
Continue with the deletion of other buttons as
described above.
To end the deletion mode, press the STB key again.
The LED above the STB key flashes once.
Deleting all functions of the key for a device
You can delete all taught functions which you have set on the STB key.
Press STB and yellow key simultaneously for five
seconds. The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
Deleting all functions of the keys for all devices
You can delete all taught functions which you have set on the TV, STB,
VIDEO or AUDIO buttons.
Press STB and blue key simultaneously for five
seconds. The LEDs above the keys for the devices flash
twice.
Loewe Apps
Loewe provides various Apps for your mobile devices:
Loewe Internet Radio App
Loewe Internet Radio App provides you with the Internet radio
offers of vTuner for your Apple products iPhone, iPad or iPod touch
(from iOS 3.0). Your personal settings such as the vTuner favourites
are synchronised with those of the TV set after registering your Apple
product via the Loewe Support homepage.
Loewe VideoNet App
The Loewe VideoNet App enables free and direct access to the
best videos in the Web. The App streams live Podcasts, Screencasts
and Web-Shows without loop route onto your iPad. You can use the
Favourites function to add videos to your personal favourites list with
just one click. In this way you can watch the latest episodes live. You
can use the “Send-to-TV” function to sent selected videos to your
Loewe TV set and play them there.
This App is available for Apple iPad (from iOS 3.2) via the Appstore.
To use the full functionality, you need to connect the VideoNet App on
your TV set (can be found in the MediaNet area) and the VideoNet App
of your iPad to each other (pairing). You can find a precise description
of the steps necessary in the instructions of the iPad-App under the
point Pairing.
Loewe Assist Media App
The Loewe Assist Media App is a powerful App, which can not only
replace your remote control in your home network, but also EPG and
DR+ archive provided by the TV set to your iPad. You can also transfer
the station list of your TV set to your iPad, programme timer entries,
start an immediate recording and add personal favourites to the start
screen of the App.
In the course of the Loewe Assist Media app, the keyboard of your
iPad can be used with restrictions for inputting text on the screen
(e.g. in the browser). Text which has been input is moved to the TV
set after confirmation.
This App is available for Apple iPad (iOS 4.0 or higher) via the Appstore.
136
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Loewe Apps
Overview of the prerequisites for the use of the Assist Media
app for the Apple iPad
1. WLAN router and home network
5. Creating an Apple ID
If it has not been done yet, create a user account (Apple
ID) on your iPad in the Settings under item iTunes &
App Stores.
A WLAN router must be connected and installed.
2. The Loewe TV set is connected to the home network via LAN
/ WLAN
Your reach the network setting of the Loewe TV set
via HOME view ‫ט‬System settings ‫ ט‬Multimedia
/ Network ‫ ט‬Network settings ‫ ט‬Networking.
NETWORKING WIZARD - Network status
...
Networking
Current settings:
Networking
IP configuration
.
Wired
Automatic
Additional information:
IP address
Subnet mask
Gateway
DNS server 1
DNS server 2
MAC address
Proceed with
172.16.10.201
255.255.0.0
172.16.0.1
172.16.0.1
192.168.1.1
00:09:82:17:73:52
End with
Select whether the TV device should be connected to
the Internet using a LAN (cable) or WLAN (wireless)
connection. Here you also see the name of the network
and the IP address of the TV set. This address will be
indicated in the Assist Media App (Settings ‫ ט‬Connect) and is used to make a difference between the
devices registered in the network.
3. A digital Cable / Satellite connection (DVB-C/-S) is available
Loewe recommend a DVB-C- or DVB-S connection of
your TV set. You have the possibility to fully use the
Assist Media App for iPad. In case of analogue TV
reception, Assist Media cannot fully use the EPG,
for instance.
4. The DR+ Streaming settings are checked
Follow the instructions.
You can then download the Loewe Assist Media App
for iPad from the App Store.
Please set in the DR+ Streaming settings under
HOME ‫ט‬System settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ ט‬more ... ‫ט‬
DR+ ‫ ט‬DR+ Streaming the first two items Share
DR+ archive with other devices and Also use other
archives to yes.
...
DR+
Streaming
Share DR+ ar-
If you select "yes" here, you will make the DR+ archive of
your TV set available to any other TV sets and UPnP clients
equipped with this feature. They will then be able to access
the archive over your home network.
Notify startDR+ device
name
DR+ device
group name
IP port
number
DR+ standby
In the DR+ Streaming setting you can also set the
name of the TV set under which it will be displayed in
the App. After renaming please switch the TV set off
and on again using the power switch.
137
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Loewe Apps
6. Install Loewe Assist Media App
Open the App Store.
7. Install the Assist Media App
Activate the location services for the apps Assist
Media and Maps in your iPad under Settings ‫ ט‬Data
protection ‫ ט‬Location service. This is essential for
using country-specific functions. Thus, you can use
the maxdome video service, for example.
Enter the keyword Loewe in the browse list on the right
above. Start searching by pressing on Search.
Open the Assist Media app on your iPad. It scans your
home network for Loewe TV sets. Follow the instructions and select the desired TV set.
Install the Assist Media App by pressing on FOR
FREE. Follow the instructions on the installation of
the app.
In another step, you choose which station list the
app shall load: the unsorted main list or one of your
personal lists. Thereafter, loading of the EPG starts.
The app is available to you after a few minutes of loading time. Further EPG data packages are loaded in the
background.
138
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
The TV set switches off automatically.
The automatic shutdown switches off the Using automatic shutdown is recommended
TV set to save energy after 4 hours of inacti- for the purposes of energy saving and safety.
vity as soon as at least one signal input group
is set up in the energy efficient mode Home
Mode.
All menus are displayed in the wrong langu- The menu language was set incorrectly.
age.
General problems when connecting external The Signal type is set incorrectly.
devices via an AV input.
Remedy / Instructions
Set the menu language:
Press HOME key. Call last menu item
(bottom left). Mark the fourth item from above in the
following list and move to next column to the
right. Call first list item with OK. Select the language and confirm it with OK.
Set the correct signal type (System settings
‫ ט‬Connections ‫ ט‬AV connection settings
‫ט‬Signal type).
If AV standard or Signal type is set to
“Automatic” then this can lead to false detections with non-standard signals. In this case
standard and signal must be set according to
the information in the operating manual of the
external device.
With Teletext various characters are displa- The wrong character set has been set in the Set the correct character set: System setyed incorrectly.
System settings.
tings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ ט‬more ... ‫ ט‬Standard
Teletext ‫ ט‬Character set ‫ ט‬Standard or
select the appropriate character set.
Errors occurred when running a CA module.
Switch the TV set off. Remove the CA-module
from the TV set. Wait a few seconds. Reinsert
the CA module. Switch the TV set on again.
No sound via the external digital audio am- a) The external digital audio amplifier does a) Set PCM stereo on the DVD player in the
sound selection. For DVB stations switch
plifier.
not support the selected sound format
Language/Sound
(Dolby Digital, dts, MPEG).
b) TV set and external digital audio amplifier b) Connect SPDIF OUT from the TV set to a
digital input of the external digital audio
are not connected with each other.
amplifier and select the appropriate input
to this.
A programmed recording was not made.
The provider deleted the programme from
the EPG data, for example due to a programme change.
The station from which the recording was
made does not support automatic time
control (Accurate Recording).
Only the broadcasting organisations are responsible for transmitting data for the automatic time control. The availability of the
appropriate data cannot be guaranteed.
There is no start or end of a programmed The transmission time of the program was Only the broadcasting organisations are rerecording although the automatic time delayed and the channel from which the recor- sponsible for transmitting data for the automatic time control. The availability of the
ding was made has not updated the data.
control (Accurate Recording) was used.
appropriate data cannot be guaranteed.
No IP address will be issued to your TV set in No DHCP server is working on your network. Set up a DHCP server.
spite of automatic IP configuration.
Assign the IP addresses for the TV set manually.
139
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Remedy / Instructions
Despite video or music file being played back, a) The TV set is set to mute or the volume has a) Increase the volume by pressing the V+ key
on the remote control for a longer time. This
no sound can be heard.
been turned down too much.
will also cancel any mute setting.
b) An audio device that does not exist or that b) Connect the audio device and switch it on.
In the Sound components wizard change
is not connected, is registered under
back to TV speakers.
System settings ‫ ט‬Connections ‫ט‬
Sound components (e.g., HiFi/AV amplifier).
Although the file is visible on the media server, The file is not made available by your media Change to your media server. For this, also
it is not displayed in the MediaPortal.
server.
read the chapter Technical data, section
Media – Media server software.
A media file that is displayed can not be played The format of the file is not supported (see also No remedy.
back.
limitations in chapter Technical data, section
Media – File formats supported.
Characters received in the WLAN code of the The device does not support all special cha- Change the WLAN key of the router.
wireless router cannot be entered for the racters.
network configuration at the TV set.
When searching for wireless routers, no de- The router is not ready for wireless commu- Check your wireless router.
vice is found.
nication.
Try to make the connection again a few minutes later.
Should there be any interference during wireless network operation such as disruptions during playback or slow reactions by devices to
commands, you could try the following:
- Keep at least three metres distance from microwave ovens, bluetooth devices, mobile telephones and Wi-Fi compatible devices such as
printers and PDAs.
- Change the active channel on the WiFi Router.
140
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Technical Data
Technical data
Type
Individual 55
Individual 46
Individual 40
Part number
52403xxx
52402xxx
52401xxx
Device dimensions without stand (W x H x D)
124,0 x 76,7 x 5,9 cm
104,8 x 65,5 x 6,4 cm
91,5 x 58,0 x 6,5 cm
Weight without stand (approximate)
30.4 kg
21.8 kg
17.5 kg
Display technology
Full HD LCD with edge LED backlight technology
Screen diagonal / Picture format
140 cm/ 16:9
Resolution / Motion Response
117 cm / 16:9
101 cm / 16:9
1920 x 1080 / 400 Hz
Contrast (static / dynamic)
5,000 : 1 / 5,000,000 : 1
Viewing angle (horizontal / vertical)
178° / 178°
Power consumption On-Mode max.
(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value)
161 W
138 W
126 W
Power consumption in Standby Mode
120 W
109 W
96 W
Power consumption in Standby Mode
0.47 W
0.47 W
0.47 W
Power consumption when set is switched off
0W
0W
0W
Ambient temperature
5° C – 35° C
Relative humidity (non-condensing)
20 – 80%
Air pressure
800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)
Chassis designation:
SL 220
Power supply:
220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz
Tuner:
terr./cable:
Satellite:
VHF/Hyperband/UHF
4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz / 16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0 / single-cable system: EN 50494
Range:
terr./cable:
Satellite:
Terr./cable: 45 MHz up to 860 MHz
Satellite: 950 MHz up to 2150 MHz
Station storage locations incl. AV and radio:
TV standards:
6000
analogue:
digital:
Colour standards:
Sound standards:
B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N
DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S/S2
SECAM, PAL, NTSC, NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)
analogue:
BG, DK, MN:
BG, I, DK:
L, L1:
digital:
Mono, Stereo, Dual channel
FM-A2
FM-Nicam
AM-Nicam
Mono, Stereo, Dual channel, PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby Virtual Speaker, DTS, Dolby Digital Pulse
Audio output power (sine / music):
2 x 20W / 2 x 40W
Teletext:
TOP
FLOF
HiText (Level 2.5)
Page memory:
2000
141
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Technical Data
Function of the connections
The following table shows the name, type and function of the ports.
Designation
Type
Function / Signal
Mains socket
220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
Supply voltage
RJ12
Data I/O:
serial interface
Mini-DIN
Clamps (4x)
Rotating stand control (Positioning accuracy 1.5°)
Speaker left / right
+ (red) / - (black)
Jack 3.5 mm
Connection for IR station
Jack 3.5 mm
Audio OUT:
Cinch (black)
Audio IN: max. 2Vrms:
10-pole connector
Loewe system speaker
analogue audio output L / R
Centre audio input (analogue)
Video IN:
Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)
CVBS (VHS/8 mm)
RGB
L/R
Mini AV
Audio IN:
HDMI4
Antenna (analogue) / Cable (analogue) / DVB-T/T2
/ DVB-C
IEC socket
75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA:
F socket (2x)
75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA:
ANT-SAT DVB-S/S2
Cinch (orange)
SPDIF OUT:
Digital audio output
RJ-45
Audio OUT:
Multi-sound (digital)
HDMI type A (4x)
Digital Video/Audio IN
(HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3,
HDMI4):
Digital video and audio
Digital Audio OUT
(HDMI1 via HDMI ARC):
RJ-45
Ethernet / Fast Ethernet:
Network interface
USB type A (3x)
USB 2.0 (max. 500mA):
Multimedia files/software update
Cinch (orange)
SPDIF IN:
Video IN:
Audio IN:
Jack 3.5 mm
(
Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)
CVBS (VHS/8 mm)
PC/STB video signal (1
Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)
L/R
Headphones 32–200 Ohm
Common Interface:
1 For compatible picture signals, see table Signals via AVS (PC IN) / HDMI.
142
with S-video adaptor:
with VGA adaptor:
Mini AV
CI Slot (2x)
Digital sound input
Slot for CA module
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Technical Data
Media
File formats supported
Pictures: JPEG, PNG
Audio:
MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV
(PCM)
Video:
AVI (MPEG-1/2, XviD, AC3, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1,
WMA9, WMA Pro), MP4 (XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC
LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MKV (H.264/
MPEG-4 AVC, AC3), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263,
MP3, AAC LC), MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS
(MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2 Audio, AC3), VOB
(MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, AC3)
H.264/MPEG-4 AVC upto Profil High (Level 4.2)
Ethernet (wired network)
Supported standards: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T), 100 Mbit/sec
Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)
WLAN (wireless network)
Standards supported:
IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Frequency range used:
2400-2483,5 MHz and 5180-5730 MHz
Types of encoding that are supported:
WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES
Supported home network standard
Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)
Media server software
To play multimedia contents from devices in your home network, you
require media server software which makes the relevant files available
to you. Handling of individual files depends on the technical properties
and also on the media server software used.
You can download a test version of the TwonkyMedia Mediaserver from
our homepage. With your TV set, you have also acquired the option of
obtaining a free licence for the currently available version of the Twonky
media server. Alternatively, you can also use other media servers, e.g.,
the Windows Media Player (WMP) from Version 11.
For communication with your PC, certain port addresses of the
network connection are required. They may not be blocked by a firewall
if there is one, otherwise this could cause serious connection errors.
Windows Media Player 11 requires the port addresses 1900 and the
block of 10280 up to and including 10284 (all for UDP) as well as 2869
and 10243 (both for TCP). For TwonkyMedia the port addresses 1030,
1900 and 9080 (all for UDP) and 9000 (for TCP) must be available.
Other ports to be kept free depend on the operating system you are
using.
Contact your network administrator about configuring the firewall.
143
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Technical Data
Signals via AVS (PC IN) / HDMI
Signal input groups
The following table lists the compatible signals which your TV set can
show via the AVS (PC IN) connection or via the HDMI connections
(HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4).
In your TV set the signals are sorted in various signal input groups
according to their source. In addition to the source, the type of signal
is also distinguished.
Set the output signal on your PC, HDMI or DVI device so that it matches
one of the signals in the table.
For each signal input group, there are individual values for the picture
settings.
Format
Horizontal x Vertical
Frame
frequency
connection
Signal Signal source/Signal type
group name
480i60
720
x
480i
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI
576i50
720
x
576i
50Hz
PC IN, HDMI
SD Digital DVB (SD), DR+ (SD), MPEG-Encoder
480p60
720
x
480p
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI
576p50
720
x
576p
50Hz
PC IN, HDMI
SD Media full screen display of SD videos via USB, Network,
Player VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media centre)
1440
x
480p
60Hz
HDMI
1440
x
576p
50Hz
HDMI
720p50
1280
x
720p
50Hz
PC IN, HDMI
HD Digital DVB (HD), DR+ (HD)
720p60
1280
x
720p
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI
HD Media full screen display of HD videos via USB, Network,
Player VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media centre)
1080i50
1920
x
1080i
50Hz
PC IN, HDMI
1080i60
1920
x
1080i
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI
1080p24
1920
x
1080p
24Hz
PC IN, HDMI
1080p25
1920
x
1080p
25Hz
PC IN, HDMI
1080p30
1920
x
1080p
30Hz
PC IN, HDMI
1080p50
1920
x
1080p
50Hz
PC IN, HDMI
1080p60
1920
x
1080p
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI
VGA
640
x
480
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI
SVGA
800
x
600
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI
XGA
1024
x
768
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI
WXGA
1360
x
768
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI
SXGA
1280
x
1024
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI
SD Analog cable analogue, interfaces AV, AVS, PC IN (1 (SD)
SD HDMI Playback of SD video via HDMI, e.g., DVD player
HD Analog PC IN (1 (HD)
HD HDMI Playback of HD videos via HDMI, e.g., Blu-Ray player
3D HD 3D playback of HD videos (analogue or digital)
3D SD 3D playback of SD videos (analogue or digital)
3D Media full screen display of 3D videos (SD/HD) via USB,
Player Network, VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media
centre)
3D HDMI Playback of 3D videos via HDMI, e.g., 3D Blu-Ray
player
Photo Player Playback of Photos via USB and network
(1
with VGA adaptor on AVS connection.
144
Browser Display of Web sites in the Browser (incl. Media apps)
VGA PC IN (1 (PC) or HDMI (PC)
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Accessories
Accessories
The following accessories are obtainable from your Loewe dealer.
Mounting options:
Loewe 3D glasses (part. no. 71133082):
A variety of options for mounting your TV set on the floor, table, and
wall are available.
The Loewe 3D shutter Active 3D Glasses give you clear 3D enjoyment
and are compatible with all Loewe 3D flat screen TVs.
An overview of the available placement options can be found in the
chapter accessories, section placement options.
Trims:
The inlays laterally attached to TV set and stereo speaker can be
replaced to match the ambience of your home. There are different
surface structures or colours that can be selected for your device.
Please contact your dealer in this regard.
Wooden trims are a natural product. In this case UV light (strong
sunlight) can cause slight discoloration.
Loewe Stereospeaker I 40/46/55:
Extend your Individual with the system speaker Stereospeaker I
40/46/55, which can be mounted directly underneath the TV set.
Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts M8x20 (part. no. 90460994):
Mounting a Loewe flatscreen TV set to a holder according to the VESA
standard necessarily requires the use of Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts
to prevent damage to the TV set.
The Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts are fastened with a torque of about
4 Nm on the TV set. If you use a Vesa mounting options from other
manufacturers, you can order the Vesa adapter bolts at your authorized dealer of Loewe.
Upgrade kits / conversion kits / cables
USB extension (part no. 70167080):
Loewe Individual Sound Projector ID:
With the Loewe Individual Sound Projector ID you can enjoy digital Surround Sound without expensive installation and connection of several
speakers. The Sound Projector is easy to set and operate.
To ensure the accessibility of the USB connections or to be able to
insert USB sticks with a large housing, a USB extension can be connected to the TV set. You can purchase the USB extension via your
Loewe dealer.
Loewe Individual Sound:
Converter Digital Audiolink/Audiolink (part no. 71600080):
The TV sets can be perfectly enhanced with the Individual Sound
speaker system. Numerous options for loudspeaker combinations
can be realised with floor-standing loudspeakers, satellite loudspeakers and a subwoofer. Individual housing and trim colour designs are
possible here too.
The digital Audiolink/Audiolink convertor allows you to connect your
TV set to audio devices with a 25-pole AUDIO LINK socket.
To connect the convertor you require additionally an Ethernet cable
with RJ45 plugs, category 5e or higher with a length of at least 1m
and maximum 15m.
Loewe 3D Blu-ray player:
Adaptor Set AV SL 2xx (part no. 71678080):
With the Loewe Blu-ray player BluTech Vision 3D you’re fully kitted
out to watch Blu-ray discs with 2D and 3D material. With the Loewe
system integration you control BluTech Vision 3D and your Loewe TV
set simultaneously using the Assist remote control.
The Loewe adaptor set contains three AV adaptors: The Loewe Scart
adaptor allows you to extend your TV set by adding an AV socket
to connect, e.g., DVD players or DVD recorders. The VGA adaptor
enables the connection of a PC monitor or a Set-top box. By means
of the S-video adaptor you connect your video camera to the TV set.
Additionally to the video inputs, the adaptors for VGA and S-video
are equipped with a 3.5mm stereo jack socket for analogue sound.
Loewe MediaVision 3D:
Loewe MediaVision 3D is partly an audio system: It plays your favourite
sound via the integrated iPod/iPhone dock and automatically identifies songs or film music with the MusicID function. Loewe MediaVision 3D is also a home cinema system, ensuring a perfect all-round
audio visual experience - thanks to the fast and precise Full-HD 3D
Blu-ray drive and a 5.1 decoder. Not least, Loewe MediaVision 3D is a
colourful feast for the eyes: because it can be beautifully customised
by individual intarsia.
Loewe Assist Easy:
The reduced focused design of Loewe Assist Easy remote control
guarantees survey at first sight, nevertheless all important functions
are controllable with one hand. Therefore it is the optimal control centre
of the new user interface Loewe Assist Media. As a multifunctional
remote control it is able to control further Loewe products in addition.
Adapter Mini-Scart/25cm/Scart (part no. 71480080):
The Loewe scart adaptor allows you to extend your TV set by adding
an AV socket to connect, e.g., DVD players or DVD recorders.
Adapter RJ12/2.5m/RS232C (part no. 70499081):
Adapter cable RJ12 to 9-pin Sub-D connector for the integration of the
TV set in professional home automation systems, such as of GIRA,
CRESTRON, AMX.
Subject to availability.
145
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Accessories
Equipment variants
The equipment of the individual set variants and their upgrade/conversion possibilities is listed in the table below.
Set variants
Individual 55
Individual 46
Individual 40
DR+
z
z
z
DVB-T/T2/C Twin
z
z
z
DVB-S/S2 Twin
z
z
z
Digital audio decoder
z
z
z
HbbTV
z
z
z
WLAN
z
z
z
RJ12
z
z
z
Motor Unit connection
z
z
z
IR Link
z
z
z
z
146
ex factory
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Accessories
Mounting options
+
or
+
or
Screen Floor Cross I 55 (71521Q00)
Screen Floor Cross I 40/46 (71520Q00)
Rotation Unit Table I 40-55 (71504B00)
Rotation Unit Table I 40-55 Sound (71510B00)
Rotation Unit Table I 40-55 MU (71518B00)
Rotation Unit Table I 40-55 Sound MU (71519B00)
Screen Table Plate I 46/55 (71672B00)
Screen Table Plate I 40 (71671B00)
Screen Table Cross I 55 (71500Q00)
Screen Table Cross I 40/46 (71490Q00)
Screen Floor Plate I 46/55 (71523B00)
Screen Floor Plate I 40 (71522B00)
Rotation Unit Floor I 40-55 (71524B00)
Rotation Unit Floor I 40-55 MU (71526B00)
Rotation Unit Floor I 40-55 MU SP (71782B00)
+
Individual Rack 110.30 (1 (69480x00)
Individual Rack 110.30 SW (1 (69482x00)
Rack 165.30 (51487x00)
Rack 165.45 CS (51488x00)
Rack 165.45 SP (51489x00)
WM 65 (71485T00)
Screen Lift Plus (1 (65486B10)
Wall Mount Slim / VESA Size 200 (71389T00) (2
Wall Mount Slim / VESA Size 400 (71361T00) (3
Wall Mount Isoflex 32-55 (1 (71363B00)
Rotation Unit Table I 40-55 (71504B00)
Rotation Unit Table I 40-55 Sound (71510B00)
Rotation Unit Table I 40-55 MU (71518B00)
Rotation Unit Table I 40-55 Sound MU (71519B00)
Wall Stand Flex 32-46 (1 (71277B00)
(1
Only in connection with appropriate adaptor to be ordered separately.
Nur Individual 40.
(3
Nur Individual 46 / 55.
(2
147
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Environment / Legal information
Environmental protection
Licences
Energy consumption
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro
Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Your TV set is equipped with an eco-standby power supply. In the
standby mode, the power consumption drops to low power (see
chapter Technical Data). If you want to save even more energy then
switch the device off with the mains switch. Please also note that
the EPG data (Electronic Programme Guide) is lost under certain
circumstances and possibly programmed timer recordings cannot
be carried out via the TV set.
The TV set will be completely separated from mains only when you
unplug the mains cable.
The power consumed by the TV set during operation depends on the
energy efficiency preset in the initial installation or on the setting in
the System settings.
If you activate the automatic dimming, your TV picture will adapt to
the ambient brightness. This reduces the power consumption of the
TV set.
If the TV is not operated for 4 hours (adjustment of volume, programme change, etc.) the TV will automatically switch to stand-by
mode to save energy. A prompt to terminate this shutdown process
appears one minute before expiry of the 4 hours. The automatic
shutdown is only active in the energy efficiency mode Home Mode.
Cardboard box and packaging
You have made a decision to purchase a high-quality technical product
with a long service life. For disposal of the packaging, in accordance
with national legislation we have paid a fee to a commissioned recycler
to pick up the packaging from the dealer.
The device
The EU directive 2002/96/EC regulates the proper
way to recycle, handle and utilise used electronic devices. Old electronic appliances must therefore be
disposed of separately. Never dispose of this device
in normal domestic waste!
You can hand in your old unit free of charge at identified
collection points or to your dealer if you buy a similar new unit. Other
details about reacceptance (also for non-EU countries) are available
from your local administration.
Batteries
The batteries supplied as initial equipment do not contain any pollutants such as cadmium, lead, or mercury.
In accordance with the Battery Directive, used batteries should no longer be disposed of in the domestic
waste. Dispose of your batteries at no charge in the
collection containers which are set up for this purpose in retail stores.
148
This set contains a software which is based partly on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
iPad, iPhone, iPod are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the USA
and other countries.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
®
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org).
This software is provided by the OpenSSL project “as is“ and any
expressed or implied warranties, including, but not limited to,
the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the OpenSSL
project or its contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including,
but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss
of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused
and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or
tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the
use of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
([email protected]).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.
com).
This product contains software which was developed by third parties
and / or software which is subject to GNU General Public License (GPL)
and/or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). You can pass on
and modify them in accordance with Version 2 of the GNU General
Public License or optionally every later version which is published by
the Free Software Foundation.
The publication of this program by Loewe is carried out WITHOUT ANY
GUARANTEE OR SUPPORT, particularly without an implicit guarantee
concerning MARKET MATURITY or the USABILITY FOR A SPECIFIC
PURPOSE. Details can be found in the GNU General Public License. You
can obtain the software via the Loewe customer service department.
The GNU General Public License can be downloaded from:
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Glossary
0-9
24p motion picture display: Movies released on Blu-ray Disc support the 24p motion picture display. The Blu-ray player transfers the
original film format to the television with 24 frames per second. The
DMM (DigitalMovieMode) set in the factory calculates and inserts
additional intermediate pictures, which suppress film jerking typical
for the cinema, thereby providing for a smooth motion sequence.
A
Accurate Recording: See Automatic time control.
Administrator: Person who administers the network, i.e. takes care of
setting up and maintaining all components belonging to the network.
Active antenna: An antenna with its own power supply or amplification
which can improve the reception in areas with a poor coverage.
ARC: Abbreviation for Audio Return Channel.
Audio Return Channel: The audio return channel which was introduced
with the HDMI Standard 1.4 is used when an audio system with audio
(pre) amplifier, e.g. Loewe MediaVision 3D, is connected to a TV set via
HDMI. The digital audio signal of the TV set (e.g. the sound of the current TV program) can be transferred to the audio amplifier via the audio
return channel of the HDMI cable. Thus the same cable which is normally
responsible for transferring image data from a connected media player to
the TV set transfers the audio data in the opposite direction. In this way, the
audio return channel makes the cinch cable, which has previously been
required in addition to the HDMI cable, redundant.
Automatic time control: Also called Accurate Recording. Similar to
VPS for analogue stations the automatic time control monitors the start
and end times of programmes from DVB stations. If these times deviate
from the data programmed in the timer data, the running time of the
recording is adapted automatically. The automatic time control is not
supported by all DVB stations.
AV socket: Socket for audio and video signals.
AV sources: Audio/Video source.
AVI: Abbreviation for Audio Video Interleave, a video container file format developed by Microsoft. A single AVI video file can contain several
audio, video and text data streams (thus the name container format).
AVS: Audio/video sockets on the side of the TV set (cinch and miniDIN).
B
Band: Name for a transmission range.
Client: Also called network client, describes an end device such as
your TV set that is connected to the network and gets data from a
(media) server to make it accessible to the user.
Common Interface: The Common Interface (CI slot) is a standardised interface. By inserting suitable decoding modules (CA modules)
and a Smart Card coded digital programmes can be used.
Common Interface Plus: CI Plus is an advancement of the Common
Interface standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible
to the previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards according to the past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots,
as far as the programme provider permits this. Additionally, extended
regulations apply however to CI Plus.
Component: See Component connection.
Component connection: Also referred to as Component. Connection where the video signal is transferred via three separate (Cinch)
connections. It comprises the brightness signal Y as well as the colour
difference signals Pb (blue component) and Pr (red component).
Conditional Access module: See CA module.
D
Decoder: Analogue, coded TV signals are passed through a decoder
and made visible again.
DHCP: Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. DHCP
allows automatic assignment of IP addresses with the aid of a DHCP
server.
DHCP server: Network service which takes care of automatic assignment of IP addresses to clients.
Digital Link HD: System for controlling units via the HDMI connection
of the Loewe TV set when they have been set up in a covered position.
DMM: Abbreviation for Digital Movie Mode. Whether a studio recording, live broadcast, or feature film – the broadcast images are always
displayed optimally. Still images are reproduced in all their sharpness
and tranquillity. By creating intermediate images, DMM enables perfect
studio quality, even with quick movements.
DNC: Abbreviation for “Digital Noise Control”. Weak TV signals (analogue) can generate disruptive picture noise. DNC adjusts the effect
of digital noise reduction to the picture contents.
DNS: Abbreviation for Domain Name System. Readable names (e.g.
www.loewe-int.de) are assigned to numerical IP addresses. DNS
servers are responsible for the resolution of readable addresses into
the corresponding IP addresses.
Blu-ray Disc: The follow-up format of DVD. The contents of about
five DVDs fit onto one Blu-ray Disc (abbreviated BD). Therefore, the
Blu-ray disc provides enough space for high-resolution images and
multi-channel sound formats.C
Dolby Digital: Digital multi-channel sound. The digital standard for
high quality home movie systems. The individual channels are broadcast separately in this standard. The three front channels right, left
and centre, the two surround channels right and left and the external
subwoofer channels are called a 5.1 signal.
BMP: Abbreviation for Bitmap, a grid graphics format designed for
Microsoft Windows and OS/2 that is wide spread and therefore supported by almost every popular graphics software package without
any problems.
Dolby Pro Logic: Analogue multi-channel sound. Converts a Dolbycoded stereo signal into a surround sound. This usually contains four
channels (front left, centre, front right, surround channel). A special
subwoofer channel is not generated in this method.
C
Dolby Pro Logic II: Analogue multi-channel sound. Dolby Pro Logic II
is a further development of Dolby Pro Logic. This method generates
a 6-channel spatial sound from a stereo or Pro-Logic signal (front left,
centre, front right, surround left, surround right, subwoofer).
CA Module: The Conditional Access module contains the coding system and compares the transmitted code with the one on the
Smart Card. If they match, the appropriate stations or programmes
are decoded.
CEC: Abbreviation for Consumer Electronics Control. CEC provides universal component control functions for entertainment electronics devices
(e.g. System standby, One Touch Play). CEC is referred to by Loewe as
Digital Link HD.
Channel (WLAN): Devices that want to communicate with each other
have to use the same WiFi channel. In Europe the WiFi frequency band
is currently divided into 13 channels.
Cinch cable: Cable for transmitting sound or pictures.
Dolby Surround: An analogue surround sound system which uses a
matrix coding to fit four sound channels into two sound tracks.
Dolby Virtual Speaker: The Dolby Virtual Speaker technology
simulates the surround playback of a real 5.1 channel playback with
only two speakers.
DRM: Digital Rights Management. Processes to control copyright
protected data. To be used correctly, DRM protected contents require
not only a DRM capable device but also the possession of a license
issued by the provider (to be paid for).
DTS: Digital Theatre Systems; Digital multi-channel audio.
CI slot: See Common Interface.
149
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Glossary
D (continued)
I
DVB-C/-S/-T: Digital Video Broadcasting stands for digital television.
Technical DVB is the standardised process for transmitting digital
content (television, radio, multi-channel audio, room sound, EPG,
Teletext, and other supplemental services) through digital technology.
CST for terrestrial or antenna distribution.
ID3 tags: Additional information for MP3 and WMA audio files. Information about the singer, title, album and album cover can be saved
here among other things. This data is then processed by the PC using
an ID3 tag editor.
DVD: Abbreviation for Digital Video Disc and later Digital Versatile Disc.
DVD preceiver: Combi device of DVD player and radio without integrated amplifier.
DVI: Digital Visual Interface, is an interface for transmitting digital
video and graphic data (without audio).
Dynamic contrast ratio: Here the light intensity of the display is
adapted in case of a high black content in the picture. The so-called
backlights are dimmed automatically and the contrast ratio increases
temporarily, i.e. dynamically.
E
IP address: IP addresses (Internet Protocol Addresses) are used to
identify devices in an Internet Protocol (IP) network. IP addresses are
made up of four groups of numbers of three digits each.
IR-Link: The IR Link function allows the operation of accessory devices with concealed installation made by other manufacturers via the
Loewe TV set. The infrared sensor required for this is available as an accessory and can be connected to the IR-Link connection of the TV set.
J
JPEG/JPG: Joint Photographic Experts Group is a committee, which
has developed a standardised method for the compression of digital
images. This method JPEG (JPG for short), named after the committee, is a commonly used graphic format for photos.
Electronic Programme Guide: See EPG.
EPG: Electronic Programme Guide is the electronic variant of a printed
TV guide. Using the EPG you can watch the TV programme of the TV
station, transfer the appropriate data. The list of programmes contains
the title, beginning and end and duration of the programme. In addition
brief descriptions of the content of the programmes are also displayed.
Ethernet: Cable linked data net technology for local networks (LANs).
Also covers standards for e.g. plug connectors and transfer speeds.
L
LAN: Abbreviation for Local Area Network. Mainly used as a name for
networks with cabling (Ethernet).
LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.
Euro AV socket: Interface for connecting video devices to a TV set.
This socket is also referred to as Scart socket.
LCN: Logical Channel Numbers. In stations with LCN, the channel
location number belonging to the station is also transmitted by the
provider. The stations are sorted according to these channel location
numbers.
Exif: Standard format for additional data with modern digital cameras,
e.g. date and time, aperture, light sensitivity, alignment of the camera
(portrait/landscape).
L-Link: Intelligent system connection between Loewe devices for the
automatic exchange of information. Makes the operation of TV and
Loewe system components even more convenient.
F
FLOF: Full Level One Facilities. Teletext system in which names and
numbers of the jump destinations are transmitted in the bottom line
on every page. This guides the reader to related topics for example. An
information about which pages exist and which pages have sub-pages
is not available in FLOF.
LNB/LNC: The crucial electronic component of a satellite antenna
is referred to as an LNB (Low Noise Block Converter). It is mounted
in the focal point of a parabolic antenna. The designation LNC (Low
Noise Converter) indicates that conversion to a lower intermediate
frequency takes place. The supplemental block in the LNB refers to the
fact that a whole frequency range (a block) is converted in each case.
M
G
Gateway: Transition to another network; in this case connection from
the home network to the Internet.
The network device that establishes this connection is normally used
as a standard gateway. As a rule, the DSL router also represents the
Internet gateway.
H
HbbTV: HbbTV (Hybrid broadcast broadband television) is an industry
standard that offers an open platform for technology that is not dependent on manufacturers. HbbTV combines TV programmes with online
services seamlessly over broadband Internet (DSL).
HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection. Coding system
provided for the DVI and HDMI interfaces for secure transmission of
audio and video data.
HDMI: High Definition Multimedia Interface, represents a newly developed interface for the fully digital transfer of audio and video data.
HD Ready: A quality seal that is awarded to products that are capable
of displaying high-definition television (HDTV).
HDTV (HD): High Definition Television is a collective term, designating
a series of high-resolution television standards.
High and low band: Transmission ranges for satellites.
Host: Computer that the server services are provided from, i.e. that
makes data available. Refer also to media server.
150
MAC address: Hardware address of a network adaptor, e.g., he network card in the PC. It is issued permanently by the manufacturer and
is used to uniquely identify devices in networks.
Mbit/sec: Information about the transfer rate in networks in megabits,
i.e. millions of characters per second. With WLAN the maximum speed
is 11 (IEEE 802.11b), 54 (IEEE 802.11g) or 300 (IEEE 802.11n) Mbit/
sec, in wired networks 10 Mbit/sec or 100 Mbit/sec (Fast Ethernet).
Media Server: Stands for the device on which multimedia content
is stored, but is also the name for the service provided by the device
that makes this data available to the network.
Modulator: Transmitter in the video or DVD recorder so that the
devices can receive signals via the tuner of the TV device.
Mono: Single channel sound.
MP3: Data format for compressed audio files.
MPEG: Digital compression method for video.
Multimedia content: Videos, music files and photos are grouped
together under this term.
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Glossary
N
NAS: The term describes a hard disk which is independently linked
to the network (i.e. without a PC).
Network ID: NID refers to the so-called programme ID number, also
known as network ID – a number between 0 and 8191. This specification is necessary in specific cable networks of some countries. Then
only DVB signals of this station network are searched for.
Smart Card: The Smart Card is an electronic chip card issued by the
respective programme provider or by the certification free Pay TV
operators. It contains the code which is decoded by the CA module.
Static contrast ratio: Describes the difference between the brightest
and darkest picture display.
Stereo: Dual channel sound.
Switch: Device for connecting several computers to a network.
NICAM: Audio standard. Is used in Denmark, England, France, Sweden, and Spain.
Switching voltage: Video devices supply this voltage to switch the
TV set to playback.
NTSC: American colour standard, stands for National Television
Standards Committee.
Symbol rate: Specifies the transmission speed for data transmission.
P
Terrestrial: In data transmission a wireless transmission that does
not use satellites as intermediate station is referred to as terrestrial.
T
Page Catching: For teletext, refers to marking and calling a page
number.
PCM: Pulse Code Modulation for digital sound.
TFT: Thin Film Transistor. One widely distributed application is control
of liquid crystal flat screens, for which a signal transistor is used for
each pixel. This design of display is also referred to as active matrix,
however it is frequently also referred to as TFT display.
Picture in Picture: See PIP.
Tuner: Another term for receiver.
PAL: European colour standard, stands for phase alternation line.
PIP: Picture in Picture; a function which displays two pictures on the
screen.
U
Pixel: Also called picture element or pel. Denotes both the smallest
unit of a digital graphic grid and its display on a screen with grid control.
USB: Universal Serial Bus. Serial bus system for connecting external
devices (USB card reader, USB stick).
Pixel error: A pixel error is a defective pixel, usually on an LCD. Pixel
errors may be caused by production errors. They are expressed for
example by a constantly lit pixel or a constantly black pixel. Single
defective pixels however are excluded from a guarantee.
UPnP AV Is used to control network devices from all manufacturers.
Has become a widespread standard for home networking.
PNG: Abbreviation for Portable Network Graphics, a freely available
grid graphics format for loss-free compression.
Port: It allows assignment of data packages to various services which
are running on one device under the same network address.
Powerline: Powerline designates a type of wired network connection
in which data is transferred via the domestic electricity network using
optionally available adaptors.
Progressive JPEG: Progressive JPEGs are built up gradually. The
quality of the picture increases progressively during the loading
process.
ProScan/Progressive Scan: Progressive Scan (abbr. PS) or full
picture method is a technique in the picture build-up of monitors, TV
sets, beamers, and other display devices in which the output device is
not sent line interlaced half pictures – unlike in the interlace technique
– but real full pictures.
PSK: Clients that wish to connect to a wireless network secured with
PSK must know this key.
R
V
VGA: PC interface for connecting a monitor.
VPS: The Video Programming System (VPS) is a signal which some
(but not all) analogue TV stations transmit in the blanking interval.
The signal is used by video and DVD recorders when recording programmes to react to delays in start time, programme changes and
excesses of the planned programme time.
W
WEP: Abbreviation for Wired Equivalent Privacy. Former standard
process in the WiFi encryption, now outdated.
Wired network: see LAN.
Wireless network: see WLAN.
WLAN: Abbreviation for Wireless Local Area Network. Also abbreviated as wireless network.
WMA: Abbreviation for Windows Media Audio, Microsoft own audio
data format. As with MP3 files, the content is compressed here as well.
RGB: Colour signals Red, Green and Blue.
WMV: Abbreviation for Windows Media Video, proprietary Microsoft
video data format.
Router: Device for connecting several networks, e.g., home network
and Internet.
WPA: Abbreviation for Wi-Fi Protected Access. Replaced WEP as
standard encryption for wireless networks.
S
Satellite tuner: Receiver for satellite programmes.
SDTV: Standard Definition TeleVision.
SECAM: French colour standard, stands for Séquentiel à mémoire.
Set-top box: Set-top box (STB for short) refers to a device in entertainment electronics which is connected to another device, usually a
TV set, and offers the user additional functional options.
Signal input group: Depending on the applied signal, the signal
sources are divided into different groups.
Signal strength: Strength of the received antenna signal.
Signal quality: Quality of the incoming antenna signal.
151
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Glossary
Y
Ycc/Ypp: Colour standards for Set-top boxes..
YCbCr: Digital colour model, informally also incorrect designation
for signals in standard resolution (SDTV). The YCbCr colour model,
in which, e.g., DVDs are coded, has been developed from the YUV
colour model used in analogue television technology. With YCbCr, the
data is transferred via digital interfaces such as DVI or HDMI without
being converted.
YPbPr: Analogue colour model, see also Component connection.
The analogue YPbPr signal is generated from the YCbCr signal by a
converter in the source player and then output at the 3 component
outputs of the source player.
YUV: The YUV colour model is used for analogue television in accordance with the standards PAL and NTSC. YUV is often informally referred to when YPbPr (for analogue connections/cables) or YCbCr (in
digital applications) is actually meant. YUV only occurs in quadrature
modulation during PAL or NTSC transfer and is not otherwise used.
152
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
EC Declaration of Conformity
ɌɨɡɢɭɪɟɞɨɬɝɨɜɚɪɹɧɚɨɫɧɨɜɧɢɬɟɢɡɢɫɤɜɚɧɢɹɢɪɚɡɲɢɪɟɧɢɬɟɫɴɨɬɜɟɬɧɢɩɪɟɞɩɨɫɬɚɜɤɢȾɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚȿɋɊɚɡɪɟɲɟɧɨɟɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɧɟɬɨɦɭɜɴɜɜɫɢɱɤɢɞɴɪɠɚɜɢɨɬȿɋɢɨɫɜɟɧɬɨɜɚɜɂɫɥɚɧɞɢɹɇɨɪɜɟɝɢɹɢɒɜɟɣɰɚɪɢɹȼɴɜɎɪɚɧɰɢɹɢ
ɂɬɚɥɢɹɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɧɟɬɨɦɭɟɪɚɡɪɟɲɟɧɨɫɚɦɨɜɡɚɬɜɨɪɟɧɢɩɨɦɟɳɟɧɢɹ.
7RWR]DĜt]HQtMHYVRXODGXVH]iNODGQtPLSRåDGDYN\DRVWDWQtPLRGSRYtGDMtFtPLXVWDQRYHQtPL6PČUQLFH(*.0ĤåHEêW
SRXåtYDQYHYãHFK]HPtFK(8GRGDWHþQČWDNpQD,VODQGXY1RUVNX DYHâYêFDUVNX9H)UDQFLLDY,WDOLLMHSRXåLWtSĜtVWURMHGRYROHQpMHQRPYLQWHULpUX.
Dieses Gerät entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprechenden Vorgaben der Richtlinie 1999/5/
EG. Es darf in allen Ländern der EU sowie zusätzlich in Island, Norwegen und der Schweiz betrieben werden. In Frankreich
und Italien ist die Nutzung nur in Innenräumen zulässig.
Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de væsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EF. Det må
kun anvendes i EU-landene samt i Island, Norge og Schweiz. I Frankrig og Italien er det kun tilladt at anvende det indendørs.
Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales así como con otras disposiciones de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. Puede operar
en todos los países de la UE y adicionalmente en Islandia, Noruega y Suiza. En Francia e Italia, su uso está permitido
únicamente en espacios interiores.
Tämä laite täyttää direktiivin 1999/5/EY olennaiset vaatimukset ja on siinä asetettujen muiden laitetta koskevien määräysten
mukainen. Laitetta saa käyttää kaikissa EU-maissa sekä Islannissa, Norjassa ja Sveitsissä. Ranskassa ja Italiassa laitetta
saa käyttää vain sisätiloissa.
Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la Directive 1999/5/EC.
L‘utilisation est possible dans tous les pays de l‘UE, en Islande, en Norvège et en Suisse. En France et en Italie l‘utilisation
est autorisée uniquement dans des espaces fermés.
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. It
may be operated in all countries in the EU and also in Iceland, Norway and Switzerland. In France and Italy it may only be
used indoors.
ǹȣIJȩȢȠİȟȠʌȜȚı—ȩȢİȓȞĮȚıİıȣ——ȩȡijȦıȘ—İIJȚȢȠȣıȚȫįİȚȢĮʌĮȚIJȒıİȚȢțĮȚȐȜȜİȢıȤİIJȚțȑȢįȚĮIJȐȟİȚȢIJȘȢȅįȘȖȓĮȢ(&
ǼʌȚIJȡȑʌİIJĮȚȘȜİȚIJȠȣȡȖȓĮIJȘȢıİȩȜİȢIJȚȢȤȫȡİȢIJȘȢǼǼțĮșȫȢțĮȚıIJȘȞǿıȜĮȞįȓĮıIJȘȞȃȠȡȕȘȖȓĮțĮȚıIJȘȞǼȜȕİIJȓĮȈIJȘȞ
īĮȜȜȓĮțĮȚıIJȘȞǿIJĮȜȓĮİʌȚIJȡȑʌİIJĮȚȘȤȡȒıȘȝȩȞȠıİİıȦIJİȡȚțȠȪȢȤȫȡȠȣȢ.
Questo apparato é conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999/5/CE. Può essere messo
in funzione in tutti i paesi dell‘UE e inoltre in Islanda, Norvegia e in Svizzera. In Francia e in Italia è consentito l‘uso solo in
ambienti chiusi.
Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 1999/5/EF. Det kan
brukes i alle EU-land og dessuten i Island, Norge og Sveits. I Frankrike og Italia er kun innendørs bruk tillatt.
Dit apparaat voldoet aan de essentiele eisen en andere van toepassing zijnde bepalingen van de Richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Het
gebruik is toegestaan in alle landen van de EU en ook in IJsland, Noorwegen en Zweden. In Frankrijk en Italië is het gebruik
slechts binnenshuis toegestaan.
Este aparelho está em conformidade com os requisitos fundamentais e todas as restantes disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/
CE. Pode ser utilizado em todos os países da UE assim como na Islândia, Noruega e Suíça. Em França e Itália a sua utilização apenas é permitida em espaços interiores.
Denna utrustning är i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestämmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC.
Apparaten får användas i alla länder inom EU liksom på Island, i Norge och i Schweiz. I Frankrike och Italien får apparaten
användas endast inomhus.
153
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
EC Declaration of Conformity
154
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Index
3D ..................................................................................................... 84
3D function ...................................................................................... 86
3D mode .......................................................................................... 86
Contrast ........................................................................................... 84
Control ............................................................................................. 83
Copy recording to external hard disk ............................................. 52
Create new personal list ................................................................. 94
A
D
Access code .................................................................................... 98
Accurate Recording .........................................................................78
Adding stations to personal list ...................................................... 94
Adjusting the sound ........................................................................ 88
Adjust size of the PIP image ..........................................................106
Allow switching voltage ..................................................................123
Antenna DVB .......................................................................... 118, 123
Antenna DVB-S ..............................................................................123
Antenna DVB-T ...............................................................................123
Archive recording ............................................................................ 48
Assign digital audio input ...................................................... 118, 125
Audio commentary ........................................................................106
Audio commentary volume ........................................................... 88
AUDIO key ......................................................................................134
Audio playback
Playback ....................................................................................... 65
Auto dimming - Room ..............................................................84, 86
Auto dimming - Video (VBD+) ....................................................... 86
Automatic scan TV+Radio ............................................................. 89
Automatic shutdown .........................................................................7
Auto speech detection ................................................................... 89
AV connecting setting ....................................................................123
AV list ............................................................................................... 38
AV output signal .............................................................................. 89
Data capture .....................................................................................97
Deblocking filter .............................................................................. 84
Delete
Bookmarks .................................................................................. 63
individual bookmarks .................................................................. 63
Recording ...................................................................................... 51
Delete manager ............................................................................... 52
Set delete protection for timer recording ...................................78
Setting/cancelling delete protection .......................................... 52
Delete personal list ......................................................................... 94
Deleting blocks ................................................................................ 93
Deleting stations from the personal list ........................................ 94
Digital camera ................................................................................129
Digital Link ......................................................................................124
Digital Link HD functionality ..........................................................124
Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) .......................................................... 127
Digital Noise Control (DNC) ........................................................... 84
Direct recording .............................................................................. 48
One Touch Recording ................................................................. 48
Display .............................................................................................. 16
DR+ archive ..................................................................................... 50
DR+ Streaming ...........................................................................54, 81
Extended standby mode ............................................................. 81
Follow me ..................................................................................... 54
Notify started „Follow me“ recording .......................................107
Playback via the network ............................................................ 54
DR+ Streaming settings ................................................................107
Also use other archives ..............................................................107
DR+ device group name ............................................................107
DR+ device name .......................................................................107
DR+ standby ...............................................................................107
IP port number ...........................................................................107
Share DR+ archive with other devices ......................................107
DVB character set ..........................................................................106
DVB settings ...................................................................................106
DVD player ......................................................................................126
DVI ...................................................................................................126
0-9
B
Balance ............................................................................................ 89
Batteries ........................................................................................... 15
Blu-ray player .................................................................................126
Bookmarks
Delete ........................................................................................... 63
Delete individual ones ................................................................. 63
Jump ............................................................................................ 62
Set .......................................................................................... 49, 61
Brightness ....................................................................................... 84
Browser .............................................................................................74
Bundling the cables ......................................................................... 15
E
C
Calling the Web browser ..................................................................74
Camcorder .............................................................................126, 129
CA modul ................................................................................. 80, 110
Changing the title of an archive ...................................................... 51
Character table ................................................................................ 19
CI slot ............................................................................................... 80
Cleaning and care ..............................................................................7
Clear data base ................................................................................97
Code number .................................................................................. 98
Coloured keys .................................................................................. 42
Colour intensity ............................................................................... 84
Colour temperature ........................................................................ 84
Component connection ................................................................130
Connecting active loudspeakers ..................................................132
Connecting antennas ...................................................................... 13
Connecting HiFi/AV amplifier ........................................................132
Connecting home network .............................................................. 14
Connecting speakers ....................................................................... 14
Connecting speaker system ......................................................... 131
Connecting the TV set ..................................................................... 13
Connections ......................................................................... 11, 12, 83
Edit new personal list ...................................................................... 94
Edit personal list .............................................................................. 94
Energy efficiency ................................................................. 21, 75, 99
Environment ...................................................................................148
EPG .................................................................................................. 39
Exit Browser .....................................................................................74
External hard disk ........................................................................... 52
Extras ................................................................................................75
F
Favourites ........................................................................................ 34
Film quality improvement (DMM) ................................................. 84
FLOF ................................................................................................. 42
Function list ..................................................................................... 38
G
Game console ........................................................................124, 126
Gaming mode .................................................................................124
155
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Index
H
N
Hard disks ....................................................................................... 113
Checking ..................................................................................... 113
Formatting .................................................................................. 113
HbbTV .............................................................................................. 44
HbbTV text ...................................................................................... 44
HDMI ...............................................................................................126
HDMI CEC ....................................................................................... 127
Headphone volume ........................................................................ 38
Home networking systems ...........................................................133
Home view ....................................................................................... 33
Network connections
Wired ............................................................................................ 55
Wireless ........................................................................................ 55
Network selection ..................................................................... 23, 24
Network settings ............................................................................ 114
Neue Persönliche Liste anlegen ..................................................... 94
Notify hidden sections ...................................................................107
Numerical keys ...........................................................................17, 35
I
Image+ Active ................................................................................. 84
Info display ....................................................................................... 20
Installing the TV set ......................................................................... 13
Integrated features .......................................................................... 82
Internal WLAN antenna .................................................................. 55
Interval functions ............................................................................. 61
Deleting part of the recording .................................................... 62
Hide .............................................................................................. 62
J
Jump ................................................................................................ 58
Jump distance ................................................................................107
Jumping to Bookmarks .................................................................. 62
L
Language ............................................................................21, 97, 139
Length of the station list ................................................................. 35
LNC/LNB ............................................................................ 26, 28, 29
Loewe Apps ....................................................................................136
Loudness ......................................................................................... 88
M
Mains switch ............................................................................... 10, 16
Manual scan Radio .......................................................................... 89
Manual scan TV ............................................................................... 89
Maximum volume ........................................................................... 89
Media
Access .......................................................................................... 55
Exit ................................................................................................ 55
Overview ...................................................................................... 55
MediaNet
Browse ..........................................................................................73
Call .................................................................................................72
Exit .................................................................................................72
Settings .........................................................................................73
Mobile phone keyboard ................................................................... 19
Move block ...................................................................................... 93
Move picture up/down .................................................................... 84
Move stations in the personal list .................................................. 94
Multimedia / Network .................................................................... 83
Multimedia settings ........................................................................117
Music playback
end ................................................................................................67
Radio mode ................................................................................. 68
Repeat .......................................................................................... 66
Shuffle playback .......................................................................... 66
Winding ........................................................................................ 65
156
O
One Touch Recording ..................................................................... 48
On/Off button ............................................................................. 10, 16
On-screen displays ........................................................................105
OPC .................................................................................................. 84
P
Page selection ................................................................................. 42
Parental lock ..............................................................................53, 98
PC ....................................................................................................129
PC IN - Display ................................................................................. 84
Personal list ..................................................................................... 36
Add station .................................................................................. 94
Create new list ............................................................................. 94
Delete list ..................................................................................... 94
Delete station .............................................................................. 94
Move station ................................................................................ 94
Rename list .................................................................................. 94
Photo ................................................................................................ 70
Exit ................................................................................................. 71
Full-screen mode .......................................................................... 71
Rotating the photo ....................................................................... 71
Slide show ..................................................................................... 71
Picture ...................................................................................... 83, 108
Picture adjustment ...................................................................84, 85
Picture format ...........................................................................84, 85
4:3 ................................................................................................ 85
16:9 ............................................................................................... 85
PALplus ........................................................................................ 85
Panorama .................................................................................... 85
Zoom ............................................................................................ 85
Picture settings ............................................................................... 84
PIP .................................................................................................... 45
PIP Settings ....................................................................................106
Positioning/aligning the DVB-T antenna ......................................123
Q
Quick start mode ............................................................................ 99
R
Record conflict .................................................................................77
Recording ....................................................................................... 112
Post record time ......................................................................... 112
Pre-record time .......................................................................... 112
Remote control ....................................................................9, 15, 134
Remote TV switch on of the TV set ..............................................124
Renaming the personal list ............................................................. 94
Renderer ..........................................................................................117
Repeat initial installation ............................................................21, 82
Reset to factory settings ................................................................ 82
Network ....................................................................................... 82
Picture/Sound ............................................................................. 82
Speaker system ........................................................................... 82
Restore stations .............................................................................. 93
Rotate TV ...................................................................................43, 111
RS-232C interface ..........................................................................133
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Index
S
Safety ............................................................................................. 6, 7
Satellite selection ......................................................... 26, 27, 28, 29
Satellite system ............................................................................... 25
Scope of delivery ................................................................................5
Scrambled stations ...............................................23, 24, 30, 80, 90
Selecting a station out of the station list ....................................... 35
Select station .................................................................................. 35
using the numerical keys ............................................................ 35
via personal list ............................................................................ 36
with P+/P- ................................................................................... 35
Serial recording tolerance .............................................................107
Service ............................................................................................158
Set covers ......................................................................................... 13
Setting the HiFi/AV amplifier .........................................................122
Setting the volume .......................................................................... 35
Set-top box .....................................................................................126
Sharpness ....................................................................................... 84
Shutdown of the ext. device via TV button ...................................124
Side by side ..................................................................................... 86
Signal type ......................................................................................123
Skin tone .......................................................................................... 84
Slow motion .................................................................................... 60
Smart Card ...................................................................................... 80
Smart jump ............................................................................. 58, 107
Software download ....................................................................... 100
Software update
Automatic update via the internet ............................................104
Manually via Antenna .................................................................102
Software update via Antenna ....................................................103
Via USB memory medium ........................................................ 101
Sound .........................................................................................83, 88
Sound adjustment .......................................................................... 88
Sound components ....................................................................... 119
Special functions ............................................................................ 82
Standby mode .................................................................................. 16
Station lists Radio .....................................................................89, 93
Station lists TV ..........................................................................89, 93
Stations ......................................................................................83, 89
Status display ...................................................................................37
STB key ...........................................................................................134
Stop recording early ....................................................................... 49
Subtitle ..................................................................... 49, 63, 106, 107
Supply voltage 5V ..........................................................................123
Switching off the TV set during recording ..................................... 49
Switch off .......................................................................................... 16
Switch on .......................................................................................... 16
Switch-on volume ........................................................................... 89
Switch to live picture ........................................................................47
System settings .............................................................................. 83
TOP .................................................................................................. 42
Top/bottom ..................................................................................... 86
TV key ....................................................................................... 15, 134
TV on when memorised ..................................................................97
TV viewing with time shift ........................................................ 47, 49
U
UPnP ................................................................................................ 55
USB stick ....................................................................................... 100
V
VBD+ ................................................................................................ 84
VIDEO key .......................................................................................134
Video playback
Change picture format ................................................................ 60
Jump by entering a time ............................................................. 58
Playback ........................................................................................57
Repeat .......................................................................................... 59
Selecting language/sound .......................................................... 60
Winding ........................................................................................ 59
Viewing a locked movie .................................................................. 53
Viewing another movie from the archive during archive recording 49
W
Watching other stations during archive recording ....................... 49
Web ...................................................................................................72
WEB key function ........................................................................... 112
Y
YPbPr ..............................................................................................130
YUV .................................................................................................130
T
Teletext ............................................................................................ 42
Time and date ................................................................................105
Timer .................................................................................................75
Timer list .......................................................................................75
Timer Services .............................................................................79
Timer data ........................................................................................78
Automatic time control ................................................................78
Beginning ......................................................................................78
Date ...............................................................................................78
Delete protection ..........................................................................78
End ................................................................................................78
Favourite .......................................................................................78
Lock recording ..............................................................................78
Recording subtitles ......................................................................78
Recording type .............................................................................78
Station ...........................................................................................78
157
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Service
HB Austria electronic products Vertriebs GmbH
Pfarrgasse 52
1230 Wien, Österreich
Tel +43 - 1 610 48 - 100
E-mail: [email protected]
EET Europarts
Loewe Denmark
Bregnerødvej 133 D
3460 Birkerød, Denmark
Tel +45 - 82 19 19
E-mail: [email protected]
Qualifi Pty Ltd
24 Lionel Road
Mt.Waverley VIC 3149 Australia
Tel +61-03-8542 1111
Fax +61-03-9543 3677
E-mail: [email protected]
Gaplasa S.A.
Conde de Torroja, 25
28022 Madrid, España
Tel +34 - 917 48 29 60
Fax +34 - 913 29 16 75
E-mail: [email protected]
Loewe Opta Benelux NV/SA
Uilenbaan 84
2160 Wommelgem, België
Tel +32 - 3 - 2 70 99 30
Fax +32 - 3 - 2 71 01 08
E-mail: [email protected]
Loewe France SAS
Rue du Dépôt,
13 Parc de l l‘Europe, BP 10010
67014 Strasbourg Cédex, France
Tel +33 - 3- 88 79 72 50
Fax +33 - 3- 88 79 72 59
E-mail: [email protected]
Darlington Service
193 Kn. Klementina St.
1612 Sofia, Bulgaria
Tel +359 - 2 9556399
E-mail: [email protected]
Telion AG
Rütistrasse 26
8952 Schlieren, Schweiz
Tel +41 - 44 732 15 11
Fax +41 - 44 732 15 02
E-mail: [email protected]
Guangdong MG Audio Development Co.Ltd
No.8 Jinghu Rd. Xinhua St. Huadu Reg.
GZ, PRC
Tel +86-(0)20-22675666
Fax +86-(0)20-22675777
E-mail: [email protected]
Xiamen Tenote Investment Co. Ltd
26F 3# Xinglin Bay Operation Center,
No.478 xinglinwan Avenue,
Jimei District, Xiamen, Fujian, PRC
Tel +86-400 088 1566
E-mail: [email protected]
Hadjikyriakos & Sons Ltd.
121 Prodromos Str., P.O Box 21587
1511 Nicosia, Cyprus
Tel +357 - 22 87 21 11
Fax +357 - 22 66 33 91
E-mail: [email protected]
BaSys CS s.r.o.
Sodomkova 1478/8
10200 Praha 10 - Hostivar,
Česká republika
Tel +420 234 706 700
Fax +420 234 706 701
E-mail: [email protected]
Loewe Technologies GmbH,
Customer Care Center
Industriestraße 11
96317 Kronach, Deutschland
Tel +49 9261 99-500
Fax +49 9261 99-515
E-mail: [email protected]
© by Loewe Technologies 22.04.14
158
EET Europarts
Loewe Finland
Metsänneidonkuja 12
02130 Espoo, Finland
Tel +358 9 47 850 900
www.eeteuroparts.fi
Loewe UK Limited
1st Floor, 237A Kensington High St
London
W8 6SA, UK
Tel +44 - (0) 207 368 1100
Fax +44 - (0) 207 368 1101
E-mail: [email protected]
Issagogiki Emboriki Ellados S.A.
321 Mesogion Av.
152 31 Chalandri-Athens, Hellas
Tel +30 - 210 672 12 00
Fax +30 - 210 674 02 04
E-mail: christina_argyropoulou@
isembel.gr
Basys Magyarországi KFT
Tó park u.9.
2045 Törökbálint, Magyar
Tel +36 - 23 887-920
Fax +36 - 23 41 51 82
E-mail: [email protected]
Plug&Play Ltd.
Bednjanska 8, 10000 Zagreb
Hrvatska (Kroatia)
Tel +385 1 4929 683
Fax +385 1 4929 682
E-mail: [email protected]
Loewe Italiana S.r.L.
Via Monte Baldo, 14/P – 14/N
37069 Dossobuono di Villafranca di
Verona
Tel +39 - 045 82 51 690
Fax +39 - 045 82 51 622
E-mail: [email protected]
Clear electronic entertainment Ltd
13 Noah Mozes St.
Agish Ravad Building
Tel Aviv 67442, Israel
Tel +972 - 3 - 6091100
Fax +972 - 3 - 6092200
E-mail: [email protected]
Gaplasa S.A.
Rua Professor Henrique de Barros
Edifício Sagres, 2º. C
2685-338 Prior Velho, Portugal
Tel +351 - 21 942 78 30
Fax +351 - 21 940 00 78
E-mail: [email protected]
MIHAUS.
Plot No.390, M.G.Road
Near Ghitorni Metro Station
Opp.Metro Pillar No.112
Ghitorni, New Delhi-110030, India
Tel. +91 11 64008851
Tel. +91 11 64008854
Fax +91 11 47675615
E-Mail: [email protected]
3LOGIC Sp.z o.o.
ul. Zakopiańska 153
30-435 Kraków
Tel +48 - 12 640 20 00
Fax +48 - 12 640 20 01
www.3logic.pl
Pars Royal Taramesh
LOEWE Gallery
#3 Shariati St. Opp. Soheil St.
P.O Box 1914965537
Tehran, Iran
Tel + 98 21-22391661
E-Mail: [email protected]
JOR
ACCU-TECH Solutions Co.
1-Kharija Al-Ashja‘i Street
Jabal Al-Weibdeh
P.O.Box 9668 Amman 11191, Jordan
Tel: +962-6-465-9985
Fax: +962-6-465-0119
E-Mail: [email protected]
LOEWE Show Room
Olaya Street, Near Kingdom Center
RIYADH, SAUDI ARABIA
P.O Box 92831 Riyadh 11663
Tel +966-11-4640927
Fax +966-11-4640759
E-mail: [email protected]
Kpartners, SIA
A.Čaka iela 80
Rīga, LV-1011, Latvia
Tel +3 71 - 67 29 29 59
Fax +3 71 - 67 31 05 68
E-mail: [email protected]
A Cappella Ltd.
Ausros Vartu 5, Pasazo skg.
01129 Vilnius, Lithuania
Tel +370 - 52 12 22 96
Fax +370 - 52 62 66 81
E-mail: [email protected]
Doneo Co. Ltd
34/36 Danny Cremona Street
Hamrun, HMR1514, Malta
Tel +356 - 21 - 22 53 81
Fax +356 - 21 - 23 07 35
E-mail: [email protected]
Premium Consumer Electronics as
Østre Kullerød 5
3241 Sandefjord, Norge
Tel +47 - 33 29 30 40
Fax +47 - 33 44 60 44
E-mail: [email protected]
V2 Indonesia
5th Intiland tower
Jl. Jenderal Sudirman 32
Jakarta 10220, INDONESIA
Tel +62-21 57853547
E-mail: [email protected]
I Control SAL
Gemmaizeh, Rmeil.
Building 328 1st Floor Beirut, Lebanon
Tel +961 1 446777 / 1 587446
Fax +961 1 582446
E-mail: [email protected]
Service Center Loewe
Aptekarsky per.4 podjezd 5A
105005 Moscow, Russia
Tel +7 - 499 940 42 32 ( ext. 454 )
Fax +7 - 495 730 78 01
E-mail: [email protected]
EET Europarts AB
Loewe Sweden
Box 4124
SE-131 04, Nacka, Sverige
Tel +46 - 8 507 510 00
E-mail: [email protected]
Atlas Care Centre
11 changi south street 3
#03-01 builders centre
Singapore 486122
Tel +65 - 6745 2028
Fax +65 - 6546 7861
E-mail: [email protected]
BaSys SK, s.r.o.
Stará Vajnorská 37/C
83104 Bratislava, Slovakia
Tel + 421 2 49 10 66 11
Fax + 421 2 49 10 66 33
E-mail: [email protected]
ENKAY GROUP
SERVISPLUS MUSTERI HIZMETLERI
Alemdag Cad. Site Yolu No:18
Umraniye, Istanbul, TÜRKIYE
Tel 444 4 784
E-mail: [email protected]
Dubai Audio Center
P.O. Box 32836, Sheikh Zayed Road
Dubai, UAE
Tel +971 - 4 343 14 41
Fax +971 - 4 343 77 48
E-mail: [email protected]
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Code page
STB
ABSAT
AEGIR
AIWA
AKAI
ALBA
166, 169
179
141
033, 104
060, 017, 067, 104,
111, 126, 180, 201
ALCATEL
336
ALDES
133, 168, 179, 201
ALLSAT
033, 048, 059, 077, 201
ALLSONIC
133, 168, 226
ALLTECH
060, 137, 225
ALPHA
033
ALTAI
047
AMITRONICA
060
AMPERE
047, 186, 207
AMSTRAD
060, 006, 047, 071, 097,
132, 165, 174, 175, 186,
212, 216, 217, 227, 228
ANGLO
060
ANKARO
060, 051, 133,
161, 162, 168, 226
ANTTRON
017, 077, 180
APOLLO
017
ARCON
025, 051, 079, 132, 136, 161
ARMSTRONG
033, 175
ARTHUR MARTIN
130
ASA
009
ASAT
025, 033
ASLF
060
AST
127, 194
ASTACOM
171, 172
ASTON
032, 095
ASTRA
013, 021, 025, 098, 099
164, 175, 178, 190, 222, 223
ASTRO
006, 091, 094, 176,
177, 179, 180, 181
AUDIOTON
059, 180
AUSTAR
212, 332
AVALON
047
AXIS
054, 210, 223, 226
BARCOM
021, 051
BEKO
067
BEST
051, 226
BIRMINGHAM CABLE
343
BLAUPUNKT
090, 176
BLUE SKY
060, 217
BOCA
163, 169, 175, 186,
199, 207, 222
BRAIN WAVE
094, 161
BRANDT
069
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
050, 227
BRITISH TELECOM
341
BROADCAST
013
BROCO
060, 223
BRUNS
133
BSKYB
227
BT
104, 171, 172, 229, 335
BT SATELLITE
171
BUBU SAT
060
BUSH
048, 077, 106, 126
BVV
161
CABLETIME
308, 311, 312, 333, 334
CAMBRIDGE
006, 104, 199
CANAL
019
CANAL DIGITAL
128
CANAL PLUS
128, 019, 320, 321
CANAL SATELLITE
128, 191, 211
CANARY
137
CARAT.SOM
054
CHAPARRAL
012, 134
CHESS
197
CITYCOM
135, 164, 203, 204, 230
CLARK
180
CLATRONIC
094
CLEMENS KAMPHUS
133, 210
CLYDE CABLE VISION
317
CNT
179
COMCAST
004
COMCRYPT
320, 321
COMMANDER
161, 162
COMMLINK
168
COMMUNICADO
054
COMTEC
054, 168
CONDOR
164, 226
CONNEXIONS
047, 096, 226, 231
CONRAD 006, 010, 164, 169, 226, 230
CONTEC
054, 135, 169
COSAT
059
CROWN
175
CRYPTOVISION
067, 315
CYBERMAXX
116
CYRUS
037
DAERYUNG
047
DAEWOO
060, 017, 025
DANSAT
048, 077
DAUMLING
163
D-BOX
045, 214
DECCA
038
DECSAT
310
DECSAT CANAL
310
DELFA
212
DEUTSCHE TELEKOM
056
DEW
025, 054
DIAMOND
225
DIRECTV
144
DISCOVERER
197
DISEQC
171, 172
DISK EXPRESS
051
DISMOND
225
DISTRATEL 119, 146, 147, 149, 185, 217
DISTRISAT
033, 059
DNR
161
DNT
033, 037, 047, 231
DRAKE
029
DST
017
DUAL
025
DUNE
226
DYNASAT
196
ECHOSTAR
060, 021, 047, 086,
088, 128, 211, 213
EIF
014, 198
EINHELL
060, 006, 017, 097, 163,
168, 169, 175, 186, 222
ELEKTA
179
ELSAT
071
ELTA
017, 033, 059, 226
ELTASAT
059
EMANON
017
EMME ESSE
133, 213, 226
ENGEL
060
EP SAT
067
EURIEULT
185, 217
EUROCRYPT
021, 067
EURODEC
110, 232
EUROPA
006, 033, 161,
162, 164, 169, 212
EUROPEAN
163
EUROSAT
175, 225
EUROSKY
164, 175, 186, 226
EUROSTAR
164, 215, 233, 234
EUTRA
137, 203
EXATOR
017, 104, 180
FAGOR
059
FERGUSON
023, 048, 067, 077,
106, 108, 111, 124, 206
FIDELITY
006, 071, 097
FILMNET
318
FINLANDIA
021, 067
FINLUX
009, 010, 021, 067, 220
FINNSAT
110
FLAIR MATE
060
FORCE
068
FOXTEL
235, 022, 319
FRACARRO
017, 087, 196, 213
FRANCE TELECOM
344
FREECOM
017, 193, 201
FREESAT
137
FTE
060, 080, 136, 137, 169,
196, 199, 212, 226
FUBA
010, 014, 017, 021, 047,
051, 088, 135, 176, 220, 226
G SAT
077, 130
GALAXI
051
GALAXIS
054, 059, 133, 161, 168,
209, 210, 211, 212, 223,
226, 236, 237, 238
GALAXISAT
127
GARDINER
204
GEC
317
GENIX
024
GENERAL-INSTRUMENTS
332
GIUCAR RECORD
089
GMI
175
GOLDBOX
128, 191, 211
GOODMANS
067, 111
GRAETZ
088, 099
GRANADA
021, 099
GRANDIN
185, 239
GROTHUSEN
017, 193
GRUNDIG
026, 003, 067, 090, 097,
171, 172, 176, 217, 227,
240, 241, 242, 020, 307, 316
HANSEATIC
197
HANTOR
017, 094
HANURI
179
HARTING UND HELLING
133
HASE & IGEL
161
HELIOCOM
164
HIGH PERFORMANCE
085, 122
HINARI
017, 077
HIRSCHMANCE
090
HIRSCHMANN 006, 009, 010, 047, 081,
113, 133, 171, 172, 176,
196, 203, 216, 219, 243
HISAWA
094
HITACHI
067, 106, 111, 120
HNE
165
HOUSTON
059, 071, 161, 162, 171
HUMAX
212, 236, 244, 005
HUTH
013, 054, 059, 094, 133,
136, 161, 162, 163, 164,
168, 169, 175, 186
HYPERVISION
345
ICX
138
IKUSI ALLSAT
136
IMEX
185
IMPERIAL
126
INGELEN
088, 099
INNOVATION
116
INTERNATIONAL
186
INTERTRONIC
175
INTERVISION
042, 059, 164, 170
INVIDEO
213
ITALTEL
213
ITT
021, 067, 088, 099, 120, 123
ITT NOKIA
009, 010, 021, 067, 088,
099, 120, 123, 214
JEEMON
059
JERROLD
138, 330, 332, 341, 343
JOHANSSON
059, 094
JOK
171, 172, 200, 229
JSR
059
JVC
003, 104
KABELVISION
330
KAMM
060, 215
KATHREIN
060, 033, 037, 080, 081,
090, 091, 094, 096, 112,
114, 135, 166, 176, 180,
196, 204, 218, 245, 246
KEY WEST
163
KOLON
017
KONIG
164
KOSCOM
210
KOSMOS
080, 081, 133, 193
KR
059, 137, 180, 203
KREISELMEYER
176
K-SAT
060
KYOSTAR
017, 180
KYOTO GMI ATLAN
143
L&S ELECTRONIC
226
LASAT
054, 164, 175, 179,
186, 199, 222, 226
LEMON
161, 162, 247
LENCO
060, 017, 025, 079, 161,
162, 164, 193, 221, 223, 226
LENNOX
042, 059
LENSON
006
LEXUS
033
LEYCO
104
LG (GOLDSTAR)
079, 107, 193
LIFESAT
197, 226
LIFETEX
116
LOKIA
088
LORENZEN 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 186
LORRAINE
193
LUPUS
226
LUXOR
006, 010, 021, 088, 097,
099, 120, 123, 130, 214
LYONNAISE
110
M&B1
197
MACAB
225, 232, 248, 329
MAGAI
080
MANATA
060, 171, 172
MANHATTAN
042, 059, 067, 106,
111, 151, 171, 172,
179, 210, 221
MARANTZ
033, 037
MASCOM
081
MASPRO
060, 026, 003, 093, 096,
106, 108, 113, 137, 161,
176, 242
MASTER_S
135
MATSUI
003, 109, 171, 172, 176
MAX
164
MB
197
MEDIABOX
191, 211
MEDIAMARKT
175
MEDIASAT
006, 128, 191, 211, 223
MEDION
060, 226
MEDISON
060
MEGA
033
MELECTRONIC
204
MEMPHIS
054, 134
METRONIC
060, 017, 117, 119, 121,
131, 146, 147, 149, 151,
152, 153, 154, 156, 157,
168, 175, 179, 180, 185,
204, 217
METZ
090, 176
MICRO
164, 180
MICRO ELECTRONIC
060
MICRO MAXX
116
MICRO STAR
116
MICRO TEC
060
MICRO TECHNOLOGY
060, 190, 223
MICRONIK
249
MINERVA
003, 090
MITSUBISHI
067, 090
MITSUMI
222
MNET
320, 321, 342
MORGAN
060, 033, 059, 132, 163,
169, 175, 186, 199, 207,
222, 250
MOVIE TIME
328
MR ZAPP
329
MULTICHOICE
100, 235
MULTISTAR
080
MURATTO
127, 193
MYRYAD
037
MYSAT
060
NAVEX
094
NEC
030, 073
NEIRU
079
NETA P
140
NETWORK
077
NEUHAUS
060, 006, 059, 161,
162, 164, 169, 210, 223,
NEUSAT
060, 161, 210
NEXTWAVE
138
NIKKO
060, 175, 201
NOKIA
009, 010, 021, 045, 067,
088, 099, 105, 120, 123,
211, 214, 242, 251, 346
NOMEX
221
NOOS
329
NORCO
221
NORDMENDE
017, 067, 179, 206
NOVIS
094
NSC
328
NTC
133, 203
NTL CABLETELL
332
OCEANIC
225
OCTAGON 017, 025, 054, 161, 162, 180
OKANO
080, 133, 175
OLYMPIC
133
ONDIGITAL
187, 188, 189
ONO
301
OPTEX
059, 135, 196, 208
159
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Code page
OPTIMA
133
OPTUS
332
ORBIT
025, 194
ORBITECH 006, 017, 103, 169, 181, 224
ORIGO
126, 221
OSAT
097
OTTO VERSAND
090
OXFORD
104
PACE
001, 022, 044, 048, 050,
067, 077, 098, 108, 124,
189, 202, 227, 242, 252,
253, 319, 347
PACIFIC
225
PACKSAT
171, 172
PALCOM
092
PALLADIUM
003, 006, 017, 175
PALSAT
006
PANASAT
235, 254
PANASONIC
031, 067, 124, 227
PANDA
021, 048, 067, 164, 176, 210
PATRIOT
104
PHILIPS
026, 003, 033, 037, 051,
067, 077, 124, 128, 144,
156, 161, 162, 169, 171,
172, 176, 180, 187, 188,
191, 204, 211, 218, 229,
242, 313, 323, 329, 345
PHOENIX
054, 077
PHONOTREND
042, 059, 133,
142, 168, 212
PIONEER
128, 191, 211, 302
PIXX
255
PLANET
126, 213
POLSAT
110
POLYTRON
047, 135
PREDKI
017, 094
PREISNER
047, 103, 163, 169,
175, 186, 199, 222
PREMIER
059, 133
PREMIERE
191, 211, 214, 007
PROMAX
067
PROSAT
168, 170
PROSONIC
165
PROTEK
225
PROVISAT
201
PROVISION
179
PVP STEREO VISUAL
330
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
341
PYE
003
PYXIS
208, 210
QUADRAL
168, 169, 170,
171, 172, 173, 226
QUELLE
090, 097, 164, 165
QUIERO
110
RADIOLA
033, 037
RADIX
047, 137, 216
RAINBOW
137, 180
RC
138
RC-1000
104
RED STAR
226
REDPOINT
223
REDSTAR
226
RFT
033, 037, 161, 162, 168, 224
ROADSTAR
060
ROVER
060, 170
SABA
077, 108, 161, 164,
171, 172, 179, 200,
201, 206, 217, 229
SABRE
067
SAGEM
205, 329
SAKURA
054, 057
SALORA
021, 088, 099, 120, 130, 303
SAMSUNG
017, 080, 127, 132,
211, 243, 302, 324
SAT
006, 071, 127, 194
SAT PARTNER
017, 094, 133,
179, 180, 193, 201
SAT TEAM
060
SATBOX
304
SATCOM
013, 164, 197
SATEC
060, 077, 242
SATECO
017
SATELCO
226
SATFORD
013
SATLINE
170
160
SATMASTER
SATPARTNER
013
017, 079, 094, 133, 179,
180, 193, 201
SATSTATION
151
SAVA
077, 108, 161, 164, 171,
172, 179, 200, 201, 206, 217
SCHACKE
180
SCHAUB LORENZ
088, 099
SCHNEIDER
171, 172, 218
SCHWAIGER
077, 114, 135, 161, 164,
169, 197, 217, 255
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 305, 306, 325, 326
SEDEA-ELECTRONIQUE
017
SEEMANN
047, 104, 175, 223
SEG
017, 094, 165,
178, 190, 197, 226
SELECO
059, 213
SEPTIMO
146, 151, 154
SERVI SAT
059
SIEMENS
090, 176, 199
SILVA
079, 193
SINTRACK
013
SKANTIN
060
SKARDIN
223
SKINSAT
006
SKR
060
SKY
034, 050, 189, 227, 001
SKY MASTER
060, 133, 168,
170, 197, 215
SKY PLUS
002
SKYLAB
051
SKYMAX
033
SKYSAT
197
SKYVISION
059
SL
161, 165, 175, 186
SM ELECTRONIC
060
SMART
186
SONY
067, 211, 227
SR
222
STARLAND
060
STARRING
094
STARSAT
080
STRONG
017, 025, 179, 180, 186,
196, 211, 226, 235
STS
328
STV
014
STVI
014, 137
SUMIDA
175
SUNNY SOUND
226
SUNSAT
060, 223
SUNSTAR
163, 175, 186, 222, 226
SUPERCABLE
343
SUPERNOVA
189
TAGRA
059
TANDBERG
008
TANDY
085, 122
TANTEC
067, 108
TATUNG
067
TCM
116
TECHNILAND
013, 059
TECHNISAT
006, 028, 033, 047, 102
103, 181, 184, 224, 231
TECHNOWELT
164
TECO
025, 175, 222
TELASAT
164, 197
TELECIEL
180, 201
TELECOM
060
TELEDIREKT
077
TELEFUNKEN
017, 083, 171 , 172
TELEKA
026, 006, 047, 081, 103,
180, 161, 164, 175, 203, 210
TELEMASTER
179
TELEMAX
018
TELEPIU
320, 321
TELE PLUS ONE
320, 321
TELESAT
164, 197
TELESERVICE
311, 314
TELESTAR
006
TELETECH
215
TELEVES
006, 067
TELEWIRE
059
TENSAI
025, 094
TEVION
116
THOMSON
060, 049, 067, 128,
155, 164, 171, 172,
191, 205, 206, 211
225
067
023, 048, 067
135, 175
059
033
060, 006, 013,
059, 067, 171, 210
TOPFIELD
011
TORX
341
TOSHIBA
067, 145
TPS
129, 205
TRENDLINE
222
TRENDPLAIN
222
TRGRA
088
TRIAD
085, 101, 127, 193, 194
TRIASAT
006, 220
TRIAX
060, 006, 033,
047, 211, 220, 230
TRISTAR
025
TUDI
327
TWINNER
115, 119
UNIDEN
058, 071, 080, 148, 208
UNISAT
033, 054, 175
UNITED CABLE
330, 341
UNITOR
051, 094
UNIVERSUM
003, 009, 071,
164, 165, 176
VAIADIGITAL
078
VARIOSAT
176
VARIOSTAT
176
VECTOR
178
VENTANA
033, 037
VESTEL
165
VIASAT
016
VIDEOCRYPT
023
VIDEOTRON
331
VIDEOWAY
331
VIDIO WAY
015
VIPER
054
VIRGIN MEDIA
063
VISIOPASS
309, 313, 329
VISIOSAT
060, 194, 200
VIVA
161, 162
VORTEC
017, 082, 083, 132, 142
VTECH
127, 194, 200, 204
WELA
060, 163, 169, 186
WESTMINSTER
335
WETEKOM
006, 197, 207
WEWA
067
WIBO
175
WINERSAT
094
WINTERGARTEN
168
WISI
006, 047, 067, 088,
123, 127, 164, 169,
176, 194, 200, 210
WITTENBERG
071
WOLSEY
085, 122
WOORISAT
179
WORLD
094
WORLDSAT
171, 172
XCOM
169
XCOM MULTIMEDIA
046
XRYPTON
226
XSAT
060, 046, 166, 169
YES
189
ZAUNKONIG
161
ZEHNDER
051, 080, 114, 127, 135
165, 179, 204, 226, 255
ZENITH
034, 314
ZETA-TECHNOLOGY
033
ZODIAC
180
ZWERGNASE
163, 175
THORENS
THORN
THORN-FERGUSON
TIOKO
TLEWIRE
TOKAI
TONNA
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Notes
161
„ Individual 40-55
User guide
Notes
162